IQCentralOperatingManual

8/3/2019 IQCentralOperatingManual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/iqcentraloperatingmanual 1/314

Operating Manual

Advanced Central System Software

®

CENTRAL QIQ





Operating Manual

IQ Central ®

Advanced Central Traffic System Software

11/14/2008

p/n: 99-429 Rev 2



Copyright © 2008 Peek Traffic Corporation.All rights reserved.

Information furnished by Peek is believed to be accurate and reliable, however Peek does not warranty the accuracy,completeness, or fitness for use of any of the information furnished. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any intellectual property. Peek Traffic reserves the right to alter any of the Company's products or published technical data relating thereto at any time without notice.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or via any electronic or mechanical means for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the expressed, written permission of Peek Traffic Corporation.

Peek Traffic Corporation 2511 Corporate Way Palmetto, FL 34221 U.S.A.

Trademarks IQ Central, IQ Data, IQ ATC, IQ Connect, Peek Traffic Corporation, 3000E, Multisonics, Transyt, 390CJ, 820A, Traconex,TMM-500, US Traffic Corporation, USTC, Traconex, Traconet, DTI, and Display Technologies, Inc. are trademarks or registered trademarks of Peek Traffic Corporation, in the USA and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Document assembly: 81-1105 Document Content: 99-429 Rev 2 Document Cover Art: 99-428



iii

Table Of Contents

Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... 1 Where to Find Information in this Manual.......................................................................................... 2 Contact Information ........................................................................................................................... 4 Update History of IQ Central ............................................................................................................. 5

Chapter 2 – Using the Interface .......................................................................................7 Logging Onto the System.................................................................................................................. 8 Logging Off the System..................................................................................................................... 9 Menus.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Using the Mouse.............................................................................................................................. 14 Managing Module Windows ............................................................................................................ 15

Floating Windows ........................................................................................................................ 15 Minimized Windows..................................................................................................................... 15 Tiled Windows ............................................................................................................................. 16 Cascaded Windows..................................................................................................................... 17 Switching Between Open Modules.............................................................................................. 17

Using the Toolbars........................................................................................................................... 18 Activating/Deactivating Toolbars.................................................................................................. 18 Standard Toolbar.......................................................................................................................... 19 Map Configuration Toolbar........................................................................................................... 20 System Maintenance Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 21 User Administration Toolbar......................................................................................................... 22 Intersection Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 22 Message Sign Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 23 Camera Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 24 Devices Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 25

IQ Central Status Bar....................................................................................................................... 26 Subsystem Status Bar ................................................................................................................. 26 Status of Devices Responding and Connected ........................................................................... 30 System Date and Time ................................................................................................................ 32 Logged In User ............................................................................................................................ 33 Module Navigation in the Status Bar ........................................................................................... 33

Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................... 34

Automatic Log Off............................................................................................................................ 36

Profiles Module................................................................................................................................ 36 Closing IQ Central ........................................................................................................................... 36

Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections.........................................................37 Introduction to Device Management................................................................................................ 38 Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................................. 39

Adding a Device .......................................................................................................................... 39 Editing a Device........................................................................................................................... 40



IQ Central Operating Manual

iv

Deleting a Device .........................................................................................................................40 Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status Module.........................................................................41

Status of All Devices of a Type.....................................................................................................42 Single Device Status - Device Logs .............................................................................................42 Single Device Status - Comm Stats .............................................................................................43 Single Device Status - Online History ..........................................................................................43

Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 45 Overview of Connections Module ................................................................................................45 Adding a Connection....................................................................................................................45 Editing a Connection ....................................................................................................................45 Deleting a Connection ..................................................................................................................45 Editing a Connection ....................................................................................................................45

Device Types Module .......................................................................................................................46 Adding a Device Type ..................................................................................................................46 Editing a Device Type ..................................................................................................................46 Deleting a Device Type ................................................................................................................46

Managing Device Groups ................................................................................................................47 Launching the Device Groups Module.........................................................................................47 Managing Device Groups.............................................................................................................47 Launching the Device Groups Module.........................................................................................47 Using the Device Groups window ................................................................................................48 Creating a Group..........................................................................................................................50 Modifying an Existing Group ........................................................................................................51 Deleting a Group ..........................................................................................................................52

Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... .53 Traffic Network - Example Topography ............................................................................................54 Supported Traffic Controllers ...........................................................................................................55

IQ Connect Hardware ..................................................................................................................55 Multisonics Hardware ...................................................................................................................56 Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central .........................................................................................65 U.S. Traffic Hardware ...................................................................................................................76 Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central ...................................................................................80 Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central ......................................................................................80 Configuring Intersection Display on Maps.................................................................................... 80

Configure Intersections Module .......................................................................................................81 Launching the Configure Intersection Module .............................................................................81 The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection ..................................................................................81

The Configure Intersection Interface................................................................................................ 83 Adding an Icon to an Intersection ................................................................................................ 83 Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon .......................................................................85 Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects...................................................................................86

Setting Up Map Polling ....................................................................................................................88 Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons ..............................................................................88 Auto Populate Polling ...................................................................................................................88

The Upload/Download Interface ......................................................................................................90 Controller Upload and Download .................................................................................................90 Launching the Upload/Download Module ....................................................................................91



Table Of Contents

v

The Upload/Download Interface .................................................................................................. 92 Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module....................................................... 95 Getting Data From the Controller................................................................................................. 97 Sending Data to the Controller .................................................................................................... 98 Interacting With the Central Database......................................................................................... 98 Copying Settings Between Controllers ........................................................................................ 99

Central Override of Traffic Controllers and Masters ...................................................................... 101

Chapter 5 – Camera Management................................................................................103 Creating a Camera-NTCIP Device ................................................................................................ 104 Camera Control Module ................................................................................................................ 105

Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management .........................................................................107 Controls to Manage Traffic Signs .................................................................................................. 108 Sign Control Module...................................................................................................................... 109

To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign ............................................................................ 109 Add a New Message ................................................................................................................. 109 Edit an Existing Message ...........................................................................................................110 Sign Message Edit Screen .........................................................................................................110 Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen ...................................................................................110 Moving Text Editing Screen ........................................................................................................111 Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times..........................................................................111

Overview of the Sign Summary Module .........................................................................................113 Sign Configuration ......................................................................................................................113 Sign Status..................................................................................................................................113

Bulk Operations Module .................................................................................................................116 Diagnostic Topics........................................................................................................................116

Brightness Control Module .............................................................................................................117 Master Fonts Module......................................................................................................................117 Using the Font Editor Interface...................................................................................................117 Editing a Font .............................................................................................................................117

Schedules Module ..........................................................................................................................118 Opening the Message Sign Schedules window .........................................................................118 Day Plans and Schedules ..........................................................................................................118

Error Logging on Message Signs .................................................................................................. 120 Event Groups and Events.......................................................................................................... 120 Clear Event Log......................................................................................................................... 120 View Recorded Events .............................................................................................................. 121

SNMP Device Security Module ..................................................................................................... 122 Opening the Device Security Module ........................................................................................ 122 Device-Level Security................................................................................................................ 122

Chapter 7 - Incident Management Module ..................................................................123 Configuring the Incident Spreadsheets.......................................................................................... 124

Defining Actions......................................................................................................................... 125




vi

Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central.............................................................127 Configuring a Scenario or Amber Alert........................................................................................... 127

What is a Scenario? ...................................................................................................................127 What is an Amber Alert?.............................................................................................................127

Activating an Amber Alert ...............................................................................................................128 Displaying a Scenario ....................................................................................................................129

Creating a Scenario ...................................................................................................................129 Standard Operating Procedure ..................................................................................................130

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central ..........................................................................131 Does your IQ Central use BMP mapping or GIS mapping?.......................................................131

Getting Started With Maps .............................................................................................................133 Setting Map Paths in the IQ Central Database..............................................................................134

For BMP Map files:.....................................................................................................................134 For GIS Map files: ......................................................................................................................134

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons................................................................................136

Overview of Map Management ......................................................................................................137

Opening the Map Management module..................................................................................... 137 Storing Map Data .......................................................................................................................137 Loading BMP Map Data .............................................................................................................137 Loading GIS Map Data...............................................................................................................137 Managing BMP Maps .................................................................................................................138 Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps................................................................143 Creating Map Views ...................................................................................................................144 Close the Map Management module. ........................................................................................145

Working With GIS Map Layers.......................................................................................................146 Creating GIS Map Layer Groups................................................................................................146 Adding a Layer Group ................................................................................................................147 Changing the Name of a Layer Group .......................................................................................147 GIS Layers .................................................................................................................................148

Managing Devices on Maps...........................................................................................................151 Placing Devices on Maps ...........................................................................................................151 Zoom Level Icons .......................................................................................................................152 Placing an Icon on a BMP Map ..................................................................................................152 Placing an Icon on a GIS Map ...................................................................................................153 Setting GIS Zoom Levels ...........................................................................................................153

Viewing Maps.................................................................................................................................156 Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface ........................................................................................157 Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module ..........................................................................159 Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer............................................................................................ 159 Setting the Default Map..............................................................................................................160

Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events..............................................................161 Polling ............................................................................................................................................161 Scheduling .....................................................................................................................................162 Map Polling ....................................................................................................................................162

Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window............................................................162



Table Of Contents

vii

Map Polling Configuration ............................................................................................................. 163 Opening the Map Polling Configuration module ........................................................................ 163 Using the Map Polling Configuration interface .......................................................................... 163 Using the Polling Assistant ........................................................................................................ 165

Performing a Batch Update ........................................................................................................... 168 Dynamic Object Configuration....................................................................................................... 169

Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module ................................................................. 169 Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface.................................................................... 170

Log Polling..................................................................................................................................... 171 Overview of Log Polling............................................................................................................. 171 Launching the Device Type Data window.................................................................................. 171 Launching the Device Type Polling window .............................................................................. 171 About the System Log ............................................................................................................... 171

Device Type Data .......................................................................................................................... 172 Interface Controls ...................................................................................................................... 172 Device Type Polling ................................................................................................................... 174

Communications Failure Testing ................................................................................................... 175 Message Sign Scheduling............................................................................................................. 176

Schedules Module ..................................................................................................................... 176 Opening the Message Sign Schedules window ........................................................................ 176 Day Plans and Schedules ......................................................................................................... 176

Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log Retrieval ............................................................................... 178 Installing the IQ Central Scheduler............................................................................................ 178 Launching the Scheduler Interface............................................................................................ 181 Using the Scheduler Interface ................................................................................................... 182 Adding a Scheduled Task .......................................................................................................... 184 Modifying a Scheduled Task...................................................................................................... 185 Deleting a Schedule Task .......................................................................................................... 186 Changing the Location of the Task Database............................................................................ 186

Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring ....................................................................................189 Using the Alarm Configuration Window......................................................................................... 190

Launching the Alarm Configuration Window.............................................................................. 190 Alarm Configuration Interface.................................................................................................... 190

Using the Alarm Status Window .................................................................................................... 195 Launching the Alarm Status Module .......................................................................................... 195 Using the Alarm Status Interface ............................................................................................... 195

Setting Up a New Alarm ................................................................................................................ 197 Editing an Existing Alarm Condition............................................................................................... 199 Deleting an Alarm Condition.......................................................................................................... 199 Handling Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 200 Configuring the Alarms System..................................................................................................... 202

Opening the Alarm Parameters ................................................................................................. 202 Setting the Parameters.............................................................................................................. 202




viii

Chapter 12 – Reports ....................................................................................................205 Using the Reports Interface ...........................................................................................................205

Applying Report Filters ...............................................................................................................205 Generating Source Data for Reporting ..........................................................................................207

Alarms and Status event logs.....................................................................................................207 Controller Log Retrieval .............................................................................................................207 Message Sign Log Retrieval ...................................................................................................... 207

Exporting Report Data ...................................................................................................................208 Creating a Custom Report .............................................................................................................209

Chapter 13 – User Management & Security ................................................................211 Managing User Accounts ...............................................................................................................212

Adding a New User Account ......................................................................................................212 Deleting a User Account.............................................................................................................212 Changing the Security Level of a User.......................................................................................213 Changing Your Password...........................................................................................................213

Setting a User Password............................................................................................................214

User Administration Module ...........................................................................................................215 Managing Security .........................................................................................................................216

Currently Logged In Users .........................................................................................................216 Access Levels Module ...................................................................................................................218

Changing the Access Level for a Module Control ......................................................................219

Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup..........................................................221 Working in the IQ Central Access Database..................................................................................221 System Logging .............................................................................................................................223

Size Event Log Module ..............................................................................................................223 Extended Logging ......................................................................................................................223 User Comments Module ............................................................................................................224

Archive and Restore Module..........................................................................................................225

Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... .....227 Device Icon Management ..............................................................................................................228

Editing an Icon ...........................................................................................................................229 Adding an Icon ...........................................................................................................................229

Link Icon to Device Type Module ...................................................................................................231 BlockBuilder & FormBuilder ...........................................................................................................232

BlockBuilder Module ..................................................................................................................232 Using the BlockBuilder Module ..................................................................................................232 FormBuilder Module ...................................................................................................................232

Glossary.........................................................................................................................233

Index...............................................................................................................................249



Table Of Contents

ix

FiguresFigure 1 – The sections of this manual ................................................................................................. 1 Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central..................................................................... 15 Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized.................................................................................. 15 Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally....................................................................... 16 Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically ........................................................................... 16 Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade ................................................................ 17 Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu.................................... 18 Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar................................................................................................................ 18 Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 19 Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)...................................... 20 Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central) ....................................... 20 Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar .......................................................................................... 21 Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar ............................................................................................ 22 Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 22 Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar..................................................................................................... 23 Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar............................................................................................................... 24 Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar............................................................................................................... 25 Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar ............................................................... 26 Figure 19 – Data Manager icon tool tip.............................................................................................. 27 Figure 20 – Quick History of Data Manager operational status ......................................................... 27 Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon ........................................................................ 28 Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status ......................................................... 29 Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar ................................................................ 29 Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip................................................................................ 30 Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar....................................................................................... 31 Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip...................................................................................................... 31 Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar.................................... 32 Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar ................................................ 33 Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar................................................................................ 33 Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type................................................. 37 Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window ................................................................................................. 39 Figure 32 – Device Status module...................................................................................................... 41 Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type................................................................ 42 Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane...................................................................... 43 Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane...................................................................... 43 Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane................................................................... 44 Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window................................................................................. 48 Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it ................................................... 50 Figure 39 – Be sure to Save the changes to the group ...................................................................... 51 Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module.................................................. 52 Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network.................................................................. 54 Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface............................................................. 83 Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element............................................................... 85 Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element ........................................................................... 86 Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2.......................................................................................... 87 Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window .......................... 88 Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message.......................................................................... 88 Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message ..................................................................... 89 Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module................................................................................................ 90 Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected.................................................. 92 Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module....................................................... 92 Figure 52 – Number entry window...................................................................................................... 93 Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window ......................................................................................... 94 Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window ....................................................... 95 Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables ..................................... 95 Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module ................................................ 96




x

Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller .......................97 Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller................................98 Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database ........99 Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module ...............................................................................................99 Figure 61 – Central Override control window....................................................................................101 Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen .............................................................................................110 Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen ............................................................................111 Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen............................................................................................111 Figure 65 – Font View screen ........................................................................................................... 117 Figure 66 – BMP maps versus GIS maps .........................................................................................131 Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module..............................138 Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area ......................................................................................................141 Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved...................................142 Figure 69 – Placing a zoom area ......................................................................................................146 Figure 69 – Layer Groups module..................................................................................................... 147 Figure 70 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers..................................................149 Figure 71 – Verification is requested when deleting a layer..............................................................150 Figure 72 – Setting Device Zoom Levels ..........................................................................................154 Figure 73 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version)..............................................................................156 Figure 74 – Map Viewer interface - GIS version ...............................................................................157 Figure 75 – BMP Map Viewer ........................................................................................................... 157 Figure 76 – GIS Map Viewer .............................................................................................................158 Figure 77 – Map Views menu............................................................................................................160 Figure 78 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module.........................................163 Figure 79 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box........................................................................166 Figure 80 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window .....................................168 Figure 81 – Batch Update dialog box................................................................................................ 168 Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window................................169 Figure 83 – Device Type Log polling window.................................................................................... 174 Figure 84 – Scheduled Task Editor...................................................................................................182 Figure 85 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor ...............................................................182 Figure 86 – Complete task details.....................................................................................................183 Figure 87 – Task creation dialog box ................................................................................................184 Figure 88 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion...............................................................................186 Figure 89 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler ................................................................187 Figure 90 – Alarm Configuration window ..........................................................................................191 Figure 91 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'..............................................................................192 Figure 92 – Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type" ................................................................193 Figure 93 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms" ....................................................................194 Figure 94 – Alarm Status window......................................................................................................195 Figure 95 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window.......................197 Figure 96 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view......................................198 Figure 97 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message .....................................200 Figure 98 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from your IQ Central display

....................................................................................................................................................200 Figure 99 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto refreshing .........201 Figure 100 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon.......................201 Figure 101 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings .....................................................................202 Figure 102 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings...................................................................204 Figure 103 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings ..........................................................................204 Figure 104 – User Administration module.........................................................................................215 Figure 105 – Each login that will be shut down sees this message .................................................217 Figure 106 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window.................................................................218 Figure 107 – IQ Central database table listing..................................................................................222 Figure 108 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module ......................................................................225



Table Of Contents

xi

TablesTable 1 – IQ Central Update Release History....................................................................................... 5 Table 2 – IQ Central Menus ............................................................................................................... 10 Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar ........................................................................................ 19 Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar.................................................................................................. 20 Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar.............................................................................................. 21 Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar................................................................................................ 22 Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar............................................................................................................. 22 Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 23 Table 9 – Camera Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 24 Table 10 – Devices Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 25 Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons ............................................................................................... 26 Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons ............................................................................................... 28 Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest ..................................................... 30 Table 14 – Logged In User icons ........................................................................................................ 33 Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................................................................... 34 Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ............................................. 56 Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module ................. 65 Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module......................... 76 Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module .............................................. 84 Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection............................................................................ 84 Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters................................................................... 94 Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons..................................................................... 96 Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management.............................................. 108 Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs................................................................ 116 Table 25 – Default Layer Values ....................................................................................................... 135 Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps............................................................... 151 Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu.............................................. 159 Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval ...................................................... 178 Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts ........................................................................................ 211




xii



1

Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central OperatingManual

Welcome to the Operating Manual for the IQ Central software system. This manual will help

you understand the general operation, the controls, options and operating environments ofthe IQ Central software system. To find the information you need, you can start by looking inthe chapters describing one of the following topics, or use the Index or Glossary to find theinformation you are seeking.

Figure 1 – The sections of this manual




2

Where to Find Information in this ManualThe discussions of IQ Central have been divided up into the following chapters in this book:

Chapter 1 - Welcome to IQ Central

An overview of the structure of this manual, information about contacting Peek Traffic torequest additional help, and some detail about how IQ Central has evolved over time.

Chapter 2 - Working with the Interface

Discribes how to use the standard Windows interface elements in IQ Central (mouse,menus, toolbars, status bar, work area) as well as a listing of the available keyboardshortcuts available in the application.

Chapter 3 - Managing Devices and Connections

IQ Central uses a central device and connection management scheme, providing unifiedtools to add, edit and delete database instances of devices, no matter what type, andcommunications channels, no matter the connection type. This chapter also describes howto edit and implement device-type-based standard templates. and how to manage timesynchronization functions.

Chapter 4 - Traffic Control Management

This chapter describes how to use the parts of the IQ Central interface that have beencreated to specifically support the operation of traffic controllers, master controllers, andtheir supporting hardware. This includes some details about what devices are supportedand at what levels, information about setting up map displays of traffic controllers, theUpload/Download module for controller database management, and the Central Overridecapability of the Map Viewer. It also discusses the Coordination check function.

Chapter 5 - Camera Management This section describes how to use IQ Central with NTCIP and Ethernet cameras, includinghow to establish connections for data and video, and modules to control and interact withthese cameras.

Chapter 6 - Traffic Sign Management

This chapter describes the interface elements in IQ Central that support the operation andmanagement of variable traffic message signs. These include message selection andediting, font management, diagnostics tools, error logging, message scheduling, anddevice-level security for signs.

Chapter 7 - Automatic Incident Management This chapter describes how to use the Automatic Incident management tools of IQ Central,which allow you to configure the application to respond to inputs from devices and respondin a predetermined manner. This kind of 'macro programming' tool for IQ Central wouldallow for the automatic change of message signs or traffic patterns based on status dataprovided by those or other devices in your traffic network.



Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual

3

Chapter 8 - Crisis Management

This section describes the tools within IQ Central that can be used by operators to triggeremergency situation scenarios, such as a change in traffic operation caused by an AmberAlert or some other short time frame crisis.

Chapter 9 - Using Maps in IQ Central

This chapter provides a great deal of information about the ways to set up and operate thesophisticated mapping system in IQ Central. Whether using BMP map backgrounds or ESRIGIS map data files, IQ Central has tools to manage how maps appear and interact with theoperator.

Chapter 10 - Polling and Scheduling Events

This chapter describes the variety of tools that can be used in IQ Central to automaticallyrequest data retrieval from field devices (polling) and to automatically send commands tofield hardware at predetermined times (event scheduling).

Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring

This chapter describes how devices are monitored by IQ Central. The alarms system is aglobal application within IQ Central that allows the operator to set conditions that will triggeralarms. The program then provides tools to monitor the devices to see if these alarms occur.

Chapter 12 - Reports

IQ Central uses the Microsoft Office application suite as its background tools for handlingdata. This chapter describes how to use these tools in conjunction with IQ Central to createcustom reports and to export data. This chapter also describes how to use the controllerdatabase print-out feature.

Chapter 13 - User Management and Security

This section describes the modules in IQ Central that are used to manage user accountsand to control system security.

Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance and Archiving

This chapter describes how to maintain IQ Central's central database, as well as how toarchive data to backup files and retrieve data when needed.

Chapter 15 - IQ Central Customization

IQ Central comes with many powerful tools to change its appearance and operation. Thischapter provides a rudimentary description of these tools.

Glossary

A collection of definitions of the most commonly used traffic industry terminology and IQCentral terms.




4

Contact InformationFor additional help with IQ Central, technical questions, or information about any of theother Peek intelligent traffic systems products, please contact Peek Traffic using any of thefollowing methods:

Email: [email protected]: Toll free in the U.S.: (800) 245-7660 or at (941) 845-1200. In either case, simply

mention the product for which you wish to receive assistance and your call will bedirected to the proper support representative. For account information concerning IQCentral, contact Mr. Cory Dibert at (941) 224-6413.

Fax: (941) 845-1504. Again, simply mention the product and the issue for which you wouldlike to receive assistance, and be sure to list your return phone or fax number so that oursupport representative can get back to you.

Website: Some additional information about all of the Peek Traffic products is available atthe company website:

http://www.peektraffic.com



Chapter 1 – Using the IQ Central Operating Manual

5

Update History of IQ CentralThis section provides a historical record of how the IQ Central software has evolved overtime.

Table 1 – IQ Central Update Release History

Release Features and Enhancements DateVersion 1.0 Initial release. Basic support for management of traffic signs, NTCIP

cameras, and remote sensors.July 2005

Version 1.1 Reliability and speed improvements. Improved automatic installation. Basicsupport for Peek 3000 and M3000 controllers.

January 2006

Version 1.2 Added basic support for Multisonics 820A controllers and OSAM 32master controllers. Dramatically improved communications reliability with alldevices. Added interface elements to handle all Peek controller andMultisonics controller data fields. Updated toolbar system. Standardized themenu system. Initial release of the traffic controller upload/download module .Added log retrieval for Peek and Multisonics controllers. First release of the IQCentral help system. First product release notes. Improved map managementin both BMP and GIS environments. Support for more image file types.

October 2006

Version 1.3 Faster and more reliable Upload/Download module for controller interaction.Improved interfaces in the GIS map modules (View, Management, Layers, etc.)Basic support for IQ ATC and ASTC traffic controllers. Greatly enhancedArchive and Restore Module.

April 2007

Version 1.4 Added basic support for Traconex 390CJ controllers and TMM500 master controllers. Added basic support for Transyt 1880EL controllers and3800EL master controllers. Added log retrieval from Traconex and Transytcontrollers. Added central override capability from the Map Viewer module.Added the automatic map polling assistant to help in configuring map pollingdata for traffic controllers.

September 2007

Version 1.5 Implementation of a new global device alarms system. Added ability to

collect devices into user-defined groupings. Improved map polling configurationinterface. Improved functionality in the IQ Central status bar.

February 2008

Version 1.6 Added the ability to generate a device's database as a PDF export, which canalso be printed. Added the Coord Check functionality; implemented in version1.6 only for the Traconex 390CJ controllers, but configured to add this featureto more devices in the next few update releases. Added the ability to edit andstore a default database for each device type, which will be used whenever anew device of that type is added to IQ Central.

June 2008

Version 1.7 Added basic support for the LMD-9200 controller. Added the new device TimeSync module. Added the ability to override the traffic pattern on a whole groupof controllers at once. Updated the Upload/Download module screens for the3000E to more accurately represent the layout of the data in the controller,particularly the coordination parameters.

September 2008




6



7

Chapter 2 – Using the InterfaceIQ Central functions as a framework for a set of traffic hardware control modules. Eachmodule opens in its own window and edits data in the IQ Central database . The frameworkprovides a set of master menus, a status bar at the bottom of the window, shortcuts for

navigating using only the keyboard, and a set of three toolbars along the left edge of themain window. The following topics provide more details about each of these program controlmethods.

Using the Mouse

IQ Central Menus

Managing Module Windows

Toolbars

Keyboard shortcuts for navigating the interface

the IQ Central Status Bar

Global IQ Central Modules

However, for a new user, probably the most important skills to gain when starting to use IQCentral are learning to Log On to the system, Log Off the system, and Closing the program.




8

Logging Onto the SystemThe Log On screen is where you enter your Name and Password so that you can accessthe sign control software. You must log on to the system before you can access any of themodules or make any changes to the database . The administrator of your IQ Central systemcontrols user accounts, so if you need an account, contact that person.



Chapter 2 – Using the Interface

9

Logging Off the SystemUse the Log Off option to log out of the currently logged on user account within IQ Central.This function does not close the application. If you want to close the software, you mustchoose the Exit option. (To exit, go to File > Exit on the menus, or press Alt-F4 .)

If you are logged on as a particular user and you need to log on as another user, you mustfirst log off. Once you have done this, the Log On option from the File menu will be enabledso that you can Log On. If you are connected to a Device when you log off, that connectionwill automatically be closed by the system.




10

MenusThis is an overview of the main menu system of IQ Central. The menus in IQ Central do notchange as you navigate around the system, although the commands that are visible on themenus do change based on what security level the current logged-in user has. The menusdescribed here show all available commands, which is what a user with Administrative

access sees in the interface.Table 2 – IQ Central Menus

Menu Command PurposeLog on... Only active when no user is presently logged into this client of

IQ Central. Opens a dialog box where a user can enter a user name and password.

Log off Only appears when a user is presently logged into this client.Asks for verification before logging out of the current user account. This option does not close IQ Central.

Change Password Only appears when a user is logged into the system. Allows

the currently logged in user to change his or her password.

File

Exit Shuts down the IQ Central client on this workstation. Caution:This will shut down the server components of the program if itis chosen on the IQ Central server.

Status Opens the Device Status module

Map Opens the View Map module

Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module

User Comments... Opens the User Comments module

Reports... Opens the IQ Central Reports selection window

Large Tool Icons Toggles between small and large icons on the IQ Centraltoolbars that appear on the left edge of the main IQ Centralwindow.

View

Timeout Opens a window where you can set the user timeout settingsfor this account.

Add New Device... Opens the Device Configurations window, where new devicescan be created in the IQ Central database

Intersections > Upload/Download Opens the traffic controller upload/download window. Thiswindow allows the operator to send and retrieve configurationfiles, or 'databases', to and from traffic controllers in the field.

Intersections >Copy Database Provides an interface to copy device databases, or sections of device databases between traffic controllers of the same type

Message Signs > Control Opens the Sign Control module where stored messages anddisplay options can be selected.

Message Signs > Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Opens the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module, which is usedto manage crisis situations.

Message Signs > Summary... Opens the Sign Summary module where the operator canview and set many of the internal parameters of a messagesign.

Devices

Message Signs > Bulk Operation Opens the Bulk Operations module, which can be used tosend 'bulk' or 'batch' commands to a single message sign. Itcan also be used to perform diagnostic tests on a sign.




11

Menu Command PurposeMessage Signs > Brightness Control... Opens the Sign Brightness Control module, which can be

used to manually control the brightness of sign light sources.

Message Signs > Edit Master Fonts... Opens the Font View module, which can be used to send andretrieve font files to and from message signs.

Message Signs > Edit Schedules... Opens the Scheduler module, which can be used to designand activate event schedules for IQ Central devices.

Message Signs > Error Logs... Opens the Error Logs module. This allows the operator todefine what objects and conditions will generate an error, andto view events that have been recorded to the event log.

Cameras > Control The Camera Control module allows the operator to use IQCentral to control and configure an NTCIP-capable camera,including parameters such as zoom, focus, tilt, iris, and zonesand labels.

Cameras > Browser Opens the NTCIP Camera Browser, which allows an operator to retrieve live video feeds from a field camera.

Cameras > Video Connections Opens the Camera Video Configuration module, where thevideo feed of an NTCIP camera that is attached to IQ Centralcan be set up.

SNMP Device Security Allows the operator to set the SNMP security parameters for any NTCIP network device configured within IQ Central.

Time Sync Interactive device-by-device time synchronization module

Map Management Opens the map management module. The controls that areavailable depend on whether you have the BMP or GIS version of IQ Central. In either case, this module allows you toview and set up map views.

Place Icon on Map Opens the Place Icon on Map module, where the operator canplace icons for any of the currently configured devices on anyof the currently available maps.

Intersection Displays Opens the Configure Intersection module, where thegraphics that are displayed on the map for a particular devicetype and zoom level is defined.

GIS Layer Groups Opens the Add/Edit Layer Groups screen. This option is onlyavailable in the GIS version of IQ Central.

GIS Layers Opens the Layers module, where GIS layers, their color coding, their styles and layer characteristics can be defined.This option is only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.

GIS Zoom Settings Opens the Device Zoom Levels module, where GIS map zoomlevels can be associated with each type of device. This optionis only available in the GIS version of IQ Central.

Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration

Opens the Map Polling Configuration module, where polling of devices displayed on maps can be configured. This is whereyou set up how often data is retrieved from devices when theyare displayed on a map.

Polling Options > Dynamic Object Configuration

Opens the STMP Polling module, where the operator canconfigure the object IDs of an NTCIP device so that thedesired data points can be retrieved during polling operation.

Maps

Polling Options > Refresh Server Polling

This options requests and displays updated polling data on




12

Menu Command Purposeany devices that are displayed on maps within IQ Central.

Connections Opens the Overview of Connections module, wherecommunications channels can be defined, modified, or deletedin IQ Central, including direct-connect serial connections,modem connections, or Ethernet connections.

Devices Opens the Overview of Device Configurations control. Showsa complete list of devices and the communications channel (s)they use, from which you can edit or add devices.

Device Groups Opens the Device Groups management module. Devices canbe grouped together under a single group name for alarmmanagement purposes.

Archive and Restore... Opens the Archive and Restore module, which can be used tostore the contents of one or more tables of your IQ Centraldatabase, or to retrieve them from an archive file so they canbe restored to the system.

System Scheduler Opens the IQ Central event scheduler

Print Database Allows you to export a device database to a PDF file, whichcan then be printed or stored to an external file

Alarms > Configuration Opens the module that allows you to create and manage datafrom devices that will trigger an alarm.

Alarms > Status Opens a module that allows you to view, filter, sort and printthe current status of any alarms detected by IQ Central.

Alarms > History Opens the alarm history viewer

User Administration > Add/Delete Opens the User Administration module and allows an operator with sufficient rights to add, edit or delete user accounts.

User Administration > Access Levels Opens the Access Levels module, where the security level

required to access the various parts of the IQ Central interfacecan be defined.

User Administration > Profiles Opens the Profiles module. Profiles allow you to set differentaccess levels for different levels of operators. Profiles functionas an advanced version of user access level assignment. Werecommend that users avoid modifying any of the Profilessettings.

User Administration > Currently Logged On Users

This command shows the operator a listing of all of the usersthat are currently logged into IQ Central.

Logging Options > Device Type Data Opens a module that allows the operator to configure deviceobjects for which he or she wishes to generate current statusmessages.

Logging Options > Device Type Poll ing Opens the Device Log Polling module. Allows the operator toset polling frequency and other polling values by device.

Logging Options > Size Event Log... This command can be used to set the maximum event logsize.

Logging Options > Extended Logging This toggles the 'extended' logging option on and off. A checkmark appears next to this when extended logging is active.

Tools

Advanced Options > Icon Management

The Icon Management module is used to attach a device iconto a device type.




13

Menu Command PurposeAdvanced Options > Device Types Opens the Enter/Edit Device Type module. This allows an

operator to create or edit the types of devices that can bemanaged in IQ Central.

Advanced Options > Link Icon to Device Type

Allows an operator to link an icon that is already stored in IQCentral to be attached to a certain device type. These iconsthen appear in the map module.

Advanced Options > BlockBuilder This advanced module is used to assign blocks of data (from adevice's database) to NTCIP object IDs. This is an advancedpart of the process of creating new types of devices within IQCentral. BlockBuilder should only be used with the supervisionof Peek Traffic personnel.

Advanced Options > FormBuilder This advanced module is used to create screens, or 'forms', toallow the editing and control of a new type of device within IQCentral. This is an advanced part of the process of creatingnew types of devices. FormBuilder should only be used withthe supervision of Peek Traffic personnel.

Options Opens the IQ Central application-wide parameters windowToolbars Performs the same function as would right-clicking in the

toolbar area in order to select which toolbars will be visiblewithin IQ Central. Place a check next to one of the toolbars tomake it appear in the interface.

Tile Vertical Arranges the open windows so that they automatically fitvertically into the available space of the full IQ Central window.Note: Some modules, such as the message sign managementtools will not respond to this command.

Tile Horizontal Arranges the open windows so that all open windowsautomatically fit horizontally into the available space of the fullIQ Central window. Note: Some modules, such as the

message sign management tools will not respond to thiscommand.

Cascade Arranges all open windows into a cascade from the top leftdown to the lower right, in the order that the windows wereopened.

Window

<#> The Window menu shows a list of the currently open modules.Selecting one switches the focus to that module.

IQ Central Help Opens this help system.Help

About IQ Central Shows the About window for the IQ Central application, whereyou can see the version information for the application, as wellas see details about your PC and OS environment.




14

Using the MouseYou control the IQ Central interface by left-clicking with the mouse pointer on the control youwish to modify or activate. You can typically edit an item that appears in one of the lists ofthe application by double-clicking on it to open an editing window. In some places, you alsohave more options for a control that can be accessed by right-clicking on the control. This

opens a context-specific menu.Many items in the interface also now provide 'Tooltips' details which can be accessed bysimply 'hovering' the mouse pointer over the control. And double-clicking on some buttonswill open status windows. These last two items are especially useful in the IQ Central statusbar.

Note Some people like to avoid using the mouse as much as possible, and canachieve higher speed when using an application by sticking with keyboardcontrols. A complete list of keyboard controls for IQ Central are availablehere.




15

Managing Module WindowsModules in IQ Central can either be opened so that they take up the full display window withthe IQ Central framework, or within a floating window. In either case, multiple module can beopen at one time, and they can be displayed in a number of different ways.

Floating Windows The normal method for modules to open within IQ Central are as floating windows.

Figure 2 – Several module windows open in IQ Central

Minimized Windows

Minimizing open module windows will place them in minimized form at the bottom corner ofthe current IQ Central window. If you resize the window, the minimized windows will remainwhere they were placed.

Figure 3 – Several module windows minimized




16

Tiled Windows The Windows menu has a couple of controls for tiling module windows, as shown below.Tiling Horizontally attempts to resize all open (non-minimized) module windows so theyappear one atop another within the IQ Central window.

Figure 4 – Several module windows tiled horizontally

Tiling Vertically attempts to place them all next to one another.

Figure 5 – Several module windows tiled vertically

Note Some IQ Central module windows cannot be resized in the environment.These modules will not tile using the Windows menu commands.




17

Cascaded Windows The Cascade Windows command in the Window menu automatically arranges all open,non-minimized modules so that the upper left corners are arrayed in a cascade. Thiswindow sort is perhaps the most useful, as it immediately makes all open windowsavailable. The desired module can be brought to the front by simply clicking on its title bar.

Figure 6 – Several module windows arrayed in a cascade

Switching Between Open Modules There are several ways to switch between open modules within IQ Central:

Mouse selection - Of course, the most obvious method to switch between modules is to just click on the module to bring it to the front. However, if the front module ismaximized, this may be a bit difficult, so there are a couple other options...

Windows menu - If you go into the Windows menu, the bottom of it lists all of thecurrently open modules. Selecting a window there will bring it to the front. Or you canuse the keyboard shortcut ALT - W ,# (where a # is listed in the menu for each window.)

Status bar - Each open module window is also shown as an item in the IQ Central statusbar. Just click on the desired module entry to bring its window to the front.




18

Using the ToolbarsThis is an overview of the toolbars in IQ Central. The toolbars were extensively changed inversion 1.2 of the software. Previously, the toolbars were linked to the three levels ofsecurity and function (Operations, Maintenance, Administration), but they now are groupedfunctionally. By default, all users first see only the Standard and Devices toolbars when

opening IQ Central. Each user account can select which toolbars will be visible when theapplication is launched, and where each toolbar is docked. Toolbars can be docked on anyof the four sides of the IQ Central window, or they can float above the application. Thecurrent state of the toolbars is saved each time a user logs out or shuts down the program.

Activating/Deactivating Toolbars There are a couple of ways to change which toolbars are visible in IQ Central.

Go to the Tools menu and open the Toolbars list. In this listing you can toggle whichtoolbars are visible and which are hidden

Right-click anywhere on the open toolbars or toolbar regions to see the same list ofavailable toolbars as shown in the Tools menu. (Shown below) Select which toolbar toactivate or deactivate.

Figure 7 – Right-click in the toolbar area to open the toolbar selection menu

When a toolbar is floating, you also have theoption to close it by clicking on the close buttonthat appears at the upper right corner of its window. (Shown below)

Figure 8 – Closing a toolbar




19

Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar, along with the Devices toolbar , is one of the default toolbars for newuser accounts. This toolbar provides links to the modules that are most commonly used byIQ Central users.

Figure 9 – Standard Toolbar

Table 3 – Buttons on the Standard Toolbar

Button Command Status (Device Status)

Map View

Reports

Devices

Device Groups

Connections

Map Data (Polling Configuration)

Refresh Server Polling

Upload/Download for Controller devices

IQ Central Help




20

Map Configuration Toolbar The Map Configuration toolbar provides access to the most common commands orfunctions associated with managing and using the map interface in IQ Central. The exactbuttons that appear on this module are slightly different depending on whether you are usingIQ Central with BMP Mapping or IQ Central with GIS Mapping.

Figure 10 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the BMP version of IQ Central)

Figure 11 – Map Configuration Toolbar (for the GIS version of IQ Central)

Table 4 – Map Configuration Toolbar

Button Command

Map Management

Place Icon on Map

Intersection Displays

GIS Layer Group (appears in GIS version only)

GIS Layers (appears in GIS version only)

GIS Zoom Settings (appears in GIS version only)

Map Data (Poll Data Configuration)

Dynamic Objects (STMP Polling)

Refresh Server Polling




21

System Maintenance Toolbar The System Maintenance toolbar groups together ten of the most commonly used IQCentral administration tools.

Figure 12 – System Maintenance Toolbar

Table 5 – System Maintenance Toolbar

Button Command

Archive and Restore

FTP Data

System Scheduler

Device Type Data

Device Type Polling

Size Event Log

Extended Logging

SNMP Device Security

Icon Management

Link Icon to Device Type




22

User Administration Toolbar The User Administration toolbar provides access to the four modules used to manage useraccounts within IQ Central.

Figure 13 – User Administration Toolbar

Table 6 – User Administration Toolbar

Button Command User Administration

Access Levels

Profiles

Currently Logged On Users

Intersection Toolbar The Intersection Toolbar provides two buttons to access the modules to manage trafficintersection hardware in IQ Central.

Figure 14 – Intersection Toolbar

Table 7 – Intersection Toolbar Button Command

Upload/Download

Intersection Display




23

Message Sign Toolbar The Message Sign Toolbar provides links to the nine most common modules for interactwith Message Signs.

Figure 15 – Message Sign Toolbar

Table 8 – Message Sign Toolbar

Button Command Message Sign Control

Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Sign Summary

Bulk Operations

Brightness Control

Master Fonts

Edit Schedules

Error Logs

SNMP Device Security




24

Camera Toolbar The three buttons in the Camera toolbar link to the three modules used to configure,connect to, and use NTCIP-compatible cameras within IQ Central.

Figure 16 – Camera Toolbar

Table 9 – Camera Toolbar

Button Command Camera Control

Camera Browser

Video Connections




25

Devices Toolbar The Devices toolbar, along with the Standard toolbar , is one of the default toolbars for newuser accounts. While the Standard toolbar links to the most used general interfaces in IQCentral, the Devices toolbar provides links to the most often used device-specific controls.

Figure 17 – Devices Toolbar

Table 10 – Devices Toolbar

Button Command

Camera Control

Camera Browser

Message Sign Control

Scenarios & Amber Alerts

Sign Summary

Bulk Operations

Upload/Download




26

IQ Central Status BarThe IQ Central status bar, located at the bottom of the main IQ Central window, providesfeedback to the user about the operation of the application. The left end of the status barshows the current state of several of IQ Central's subsystems. The right end of the toolbar isused to show which modules are open within IQ Central.

Subsystem Status Bar The left end of the basic IQ Central Status bar, as shown below, displays information aboutseven of IQ Central's subsystems.

Figure 18 – Subsystem status in the IQ Central status bar

Data Manager Status

The Data Manager is a Windows service that runs in the background and supports theoperation of IQ Central. It functions as the agent that makes sure data gets stored andretrieved from the IQ Central database correctly. This status icon in the Status Bar showsseveral states that are possible for the Data Manager.

Table 11 – Data Manager Status icons

Icon Description of Status

Normal status. The Data Manager is up and runningnormally and the database is synced with IQ Central.

Critical Change. When the icon blinks orange, itindicates that the user has made a change to either the Device table or the Connections table. Normally,syncing of the database will occur automatically andyou will not see this alert. However, IQ Central mayoccasionally need to be restarted to get the databaseback in sync with the updated device and connectionslists. After a restart of IQ Central, the Data Manager will return to the Normal state.

Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state thatindicates IQ Central has just started up, but has notyet gotten the Data Manager up and running.

Initializing. In the process of starting up the DataManager.






28

NTCIP Server Status

The NTCIP Server is an IQ Central service that runs in the background and is maintained bythe Microsoft Windows™ Services management tool. The NTCIP Server functions as thetraffic cop that directs and manages message traffic between the various parts of IQCentral and the field hardware. The NTCIP Server status icon appears second from the left

in the Status Bar. It indicates the current operational state of the service.Table 12 – NTCIP Server Status icons


Normal status. The NTCIP Server is up and running normally, meaning communications areoperating nominally .

Not initialized. This is typically a short-lived state that indicates IQ Central has just started up,but has not yet gotten the NTCIP Server up and running. Or it could indicate that

Initializing. In the process of starting up the NTCIP Server.

Reference Lost. Indicates a lost connection to the NTCIP Server. The Windows Services toolshould automatically restart the NTCIP Server as soon as it detects that it has gone down. If itdoes not, you can either restart IQ Central, or go into the Services panel to start the servicemanually.

Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip

If you hover the mouse over the NTCIP Server icon, no matter what state it is in, it willdisplay a tool tip showing some additional detail about the current state of the service.These kinds of tooltips also appear automatically if the reference to the service is lost at anypoint or when the service is restarting.

Figure 21 – Tooltip for the NTCIP Server status icon

Viewing the NTCIP Server Quick History

Double-clicking on the NTCIP Server status icon opens a window that shows someinformation about the current up-time history of the service. The following window shows atypical Quick History display for the NTCIP Service, displaying the current state, how manytimes the NTCIP Server has had to be restarted by the Windows Services manager sinceIQ Central was last launched, and the time that IQ Central last lost its connection with theNTCIP Server. These pieces of information can be very helpful if you are having intermittentproblems with communications or with IQ Central in general.




29

Figure 22 – Quick History of NTCIP Server operational status

Alarm Status

Figure 23 – Alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar

When alarm conditions are defined within IQ Central, the Alarm server constantly monitorsdevice traffic and the state of IQ Central itself to monitor when alarm conditions becomeactive. The number and type of alarms that are active in the program determine how theAlarm Status icon appears in the status bar. In the example shown above, at least oneWarning level alarm has been detected.




30

Table 13 – Alarms Status icons, from lowest alert level to highest


No Alarms currently active.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is Informational.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Query alarm.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Warning alarm.

Alarms detected. The highest priority of those detected is a Critical alarm.

Hovering Over the Icon for Alarm Statistics

If you place the cursor over the Alarm status icon, you will be presented with a tooltip thatshows the number of alarms that are active at each severity level, as shown here. Thistooltip bubble also shows what the most recently detected alarm was, and when it wasdetected.

Figure 24 – Alarms details displayed in a tooltip

Viewing Alarm Details Simply double-click on the alarm status icon to open the full Alarms Status window, fromwhich the operator can navigate to various filters and views of the active and historicalalarms, as well as print out the alarm data. Details about using the Alarms Status windoware described in "Chapter 11: Alarm Monitoring".

Status of Devices Responding and Connected The white box in the status bar with the two numbers in it is used to indicate the overall stateof communications with the devices that are connected to IQ Central. The right number




31

indicates whether or not the NTCIP Server was able to open the specified Connectionchannel to the device or not. The left number indicates that the device is responding torequests from central.

Figure 25 – Device status in the Status bar

Note that the 'connected' number (on the right) does not indicate that the device is actuallyawake and responding at the other end . . .just that the communications channel defined forthat device can be opened successfully.

And the 'responding' number (on the left) assumes that all good connection channels areresponding until a device fails to respond to a request from IQ Central. So if a device'sconnection is open, but IQ Central doesn't send any messages requiring a response fromthat device, the 'response' number assumes that the device is responding. It only marks adevice as unresponsive if it doesn't reply to an actual request for communications.

Hovering Over the Icon for a Tooltip

If you hover over the Device Connection/Responding box in the Status bar, IQ Central willpresent a tooltip that shows more details about the numbers of device, their respectivecomms states, as well as information about the total number of devices configured in thesystem, and if any of the device have been forced offline by a request from IQ Central.

Figure 26 – Device Status tool tip

Viewing Device Connection Details

If you double-click on the Device Status box in the IQ Central Status bar, you will open thenormal NTCIP Device Status module. The operation of the Device Status module isdescribed in Chapter 2.




32

System Date and Time The current date and time of the IQ Central system are displayed in the Status Bar of theapplication, as shown below. These are the values of date and time that are set for theoperating system. To change these values, use the normal operating system tools forsetting date and time ( Start menu > Control Panel > Date/Time ).

Figure 27 – Current date and time as displayed in the IQ Central status bar

ote The controls to configure how IQ Central synchronizes the clocks in fielddevices with its central clock are provided in the Device Log Polling module.Refer to the "Log Polling" section in Chapter 10 for details.




33

Logged In User

Figure 28 – Current User icon and label in the IQ Central status bar

The middle of the IQ Central status bar display information about who is currently loggedinto the system on this workstation. Only one person can be logged in on a workstation at atime. Each user account is given one of three security level settings: Operator, Manager, orAdministrator. The icon that appears next to the user name indicates which access level thelogged in user is granted.

Table 14 – Logged In User icons

User Icon User account access

This user account has level 1 access, also known as 'Operator' access.

This user account has level 2 access, also known as 'Manager' access.

This user accant has level 3 access, also known as 'Administrator' or 'Full' access.

Module Navigation in the Status Bar When one or more modules are open within IQ Central, more items appear to the right ofthe basic status bar fields. These are buttons for each module that is currently open withinthe IQ Central framework. Here, you can see status bar buttons for the NTCIP DeviceStatus window, the Device View module showing the Standard View, and Layers module.The currently selected module is highlighted and outlined.

Figure 29 – Module Navigation in the Status bar

You can use these module buttons to switch between the modules. When a module isselected here, the module is brought to the front in the IQ Central window. Or another wayto switch between modules is to use the numbers in front of each module listing. Forexample, to switch to the NTCIP Device Status window, one would press ALT - W ,1 in thissituation.

Also notice that at the bottom-right corner of the status bar is the window resize control.These three slanted lines indicate where a mouse can grab the window and resize theoverall IQ Central window.




34

Keyboard ShortcutsThe following keyboard shortcuts will help a user navigate the IQ Central interface morequickly.

Table 15 – Keyboard Shortcuts

Key Combination Function DescriptionF1 Context Sensitive Help Opens the help system to the topic appropriate for wherever you

currently are within IQ Central

F2 Status Module Opens the device Status module

F3 Map Module Opens the Map module

F4 Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module

F6 Scenarios/Amber Alerts Opens the Scenarios and Amber alerts module

F7 Alarms Status Opens the Alarms Status module

Ctrl-F4 Close module Closes whichever module is open and selected in the IQ Centralwindow

Alt-F4 Close IQ Central Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification)Alt-F,x Close IQ Central Closes the IQ Central application (after requesting verification)

Alt-F,L Log on Log into a user account (when IQ Central is already running)

Alt-F,O Log off Log out of a user account (but keep IQ Central running)

Alt-F,p Change password Change the password of the currently-logged in user account

Alt-V,s Status module Opens the device Status module

Alt-V,m Map module Opens the Map module

Alt-V,i Incident Management Opens the Incident Management module

Alt-V,u User Comments Opens the User Comments module

Alt-V,r Reports Opens the Reports moduleAlt-V,t Timeout Change the value of the user inactivity Timeout value (5 to 60

minutes)

Alt-D,n Add new device Create a new device

Alt-D,i,u Intersection upload/download

Upload and download module for intersection controllers

Alt-D,m,c Sign Control Opens the message Sign Control module

Alt-D,m,a Scenarios/Amber Alerts Opens the message sign Scenarios and Amber Alerts module

Alt-D,m,m Sign Summary Open the message Sign Summary module

Alt-D,m,o Bulk operations Opens the message sign Bulk Operations module

Alt-D,m,b Brightness control Opens the message sign Brightness Control moduleAlt-D,m,f Edit Master Fonts Opens the message sign Edit Master Fonts module

Alt-D,m,s Edit Schedules Opens the message sign Edit Schedules module

Alt-D,m,e Error Logs Opens the message sign Error Logs module

Alt-D,c,c Camera Control Opens the camera Control module

Alt-D,c,b Camera Browser Opens the camera Browser module

Alt-D,c,v Video Configuration Opens the camera Video Configuration module




35

Key Combination Function Description

Alt-M,m Map management Opens the Map Management module

Alt-M,p Place Icon on map Opens the Place Icon on Map module

Alt-M,i Intersection display Opens the Intersection Display module

Alt-M,g GISLayer Groups Opens the GIS Layer Groups moduleAlt-M,L GIS Layers Opens the GIS Layers module

Alt-M,z GIS Zoom Settings Opens the GIS Zoom Settings module

Alt-M,o,m Polling option map data Opens the Realtime Polling settings module

Alt-M,o,d Map Dynamic Objects Opens the STMPPolling module to allow for creation, editing anddeletion of dynamic map objects

Alt-M,o,r Refresh Server Polling Refreshes the polled data on map view objects

Alt-T,c Connections Opens the Connections editing module

Alt-T,d Devices Opens the Devices editing module

Alt-T,v Archive and Restore Opens the database Archive and Restore module

Alt-T,u,a Add/delete user Opens the module to add or delete user accounts

Alt-T,u,L User Access Levels Sets the security access levels for a user account

Alt-T,u,p User profiles Opens the Profiles module

Alt-T,u,c Currently Logged-inusers

Shows a list of the users who are currently logged into IQ Central

Alt-T,L,d Logging option: Devicetypes

Open the module to edit device types in the event log

Alt-T,L,s Logging option: Max logsize

Sets the maximum size of the event log

Alt-T,L,e Extended logging Activates or deactivates the Extended Logging option

Alt-T,a,i Icon management Allows a user to add graphical icons to IQ Central so they can thenbe used in the interface, either on maps or elsewhere.

Alt-T,a,t Device Types Opens the Device Type editing module

Alt-T,a,L Link Icon to DeviceType

Allows a user to link an icon to a particular type of devices

Alt-T,a,b BlockBuilder Opens BlockBuilder, the advanced IQ Central database editing tool.(This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)

Alt-T,a,f FormBuilder Opens FormBuilder, the advanced IQ Central form editing tool.(This tool is normally deactivated for customer installations.)

Tile Vertical

Tile Horizontal

Cascade Windows

Alt-W,# Switch to open window#

If you press a number after pressing the Alt-W key combination, thiswill switch the IQ Central focus to that numbered open module.

Alt-H,i IQ Central Help System Opens the help system you are currently reading

Alt-H,a About IQ Central Shows the About window for IQ Central, showing release versioninfo and system information.




36

Automatic Log OffIf there is no activity within IQ Central for a set period of time, a Log Off warning window willappear. This warning tells the current logged-in user that they will be logged offautomatically, unless they take some action. If you do not want to be logged off, click on the‘Stay Logged On’ button within one minute of the form displaying.

The period of inactivity time that the system waits before prompting the user is entered onthe Timeout form, which can be accessed in the menus at View > Timeout .

Profiles ModuleProfiles allow you to set different access levels for different levels of operators. Profilesfunction as an advanced version of user access level assignment. We recommend thatusers avoid modifying any of the Profiles settings.

Closing IQ CentralClosing the application will automatically log off the current user, close any open modules,and close all open connections that are currently active with devices. Whenever you attemptto close the application, you will be presented with a dialog box asking you to verify that youwish to proceed and actually close down. This prevents a user from accidentally exiting theprogram when it wasn't intended.

To close IQ Central, you can use any of the following methods:

Go to the File menu and choose Exit

Or, Press Alt-F4 from anywhere in the program

Or, Press Alt-F , followed by the 'x' key, from anywhere in the program



37

Chapter 3 – Managing Devices andConnections

Most of IQ Central's modules deal with a single type of field device , such as the modules

that handle messages signs, weather stations, traffic controllers, etc. But when it comes todevice creation, management, and interconnection within IQ Central, all types of devices aremanaged using the same global management tools. Devices are created, and then each islinked to a single communications channel , or 'connection'.

The Device Manager, Connection Manager, and Device Type Manager modules areapplications that allow the user to add to, delete from, and edit the contents of the lists ofitems of their particular type. Devices are then assigned to be of a particular Device Type(connecting to a record in the Device Type list) and to use one of the communicationschannels from the Connections list.

Devices can also be grouped together into IQ Central Groups. These Groups are used inthe Alarms, Map View, and Time Sync modules to perform actions on all members of the

Group with a single command.Keeping all of your devices synchronized with the same time information is important foraccurate reporting and Time-of-Day operations. A powerful interactive Time Sync module isused to retrieve and set device clocks on device-by-device basis, or by device type, orgrouping.

And once devices have been configured with all of their parameters, or as a method toanalyze the current configuration of your devices, IQ Central provides a capability to exporta device database to a PDF file. The resulting file can be formatted to suit your needs,including an added header photo or logo, font and layout options, and the file can be savedto disk or printed to create a paper record of your device configurations.

Figure 30 – Assigning a Device to a Connection and a Device Type




38

Introduction to Device ManagementThe Device Management module , also known as Overview of Devices within IQ Central, hasthe following columns of information about each device:

Name -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window . Used to place and track the device

throughout IQ Central.Description -- Entered in the Device Add/Edit window.

Type -- The device type, as pulled from the Device Types list, which can be modifiedusing the Device Type Management module. Add new device types is non-trivial andshould not be done without assistance from a Peek Traffic representative.

Connection Name -- The communications channel that will be used by this device, asselected from the Connections list.

Address -- The drop address used to connect with this device.

Master -- The master address used to connect with this device.

<Blank> -- The second column from the right edge of the window is used to show whichphysical communications channel is used for this Connection. If it is an Ethernetconnection, this column shows the IP address. If it's a serial connection, it shows theCOM port being used.

<Blank> -- The rightmost column shows further detail about the communicationschannel. If the connection is an Ethernet channel, this shows the port number that will beused when connecting with the device. If its a serial or modem channel, it shows thebaud rate that will be used to communicate with the device.

This module lists all the individual devices that have been configured within IQ Central. Thislist shows all devices, grouped by device type. It also provides a general environment where

you can add, edit, and delete individual devices.Devices are sorted automatically by the contents of the first column, the device name. Thelist cannot be sorted by any of the other fields. Columns can, however be resized by movingthe mouse over one of the vertical edges of the column header box. When the cursorbecomes a left-right arrow, click and drag to resize the column.



Chapter 3 – Managing Devices and Connections

39

Add/Edit Device WindowThis window is used to enter or make changes to the key details about a Device .

Figure 31 – Add/Edit Device Window

Adding a Device These are the steps to add a new device to the IQ Central database . (This process requiresthat the Device Type has already been defined in the database.)

1. Open the Device Management module. This can be done by going to the menus andchoosing Devices > Add New Device , or by pressing Alt-D, followed by the letter

'n '.2. From the Device Management module (i.e. 'Overview of Devices,) open the

Enter/Edit Device Window by pressing the Add Device button at the bottom of thewindow.

3. The Enter/Edit Device Window will appear. Fill in the Device Name field with aunique name.

4. Fill in the Description field.

5. Select a Device Type from the pull-down list.

6. Select the Connection that will be used to communicate with the device in the field.

7. Fill in the Drop Address. If the device type is a Master traffic controller , fill in theMaster Address as well. If the connection is an Ethernet type, make sure both ofthese addresses are set to "0" (Zero).

8. When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save buttonbefore you close the window.




40

Note: If you choose to close the window without saving the device, you willbe prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. Ifyou select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/EditDevices window and your previous entries will be preserved. If youselect Yes to the query, your settings will be discarded and theEnter/Edit Device window will close.

9. Close the Enter/Edit Device window.

10. Verify that the new device appears as expected in the Device Management module'sdevice list.

This completes the creation of a new device. Next, you will need to attach it to a map view,or simply monitor it in the other modules of the IQ Central system.

Editing a Device If you need to change information for a particular Device , highlight that Device in the list

and click on the Edit Device Button. Or you can double-click on the device in the list that youwish to edit. Either of these options open a window that will allow you to make the desiredchanges. When you are finished describing the device, be sure to click on the Save buttonbefore you Close the window. If you choose to close the window without saving the device,you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No inthis window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Devices window.

Deleting a Device If you want to delete a Device , highlight that Device in the list and then click on the EditDevice Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that you haveselected the correct Device. Then click on the Delete Button to remove that Device.




41

Viewing Status - The NTCIP Device Status ModuleThis module allows the operator to see the overall connection state and history of all of thedevices in IQ Central. It uses a hierarchical tree view on the left for device type and deviceitem selection, and a detail window on the right to show information about whatever devicelevel is selected in the left window.

There are a couple of ways to launch the NTCIP Device Status Module:

Use the NTCIP Device Status module icon in the toolbar:

Use the keyboard shortcut F2 .

Go to the menus and choose View and then Status .

Click on the screen below to see details about the top level view in the NTCIP Device Statusmodule: (This is the first screen that appears when you open the module.)

Figure 32 – Device Status module

Double-clicking on a device type, in either the device tree or the device type list, willupdate the status window to show devices of only that type.

Double clicking on an individual device, in either the device tree or in the status screenfor a single device type, will update the status display to show connection and event logdetails for that particular device.

Note If any user is adding a new device while this module is open, the list will notautomatically update to show the new device. To see new devices in theNTCIP Device Status module, you will first need to restart IQ Central.




42

Status of All Devices of a Type In the NTCIP Device Status module , selecting a particular device type will change the statuslist on the right to show all of the devices of that type that are currently configured within IQCentral. Generally, this screen shows the descriptive name of each of the devices, andconnection status of the device, the logical communications status of the device, andwhether or not polling is enabled on that device. This same information is shown here, nomatter what type of device is selected.

This screen can also be used to proceed into a status screen for a single device. Justdouble-click on the row for that device in the status display on the right, or single-click on thedevice's name in the tree on the left. Either method will work. When you do this, you will betaken to the Single Device status window.

In this example, the device type 'Overhead Sign' has been selected in the tree list. As youcan see, two devices are currently configured in this system with the device type 'OverheadSign':

Figure 33 – Device Status module for a single device type

Single Device Status - Device Logs Selecting an individual device in the tree list of the NTCIP Device Status module , orchoosing a single device in the Device Type view , will open a status screen for the individualdevice. This window shows the device logs, online history and communications stats for thisdevice. The resulting data can be filtered by a date range, and grouped into bins of different

time lengths.




43

Figure 34 – Device Status module - Device Logs pane

Single Device Status - Comm Stats An alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Comm Stats view. This isone of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and Online History)that is available within that module .

This screen shows the same eleven fields, no matter what device or connection type isselected for that device. These communications parameters provide details about anycomms errors or event messages that have occurred while IQ Central was attempting toconnect with and share data with the selected device. The six fields on the left are forgeneral communications error types. The five fields on the right are specifically concernedwith comms errors that deal with dynamic objects (i.e. STMP data.)Click on the sample screen below for more details about the interface of the Status:CommStats display.

Figure 35 – Device Status module - Comm Stats pane

Single Device Status - Online History Another alternate display in the NTCIP Device Status module is the Online History view.This is one of the three detail views of device status (along with Device Logs and CommStats) that is available within that module .




44

This screen shows the same four fields, no matter what device or connection type isselected for that device. These historical count records provide details about how manytimes connect or disconnect events occurred while IQ Central was attempting tocommunication with the selected device. The settings for what exactly make up an 'Online',a 'Marginal', or an 'Offline' event are defined in the Device Log Polling module. (For detailsabout these settings, see the section describing the 'Counts' parameters.)

Figure 36 – Device Status module - Online History pane




45

Connections

Overview of Connections Module This module displays a listing of all the communications channels that have beenconfigured within IQ Central. It also provides the primary environment where you can add,

edit, or delete these connection channels.

Adding a Connection If you want to add a new Connection, click on the Add Connection Button at the bottom ofthe window. This will open a window where you can define the details about the newConnection. Begin by choosing the Connections pull-down list and choosing Add new...from the list at the top of the window. When you are finished defining the channel , be sure toclick on the Save button before you Close the window. If you choose to close the windowwithout saving the values, you will be prompted to verify that you agree to throw away thechanges. If you select No in this window, you will be returned to the Enter/Edit Connectionswindow. More detail.

Editing a Connection If you need to change information about a particular Connection channel, highlight the rowfor that connection within the list and click on the Edit Connection Button. That will open awindow that will allow you to make the required changes. Or you can double-click on theconnection row in the list to open the Connection edit screen. When you are finished makingthe desired changes to the channel, be sure to press the Save button before closing thewindow. If you choose to close the window without saving the values, you will be promptedto verify that you agree to throw away the changes. If you select No in this window, you willbe returned to the Enter/Edit Connections window.

Deleting a Connection If you want to delete a Connection, highlight that Connection in the list and then click on theEdit Connection Button. That will open the detail window that will allow you to verify that youhave selected the correct Connection. Then click on the Delete Button to remove thatConnection.

Editing a Connection This window contains the details that you can edit for any Connection. The following fieldscan be edited:






47

Managing Device GroupsThe Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators tocombine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are onlyused in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:

Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module Define alarms for a set of devices

Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices

Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map ViewerGroups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There areseveral ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation ofa Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Centralbefore you attempt to add them to a group.

Launching the Device Groups Module

From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups

or

Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar

The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.

Managing Device Groups The Device Groups module was added to IQ Central to make it possible for operators to

combine devices together into user-defined sets, called 'Groups'. Currently, Groups are onlyused in the Alarms, Map Viewer, and Time Sync modules. They can be used to:

Select and manipulate a set of devices in the Map View module

Define alarms for a set of devices

Set or monitor the time sync status for a set of devices

Send a central override pattern change to a group of controllers within the Map ViewerGroups are created, modified, and deleted using the Device Groups module. There areseveral ways to launch the Device Groups module. The only requirements for the creation ofa Group is that the devices you wish to add to your groups need to exist within IQ Centralbefore you attempt to add them to a group.

Launching the Device Groups Module From the IQ Central main window, you can launch the Device Groups module by:

Going to the Tools menu and choosing Device Groups or

Clicking on the Device Groups button (shown at right) in the Standard toolbar The Device Groups module can also be launched from within the Device




48

Configuration module by clicking on the Groups button at the bottom of the window.

Using the Device Groups window When you open the Device Groups window, as described in the Managing Device Groupstopic, it provides a single window interface that lets you create, rename, add and remove

devices, and delete device groups. The interface is divided into three main areas. The topleft of the window shows a list of all of the currently configured groups in IQ Central. Theright side of the window presents a list of the devices that belong to the selected group (inthree different panes, showing three ways to see the device list) and in the bottom leftcorner of the window is an area to create, rename, delete, and save changes to the selectedgroup or groups.

Figure 37 – Parts of the Device Groups window

Current Groups List

This list displays all groups that have been defined within IQ Central. The list can be sortedby Group Name (ascending or descending order) or by Group Description (ascending ordescending order) by clicking on the column header. When an item in this table ishighlighted, the Group Name and Group Description fields in the boxes below the table areeditable copies of these settings. And the Device List window automatically changes to

show what devices are currently assigned to the selected group.

Devices List

This part of the Device Groups window provides a variety of ways to view which devices areattached to the currently selected group. When a group is chosen in the Current Groups listto the left, this area changes to show which devices belong to the group (checks) and whichdo not (unchecked.) The only thing required to add a device to a group is to check the boxnext to it in this window. The three tabs provide three methods of organizing the devices.The default view is 'By Device' which shows a simple list of all devices in the system in




49

alphabetical order. The 'By Type' view shows a hierarchy of devices, divided by devicetypes. Again, check-boxes indicate which are in the group and which are not. Finally, the 'ByGroup' view shows a simple listing of only those devices that belong to the group. TheSelect All and Select None buttons at the bottom of the devices list provides a quick way tocheck all of the boxes, or to clear all of them.

Description of Selected Group These two fields are used to name a new group, or to rename an existing group. It'simportant to realize that editing the name in the Group Name box will NOT create a newgroup unless you first press the New Group button. Making an edit in these fields will simplychange the name of the currently selected group, or its description.

New Group Button

Click this button to create a new item in the Current Groups list. Edit the name anddescription in the fields above to define the group. And be sure to save your changes.

Save Group Button

This saves any changes that were made to the currently selected group. This includeschanges to its name, description, or its list of included devices.

Delete Group Button

This button will delete the currently highlighted group, after you verify that you do actuallywish to delete it. The deletion will not be finalized until you save the change. There is noway to undelete a group once it has been removed. It is possible to delete a group that hasdevices assigned. Any devices assigned to the group will simply be removed from the groupand the group's name and description will be deleted from the IQ Central database.

Save All Button

This button will save all changes to any groups that have been modified. It saves groupnames, descriptions, and member devices.

Close Button

This button closes the Device Groups module. If changes have been made to any of thegroup names, descriptions or device lists, then it will prompt the user whether they wish tosave the changes or not. If the user chooses No , the changes will be discarded.




50

Creating a Group A Device Group can be created at any time by following these simple steps:

1. Open the Device Groups module (by choosing Device Groups in the Tools menu, or by clicking on the Device Groups button in the Standard toolbar.)

2. Press the New Group button. This will create a new entry at the top of the CurrentGroups list above.

3. Type in a name for the group. This can be any length up to 150 characters, but itshould be kept fairly short so it will show up correctly in the Alarms window and inthe Map Viewer. ( Note: Do NOT type the new name until you've pressed the NewGroup button, or you will simply rename the currently highlighted existing group inyour list.)

4. Press the Save Group button.

5. Go to the Device List on the right side of the window and pick which devices youwant in the new group. These selections will have no impact on previous groupassignments.

6. Press the Save Group button again.

7. Close the Device Groups module.

Figure 38 – Be sure to Save the new group once you've created it






52

Deleting a Group A Device Group can be deleted at any time without effecting the devices that are membersof the group.

1. Open the Device Groups module (by choosing Device Groups in the Tools menu, or by clicking on the Device Groups button in the Standard toolbar.)

2. Select the group you would like to delete from the list of groups on the left side of thewindow

3. Press the Delete Group button

4. When asked, verify that you would like to delete the group.

5. Close the Device Groups module and verify that the changes are saved.

Figure 40 – The Delete Group button in the Device Groups module



53

Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller ManagementAlthough there are other sections of the IQ Central interface that deal with specific aspectsof working with traffic intersection controllers within IQ Central (such as the SystemScheduler for retrieving controller log files), this section will discuss the tools and methods

used to configure controllers for interactive usage on the IQ Central Maps. This meansproviding an interface to define how a controller will appear at various levels ofmagnification on one of your map displays, and also providing controls to directly interactwith the controller from within the map environment, namely via the upload and download ofcontroller settings between IQ Central and the device in the field.

Interactive Upload/Download Module – This module allows an IQ Central operator toretrieve, modify and send out configuration data to controllers in the field. This modulewas extensively enhanced in the version 1.2 release, and its speed and capabilitieswere further improved in versions 1.3 and 1.4

Configure Intersections Module – An editor to design how an intersection appears

when viewed in the IQ Central map environment, and how this view changes as youzoom in on the exact intersection.

Example Network – An example of a typical traffic controlnetwork (click on the image at right to open)

Performing a Central Override – Using the IQCentralsoftware to take direct control of a traffic controller or mastercontroller

Coordination Checking – Programming traffic controllers forcoordinated operation can be a confusing operation. As an assisting tool, IQ Centralv1.6 added the capability to test a coordination setup before it is used in a live device




54

Traffic Network - Example TopographyThis diagram shows how a typical traffic control network might be set up between IQ Centraland different kinds of traffic controllers in the field.

Figure 41 – Example IQ Central traffic controller network



Chapter 4 – Traffic Controller Management

55

Supported Traffic ControllersAt the time of this release (IQ Central version 1.7), the software provides completeinteractive upload, download, status display, and log retrieval capabilities for the followingtraffic controllers:

Peek IQ ATC ControllersMultisonics 820A Controllers

Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers

Peek 3000E Controllers

Peek M3000 Master Controllers

Peek LMD 9200 Controllers

Traconex 390CJ Controllers

Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers

Transyt EL ControllersTransyt EL Master Controllers

Note The usage of IQ Central with controllers and master controllers in theMultisonics , Peek, Traconex , and Transyt families requires that ahardware translator box act as a communications intermediary between thecentral software and these non-NTCIP compliant controllers. Peek Trafficsells IQ Connect translator units and cards to serve this function. Contactyour local Peek Traffic representative for more information, or go to the Peekwebsite (http://www.peektraffic.com). Peek's IQ ATC controller line, as well

as any other true NTCIP compliant devices, can be used directly with IQCentral and do not require an IQ Connect translator.

IQ Connect Hardware IQ Connect is a line of electronic protocol translators that providecommunications links between the NTCIP speaking IQ Central, andlegacy traffic controllers and masters that use proprietary communications protocols. PeekTraffic sells two hardware versions of IQ Connect: a standalone 'box' and a controller cardversion. The card unit only works with 3000E controllers. The standalone versions will workwith all of the masters and controllers supported by IQ Central.

Note Native NTCIP speaking controllers, such as the IQ ASTC and IQ ATC controllers do not require a translator.




56

Multisonics Hardware

IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Multisonics controllers in the field:

820A Controllers

OSAM-32 Master Controllers

Note 820A Controllers can only be managed while operating under an OSAM-32Master. There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 820Alocal controller.

Parameter Fields of the 820A Controller

In the Upload/Download module, the entire 820A/OSAM controller database can be viewed,saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, andtransmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are availablefor the 820A in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details on programmingthe 820A controller, refer to the Multisonics 820A Controller Operating Manual.

Table 16 – 820A parameters editable in the Upload/Download module

Group Page Parameter

Command Selection

Manual Free Plan

Manual Commands Manual Commands

Manual Coord Plan

Allowable Phases

Pedestrian Phases

Flashing Walks

Density Phases

Anti-Backup Phases

Intersection Phasing

Yellow Arrow Omit

Exclusive Ped Phase

Non-Actuated I Phase

Non-Actuated II Phase

Simultaneous Gap Phases

Simultaneous Max Phases

Last Car Passage Phases

Min Yellow Time

Phase Features

Red Revert Time

Pre-Flash Phases

Setup

Soft Flash

Flash Red Phases




57


Flash Yellow Phases

Flash Red Overlaps

Flash Yellow Overlaps

Flash Ped Don't Walks

Flash Ped Clearance

Minimum Flash Time

Post-Flash Yellow Time

Post-Flash Red Time

Post-Flash Phases

Start In State

Start Up Times

Start Up Phases

Start Up State

Start Veh Calls

Startup

Start Ped Calls

Parent Phases

Green Extension Time

Yellow Change Time

Red Clear Time

Overlap 1 Type

Overlap 1 Force Output

Overlap 1 Flash OL Green

Overlap 1 Flash OL Yellow

Overlaps

Overlap Flash OL Red

Intersection Shape

Southbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Southbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Westbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Westbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Northbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Northbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Eastbound Thru (set to Phase #)

Eastbound Turn (set to Phase #)

Southbound Ped (set to Phase #)

Westbound Ped (set to Phase #)

LCD Setup

Northbound Ped (set to Phase #)




58


Eastbound Ped (set to Phase #)

Override Min Recall

Override Max Recall

Override Ped Recall

Detector 1 (to 16) Phases

Detectors

Detector 1 (to 16) Locking (On/Off)

Ped Walk Time

Ped Clear Time

Add Time Per Actuation

Initial Time

Maximum Init Time

Extension Time

Min Ext Time

Time Before Reduction

Time to Reduce

Max Green Time

Max II Green Time

Maximum Step

Maximum Limit

Yellow Limit

Phase Timing Phase Timing

Red Clear Time

Ring 1 Seq (Steps 1-10)

Ring 2 Seq (Steps 1-10)

Min Recall

Max Recall

Ped Recall

Soft Recall

No Skip

Conditional Service

Non Actuated

Dual Entry

Red Rest

Max II

Ped Recycle

Act. Rest-in-Walk

Free Plans Free Plans 1 - 16

Detector Plan No.




59


Active Sp Function Circuits

5-Section Prot. Only

Delay Time (Detectors 1-16)

Inhibit Delay (Detectors 1-16)

Stretch Time (Detectors 1-16)

Type (Detectors 1-16)

Switching (Detectors 1-16)

Alt. Phase Association (Detectors 1-16)

Revert-if-Green Phases(Detectors 1-16)

Revert-in-Queue Phases(Detectors 1-16)

Queue Detector Presence(Detectors 1-16)

Speed Trap Type (Detectors 1-16)

Loop Length (1 Loop) (Detectors 1-16)

Avg Vehicle Length (Detectors 1-16)

Dist. Between Loops (Detectors 1-16)

Detector Plans Detector Plans 1 - 8

Associated 2nd Loop (Detectors 1-16)

No Activity (Detectors 1-12)

Constant Call (Detectors 1-12)

Erratic Output (Detectors 1-12)Diagnostic Recalls (Detectors 1-12)

Detector Diag Detectors 1-24

Diag Green Ext (Detectors 1-12)

Keyboard Beep

Password

Enable Security

LCD Contrast

Parameters

LCD Backlight (On/Off)

Special Function 1-4 Polarity

Special Function 1-4 Type

Special Functions

Special Function 1-4 Mode

Dim Green

Dim Yellow

Dim Red

Misc

Dimming

Dim Walk




60


Dim Don't Walik

Dim Flash Don't Walk

Dim Overlap Green

Dim Overlap Yellow

Dim Overlap Red

Disable AOR (Yes/No)

DST Enabled

Spring Day of Week

Spring Weed of Month

Spring Month

Spring Hour

Fall Day of WeekFall Week of Month

Fall Month

DST Adjustment

Fall Hour

Cab Flash Monitor PolarityHardware Configuration

RTS/CTS Delay tic time

Control Flags (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Output (Preempt 1-5)

Override Min Greens (Preempt 1-5)

Override Walks (Preempt 1-5)

Override FDW (Preempt 1-5)

Delay Time (Preempt 1-5)

Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 1 Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 1 Overlaps to Darken(Preempt 1-5)

Clear 1 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 2 Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Clear 2 Overlaps to Darken(Preempt 1-5)

Clear 2 Green Time (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 5 Flash (Preempt 1-5)

Preempt Standard Preempt

Interval 5 Overlaps to Darken(Preempt 1-5)




61


Interval 5 Min Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 5 Max Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 6 Yellow Time (Preempt 1-5)

Interval 7 Red Time (Preempt 1-5)

Return Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Return Veh Calls (Preempt 1-5)

Return Ped Calls (Preempt 1-5)

Enabled (Yes/No) (Preempt 1-5)

Phases (Preempt 1-5)

Max Hold Time (Preempt 1-5)

Max Queue Time (Preempt 1-5)

Low Priority Preempt

Queue Clear Time (Preempt 1-5)TO Reference, hour

TO Reference, Minute

Offset Reference

Ext Coor Type

Num of Cycles of No Sync

Num of Cycles of Detector Accumulation

Num of Minutes of Detector Accumulation

Coordination Dual Entry Phases

Coord Constants Coord Constants

Detector Accum. Interval

Perm Strategy

Omit Strategy Max

TO Location

3% Window

Stretch 3% By

GBP Omits

Early Return

Once Around

Cycle Length

Offset

Min Cycle Length

Max Cycle Length

Coord Plans Coordination Plans 1 - 48

External Sync




62


Active SF

Detector Plan #

Protected Only Enable

Calculated Walk

Rest-in-Walk

No Skip

Sequence (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Start Perm (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Accumulated Split(Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Call Options (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Split Type (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Reservice (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Allow Ped (Rings 1-2) (Steps 1-10)

Events 1-200 Events 1 - 50

Day Plans 1-16 Day Plan Event #

Week Plans Day Plan # (Sunday to Saturday)

Year Plans Week Plan # (Week 1-54)

Month

Day

Year

Exception Days 1 - 30

Plan #

New Year's Day

M L King Day

President's Day

Good Friday

Easter Monday

Memorial Day

Independence Day

Labor Day

Columbus Day

Veteran's Day

Thanksgiving Day

Day after Thanksgiving

TIC

Holidays

Christmas Eve




63


Christmas Day

Day after Christmas

New Year's Eve

Remop Protocol

Remop Baud Rate Div.

Remop Tel #1

Remop Tel #2

Dial Retries

Modem Init String 1

Remop Options

Modem Init String 2

Intersection Name Name

Power UpBad Coordination Plan

Bad Free Plan

Hardware Timeout

Coordination Error

Cyclic Error

Stop Time Detected

Flash Feedback Detected

Battery Backup Clock Bad

Cabinet Door Opened

EEPROM Write Timeout Error

SF1-6 Feedback Detected

MCE Detected

Detector No Activity

Detector Constant Call

Detector Erratic Output

Detector Repair

Detector Diag. Active

Error Logging

Clear Failed Detector

Baud Rate Divisor

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Comm/System

Printer Setup

Parity




64


Print Columns / Line

Printer Protocol

End-of-Line Delay

XON Char

Auto Line Feed

Print Form Controls

Print Det Plans

Print Coord Plans

Print TIC Events

Print TIC Day Plans

System Type

OSAM Local Address

System

System Baud Rate

Parameter Fields of the OSAM-32 Master

This topic has not been created yet.




65

Using Peek Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage four types of PEEK controllers in the field:

IQ ATC Controllers

3000E Controllers

M3000 Master Controllers

LMD 9200 Controllers

Parameter Fields of the 3000E Controller

In the Upload/Download module, the entire 3000E controller database can be viewed,saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, andtransmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and parameters areavailable for the 3000E controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For moredetails on programming the 3000E controllers, refer to the 3000E Operating Manual .

Table 17 – Peek 3000E Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module Group Page Parameter

Startup Phases

Startup Interval

Startup Flash Time

Startup Red Time

Ring 1 Sequence

Ring 2 Sequence

Ring 3 Sequence

Ring 4 Sequence

Cophase 1 - 8 Sequences

XPed 1 Phase

Xped 1 Output

Xped 1 Soft Return

Xped 2 Phase

Xped 2 Output

Xped 2 Soft Return

Default Sequence

Xped 1 In

Xped 1 Ped Detector 1 (Y/N)


Xped 1 TOD Input (Y/N)

Controller Sequence/Startup

Xped 2 In




66




Xped 2 TOD Input (Y/N)

CNA 1 - 4

Walk Rest Modifier

Inhibit Max

Ped Recycle

Flash Walk

Flash Dont Walk -> Yellow

Flash Dont Walk -> Red

Phase Modes

Conditional Ped

Min Green (Seconds)Passage (Seconds)

Yellow (Seconds)

Red (Seconds)

Walk (Seconds)

Ped Clear (Seconds)

Max 1 (Seconds)

Max 2 (Seconds)

Max 3 Limit (Seconds)

Max 3 Adjust (Seconds)

Time Before Reduction (Seconds)

Time to Reduce (Seconds)

Min Gap (Seconds)

Added Initial / Actuation (Seconds)

Max Initial (Seconds)

Min Recall (Phase(s))

Max Recall (Phase(s))

Ped Recall (Phase(s))

Soft Recall (Phase(s))

Detector Non-Lock (Phase(s))

Vehicle Omit (Phase(s))

Ped Omit (Phase(s))

Phase Times (Timing Plans 1 - 4)

Walk Rest (Phase(s))




67


Max 2 (Phase(s))

Red Rest (Phase(s))

No Skip (Phase(s))

Dual Entry Enable (Yes/No)

Dual Entry Phase 1 - 16

Dual Entry

Dual Entry Time Plan 1 - 4

Cond. Serv. by Input (Yes/No)

Phase 1-16 CSV

Cond. Serv. by Plan (Yes/No)

Conditional Service

Cond. Serv. by Plan Phase 1 - 4

Auto Ped Clear with MCEPed Options

Enhanced PedVeh Assignments Call Phases (Detectors 1-64)

Ped Assignments Phases (Detectors 1-8)

Mode (for Detectors 1-64)Modes

Lock (for Detectors 1-64)

Delay (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)

Str/Stp (Seconds) (for Detectors 1-64)

Delay (Seconds)(Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)

Detector Times

Str/Stp (Seconds)(Time Plan 2, Detectors 1-12)

Delay Inhibits Plans 1-3 Inhibits for Det 1-12

Detector Switching Enable (Yes/No)

Detector Copy Group 1 Enable (Yes/No)

Detector Copy Group 2 Input Enable (Yes/No)

Copy During Phase Green Green 1(Phase Greens 1-16)

Copy During Phase Green Green 2

(Phase Greens 1-16)

G1C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)

G1C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)

G2C: From Phase (Phases 1-16)

G2C: To Phase (Phases 1-16)

Switch from Phases (Detectors 1-64)

Detectors

Switch and Copy

Switch to Phases (Detectors 1-64)




68


Erratic Enable (Yes/No)

Start Absence Mon Hour

End Absence Mon Hour

Lock Times (Detectors 1-64)

Absence Times (Detectors 1-64)

Min Presence (Detectors 1-64)

Erratic Counts (Detectors 1-64)

Loop Length (Detectors 1-64)

Fail Max Recall Phase (Detectors 1-64)

Fail Max Recall Times (Phases 1-16)

Ped Detector Diag > Absence(Ped detectors 1-8)

Ped Detector Diag > Lock(Ped detectors 1-8)

Fail Monitoring

Ped Detector Diag > Erratic(Ped detectors 1-8)

System Sensor Assignments Assignment (Phases 1-16)

Parent Phases (OL A-P)

Flash Enabled (OL A-P)

MOD PHS (OL A-P)

Delay Enabled (OL A-P)

Overlap Type (OL A-P)Green (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Yellow (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Red (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Delay (Seconds) (OL A-P)

Assignments and Types

Flash Code (OL A-P)

Start Up Interval

O/L Card Enable (Yes/No)

Alternate Flash Rate (flashes/minute)

Ped Overlap Min Walk (Seconds)

Startup, Card, Alternate Flash

Ped Overlap Min Ped Clear (Seconds)

Enable (Yes/No)

Phase Yellow (OL A-P)

Phase Next (OL A-P)

Overlaps

Double Clear (Trailing)

Group Yellow (OL A-P)




69


Group Next (OL A-P)

Release Phases (OL A-P)

Mode (OL A-P)

Enable (Y/N)

Pedestrian Overlaps

Phase Assign (OL A-P)

Ped Overlap Enable (POL A-H)

Deact-Delay (Seconds) (POL A-H)

Advance Warning Logic

Cond Overlap (POL A-H)

Enable Leading Overlaps (Yes/No)

Advance Green Enables

Lead Overlap Green Time (Seconds)

Phase Next (POL A-H)

Advance Green Overlaps̀

Group Next (POL A-H)

Dynamic Omits (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)

Omit Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

If Phase On (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

If O/L Green on Group (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

Dynamic Recall (Groups 1-2) (Y/N)

Recall Phase (Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)Recall If Phase On(Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

Dynamic Omit/Recall

Recall If O/L Green on Group(Groups 1-2) (Plans 1-8)

UCF Override Hold (Yes/No)

UCF Test A or B

UCF Last

UCF/Soft Flash

UCF Exit

Density Enable (Yes/No)Last Car Passage (Yes/No)

Density Enables

Density Phase Enable

Simult. Gap Out Enable (Yes/No)Simultaneous Gap Out

Simult. Gap Phases

Max Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)

Controller - Enhanced

Max 3 Setup

Gap Outs to Adjust MX3 (Phases 1-16)




70


Red Revert Time (Seconds)

Passage Sequence Enabled (Yes/No)

Min Red Revert = 2 Seconds (Yes/No)

Ext Start Override Preemeption (Yes/No)

Passage Sequence/ Red Revert/Preemption Override

Preemption Override Stop Time (Yes/No)

Dim Red

Dim Yellow

Dim Green

Dim Dont Walk

Dim Ped Clear

Dim Walk

Overlap Red

Overlap Yellow

Overlap Green

Overlap Dont Walk

Overlap Ped Clear

Dimming

Overlap Ped Walk

Lead/Lag Pattern 1-8, Set 1-4, Mode 1-2

UCF Soft Flash (Yes/No)

Phases to Wig

Phases to Wag

Phases to Yellow

Overlap to Wig

Overlap to Wag

Soft Flash

Overlap to Yellow

Cycle Source

Free Source

Split SourceFlash Source

Offset Source

Selection Source

Inter TOD Revert (Seconds)

Ref to end of Main St. (Yes/No)

Use % for Phase Allocation (Yes/No)

Coordination

Basic Options/ Offset Seek

Use % for Offset Entry (Yes/No)




71


Use Fixed Force Offset (Yes/No)

Permissive Type

Offset Seeking Mode

Cycle Length (Seconds)(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Offset 1 (Seconds)(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)



Cycles / Offsets

Min Length (Seconds)(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Coord Phases Phases (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Phase Allocations Phase Allocations(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free to TOD Circuits COS/F to TOD#(1-10)

Enhanced Perm (Yes/No)

Invert Free (Yes/No)

Central Override (Yes/No)

Split Matrix (Yes/No)

No PCL Offset Adj. (Yes/No)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)

No Early Coord Ped (Yes/No)

Yield Percentage

EGB Percentage

RGB Percentage

Operating Options

# Cycles to out of step

S̀ync SourceCycle Sync Options

Cycle 1-6

Auto Perm and FO (Yes/No)

Ped Perm (Seconds)

Start (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Manual Permissives

End (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Coord Enhanced

Manual Force Offs Force Offs (Phases 1-16)(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)




72


Cycles per Period

Min Force Offs

Splits 1-4 Phases

Adaptive Split

Offsets 1-5 (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

Enable Split Matrix (Yes/No)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)

Split Matrix

Adaptive Split Inhibits (Offsets 1-5) (Cycles 1-6)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)No Early Release

No Early Release phases(Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

4 Splits/Cycle (Yes/No)CS to Time Plan

Time Plan # (Cycles 1-6) (Splits 1-4)

COS to Lead/Lag Configs 1-10

Number of Sync Pulses (Cycles)

No Offset Line (Seconds)

Offset to Free

Multi Offsets (Seconds)

Day Plans Day Plans 1-300

Circuit Plans Active Circuits (Circuits 1-4) (Plan 1-50)

Sunday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Monday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Tuesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Wednesday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Thursday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Friday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Week Plans

Saturday Day Plan (Plans 1-20)

Year Plans Week Plans (Weeks 1-53)

Exception Days Exception Days 1-50

Circuit Overrides Circuit State (On/Off/TOD) Ckts 1-255)

Spring (Month of Year / Week of Month)Daylight Savings

Fall (Month of Year / Week of Month)

Mode

Time Clock Reset Hour

Time of Day (TOD)

Sync Reference

Time Clock Reset Minute




73


Interrupter

Pulses per Cycle

Time Dep Ref HH (Cycles 1-6)

Time Dep Ref MM (Cycles 1-6)

Run Enable (Yes/No)

Railroad (Yes/No)

PE Input Lock (Yes/No)

Early PE Out (Yes/No)

Max Intervals

Override Flash (Yes/No)

Go to Higher PE (Yes/No)

NEMA Priority (Yes/No)Hold Only (Yes/No)

User Priority

Double Clear Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Lead Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Delay Overlap Enabled (Yes/No)

Force Off to 1st Interval (Yes/No)

User Interval Data for Overlap (Yes/No)

Enable Coord During Cyclic Int (Yes/No)

Duration Time (Seconds)

Delay Time (Seconds)

Reservice Time (Seconds)

Omit All last portion of Delay (Seconds)

Fail Max Time (Seconds)

Double Clear Overlap Mode (Seconds)

Red Revert Override (Yes/No)

Green

Walk

Ped Clear

Yellow

Red

Overlap Yellow

Preemption Runs 1-6

Valid Intervals (1-32)




74


Dwell Intervals (1-32)

Fixed Intervals (1-32)

Tenth Intervals (1-32)

Exit Intervals (1-32)

Ped Clear -> Yellow Intervals (1-32)

Exit Mode

Exit Phases

Wig Flash Plans 1-16

Wag Flash Plans 1-16

Master Type

Intersection ID

Master Identification

Master Port

Monitor Port

Central Port

Port 2 Hardware Type

Port 2 Comm Copy

Port 2 Baud Rate

Port 2 Data bits

Port 2 Parity

Port 2 RTS -> CTS

Port 3 Hardware Type

Port 3 Baud Rate

Port 3 Data bits

Port 3 Parity

Port 3 RTS -> CTS

Modem Init string

Phone 1

ID / Comm / Phone

Phone 2

Event Log Call In 1 and 2

Vol Log Sample Period (Minutes)

MOE Log Sample Period (Minutes)

Speed Trap (1-4) Lead Detector

Comm/System Setup

Event / Log Data

Speed Trap (1-4) Trailing Detector






76

Parameter Fields of the M3000 Master

This topic has not been created yet.

U.S. Traffic Hardware

Parameter Fields of the ATC Controller In the Upload/Download module, the entire IQ ATC controller database can be viewed,saved to the central IQ Central database, edited, copied between controllers, andtransmitted to a controller. The following parameter groups, pages, and fields are availablefor the IQ ATC controllers in the IQ Central Upload/Download module. For more details onprogramming the IQ ATC controllers, refer to the IQ ATC CBD Operating Manual or the IQATC TS-2 / 2 Operating Manual.

Table 18 – IQ ATC Controller parameters editable in the Upload/Download module Group Page Parameter

Enabled (Yes/No)

Auto Flash Entry Phase (Yes/No)

Auto Flash Exit Phase (Yes/No)

Non Actuated 1 (Yes/No)

Non Actuated 2 (Yes/No)

Non Lock Detector Memory (Yes/No)

Min Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)

Max Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)

Pedestrian Recall (Yes/No)

Soft Vehicle Recall (Yes/No)Dual Entry (Yes/No)

Simultaneous Gap Disable (Yes/No)

Guaranteed Passage (Yes/No)

Actuated Rest in Walk (Yes/No)

Conditional Service Enable (Yes/No)

Phase Options (PHases 1 - 16)

Added Initial Calculation (Yes/No)

Walk (Seconds)

Ped Clear (Seconds)

Min Green (Seconds)

Passage (Seconds)

Max 1 (Seconds)

Max 2 (Seconds)

Yellow (Seconds)

Phase

Phase Timing (Phases 1 - 16)

Red Clear (Seconds)




77


Red Revert

Added Initial (Seconds)

Max Initial (Seconds)

Time Before Red (Seconds)

Cars Before Red (Seconds)

Time to Reduce (Seconds)

Reduce By (Seconds)

Min Gap (Seconds)

Dynamic Max (Seconds)

Dyn Max Step (Seconds)

Start Up

Sequences 1 - 16, Rings 1-4 (phase)Ring Number for Phases 1-16

Sequence Sequence

Concurrency phases for Phases 1-16

Detector Options

Call Phase

Switch Phase

Delay (Seconds)

Extend (Seconds)

Queue Limit (Seconds)

No Activity (Minutes)

Max Presence (Minutes)

Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)

Fail Time (Seconds)

Vehicle Detectors (Detectors 1 - 64)

Reset (Yes/No)

Call Phase

No Activity (Minutes)

Max Presence (Minutes)

Ped Detectors

Erratic Counts (Counts/Minute)

Alarms (Detectors 1-64)

Reported Alarms (Detectors 1-64)

Detector

Status

Alarms (Pedestrian Detectors 1-8)

Vol/Occ Setup Period (Seconds)

Sequence Number

Volume (Count) (for Detectors 1-64)

Vol/Occ

Vol/Occ Report

Occupancy (%) (for Detectors 1-64)




78


Start Up Flash (Period/State)

Auto Ped Clear (State)

Backup Time (Seconds)

Unit Unit

Red Revert (Seconds)

Correction Mode

Maximum Mode

Force Mode

Pattern Cycle Time (Patterns 1-48)

Pattern Offset Time (Patterns 1-48)

Pattern Split Number (Patterns 1-48)

Coord Setup

Pattern Sequence Number (Patterns 1-48)

Split Time (Seconds)

Split Mode

Coordination

Splits 1 - 16

Split Coord Phase (Yes/No)

Link

Delay (Seconds)

Min Duration (Seconds)

Min Green (Seconds)

Min Walk (Seconds)

Enter Ped Clear (Seconds)

Track Green (Seconds)Dwell Green (Seconds)

Max Presence (Seconds)

Track Phase

Dwell Phase

Dwell Ped

Exit Phase

Non-Locking Memory (On/Off)

Override Flash (On/Off)

Override Next Preempt (On/Off)

Preempts Preemptions 1 - 6

Flash Dwell (On/Off)

Control Source (Phase or Overlap)

Control Type

Flash Yellow (Yes/No)

Channel Assignments Channel Setup (Channels 1 - 16)

Flash Red (Yes/No)




79


Flash Alt Half Hertz (Yes/No)

Dim Green (Yes/No)

Dim Yellow (Yes/No)

Dim Red (Yes/No)

Dim Alt Half Line Cycle (Yes/No)

Type

Included Phases

Modifier Phases

Trail Green (Seconds)

Trail Yellow (Seconds)

Overlaps Overlap Setup

Trail Red (Seconds)

Device Present (Yes/No)

Frame 40 Enable (Yes/No)

Status

TS 2 Port 1 TS 2 Port 1 (BIUs 1-8)

Fault Frame

DeviceNode

Make

Model

Version

Configuration Configuration (1-3)

Type

Timebase Setup ASC Pattern Sync

Pattern

Auxiliary Function 1



Timebase

Actions 1 - 48

Special Functions

Global Time

Daylight Savings

Time

Local Time Differential (Seconds)

Month

Day

Date

Time Base Schedules 1-32

Day Plan (Number)

Scheduling

Day Plans 1 - 32 Day Plan (Hour) (Events 1 - 16)




80


Day Plan Minute (Events 1 - 16)

Timebase Action (Events 1 - 16)

Traconex Hardware

Using Traconex Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Traconex controllers in the field:

• 390CJ Controllers

• TMM-500 Master Controllers

Note: 390CJ Controllers can only be managed while operating under a TMM-500 Master.There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 390CJ local controller.

Parameter Fields of the 390CJ Controller This topic has not been created yet.

Parameter Fields of the TMM-500 Master This topic has not been created yet.

Transyt Hardware

Using Transyt Hardware with IQ Central IQ Central can be used to manage two types of Transyt controllers in the field:

• 1880EL Controllers

• 3800EL Master Controllers

Note: 1880EL Controllers can only be managed while operating under a 3800EL Master.There is currently no IQ Connect option for an independent 1880EL localcontroller.

Parameter Fields of the 1880EL Controller This topic has not been created yet.

Parameter Fields of the 3800EL Master This topic has not been created yet.

Configuring Intersection Display on Maps




81

Configure Intersections ModuleWhen you've got your maps configured and your devices and connections set up, the nextlogical step is to make your devices show up on your maps. For intersection devices (trafficcontrollers and masters), there is a special module included with IQ Central to define howthe device will appears in the map environment.

The Configure Intersection module is the very powerful interface used to define what anintersection will look like on a map. It can be used to define what 'All devices' look like on amap, how a particular 'Type' of device will appear, or it can be used to define a uniqueappearance for each individual device in your database. And it also does this for each of the'zoom levels' that are available for 'All devices', 'Device type', and individual devices. Atraffic controller , for instance, can have up to four different appearances, based on what'zoom level' the map is currently showing. Zoom 1 is displayed when the map is showing alarge area and you only want the device to show up with minimal detail. At the other end ofthe spectrum, Zoom 4 is displayed when the map is zoomed into a small area around thedevice, and you will probably want the device to show a great deal of detail about its currentoperation. The Configure Intersection module allows you to set up how the device willappear in all of these situations.

Note The actual point where the map switches from one Zoom level display toanother is not defined in this module. If you are using the BMP version ofmapping, the zoom level is defined when you build the static map. If, on theother hand, you are working with GIS maps, the zoom level is defined usinga special Device Zoom Levels module.

Launching the Configure Intersection Module The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a number of ways:

Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays .

Click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the Map Configurationtoolbar

The Basic Steps to Set Up an Intersection When one wants to define how a particular device , or all devices of Device Type, willappear on the maps, follow these steps:

1. Make sure the device, the map, and the connection to the device have all beenconfigured properly.

2. Open the Configure Intersection module.

3. Select the Device Type you are working with from the pull-down list at the top of thewindow.

4. Next, pick the particular device you are interested in, using the 'Devices for theselected Device Type' drop-down list. (If you want to define a default view for thisDevice Type, skip this step.)

5. Select the Zoom level you wish to define.

6. Make sure that the Settings by option is set to Device Specific.




82

Use the icon buttons and the preview display in the middle of the Configure Intersectionwindow to set up the display as you wish it to be. Start by defining a background, and thenadd control and signal icons.

Make sure each icon is linked to a data field. This will allow you to later poll for those dataitems, which will then be updated on your maps. ( Note: Version 1.4 of IQ Central added the

very useful Auto Populate Polling tool to the Device Specific view of ConfigureIntersections. This will allow you to populate the intersection with all of the icons you wish itto have, then press Auto Populate Polling for IQ Central to fill in the data fields for all ofthose icons.)

When you are finished defining the intersection and zoom level, click on the Save button tostore the settings to the database .

Notes about Opening the Configure Intersection module

The Configure Intersection module can be opened in a couple of ways:

Go to the Maps menu and choose Intersection Displays

or click on the Configure Intersections icon (shown at right) on the MapConfiguration toolbar




83

The Configure Intersection Interface

Figure 42 – Overview of the Configure Intersection interface

Adding an Icon to an Intersection Within an intersection display, each data object from the device is represented by by anicon, or control. The terms are used interchangeably in the interface. They just mean agraphical element that is linked through the communications channel to a data object withinthe field device. When the state of the data object changes, the icon is either hidden ordisplayed. Some icons, like status icons, can also be used to present text values from thedevice within the intersection display.

To add an icon to the display, it's just a matter of selecting the type of icon being inserted byselecting from the array of icon buttons in the Configure Intersection interface. This array ofbuttons changes, depending on what zoom level is being edited. The following table showswhat buttons are available for each zoom level. Each increase in zoom level increases thenumber of icon types that can be placed on the intersection display, since one normallywants to provide more details as one zooms into map view of the intersection.




84

Table 19 – Icons by Zoom Level in the Configure Intersection module Zoom level Available Icon buttons

Zoom 1

Zoom 2

Zoom 3

Zoom 4

Each of these buttons presents a drop-down list of all of the icons of a particular type thatare available, based on the type of device with which you are working. Select a backgroundfirst, and then add icons for the signals and indicators that you want to appear on the mapview for a device.

Table 20 – Icons used to Configure an Intersection Button Purpose

Add a background image. When creating a new intersection display, this should be selected first.(Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Add a simple status dot (changes color based on object value) (Zoom 1 only)

Green phase icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Yellow phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Red phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Vehicle detector (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Don't Walk signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian Clearance signal indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Status field icon (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

Label text icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Pedestrian Call indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)




85

Button Purpose

Green Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Yellow Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Red Overlap phase icon (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Phase ON indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Phase NEXT indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection ONLINE indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection Flash indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Intersection Failed indicator (Zoom 3 and 4 only)

Alarm indicator (Zoom 2, 3, 4 only)

After an icon button is pressed (or a particular item is selected from the pull-down list of anicon button) a default graphic appears in the middle of the preview display area, in the righthalf of the Configure Intersection module. You can click and drag this default icon to locatethe signal against the background image.

Changing the Appearance of an Intersection Icon The controls to change the appearance of an intersection icon appear in the middle leftportion of the Configure Intersection window.

Figure 43 – Selecting an image for an intersection element The main control that you have over the appearance of an icon is what image file will beused to represent the data object. IQ Central can use files of type .bmp (the default), .jpg,.gif, or .wmf. IQ Central comes with a library of icons from which you can choose, or youcan provide your own icons. The only requirement for this is that IQ Central must be able tolocate the image files whenever it is launched.

With only a couple of exceptions , all of the icon types are simple ON/OFF indicators that arelinked to the status of one simple binary variable. When the linked data is ON, the icon




86

appears in the intersection. When the bit is OFF, it is hidden. A phase green icon is a goodexample of this type of behavior.

Changing the Graphic File for an Icon

To change the image that is attached to the icon, click on the icon in the preview area.(Make sure you have the correct icon selected by referring to the text label that appearsabove the preview window.) You can then either type in the path to the new image file, oryou can use the Browse button to locate the file in your file system.

Note It may be easier for you to find the image you want by switching to theThumbnail view in the Browse window, and also make sure you are viewingfiles of type ALL . . . otherwise you will only see the .bmp image files on yoursystem.

Intersection Icon Image Library

IQ Central is installed with a large collection of image files that can be used within the

Intersection Configuration module . These include many intersection background images, aswell as a couple of different styles of arrows and other signal indicators. These image filesare stored in the IQ Central\ Device Icons\Intersection\ directory, wherever IQ Central wasinstalled on your system. (The default install location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\Device Icons\Intersection\. )

Linking Intersection Icons to Data Objects Each icon in the intersection display is linked to a single data object for the device . Thebottom left section of the Configure Intersections window is used to define what data isattached to the icon. Below, you can see the general appearance of this area:

Figure 44 – Linking data to an intersection element

a drop down Data list showing all of the data objects in this type of device's master table,

a check box to limit the list to only objects that are typically used for map polling objects(i.e. icon data linkages that will be updated with live data in the map viewer)




87

An area to select a particular section of the data object that is to be linked to the icon.This area changes based on the type of data object that is chosen in the Data drop-down list. ('Select a phase' list in the above example.)

When you select and add many of the icon types, a data object will automatically be

selected based on the icon you choose. In the above example, the Data object and phaseselection were chosen automatically when the user selected the Green Phase 1 icon. Inthis case, the particular linkage is to the 'Phase 1' bit of the 'phaseStatusGroupGreens.1'data object.

Another example of the particularity of this area, is shown with this next example, whichappears if one inserts an Alarm icon and links to the data object 'alarmGroupState.2':

The exact data object list that appears depends on which type of device is being edited. Buta good rule of thumb is that the data objects for traffic controller type devices that are mostcommonly used for intersection icons are in the 'phaseStatusGroup' portion of the list.

Note that although this interface allows you to connect an icon to a bit of data in the device,that data is not automatically retrieved when you view the device in the Map Viewer. To setup that functionality, you will need to perform the next step, which is to set up map pollingfor these data objects. Map polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired dataacross the device's communications channel . The configuration of map polling is donemanually using the Realtime Map Polling module, or you can let IQ Central help you set itup by using the Auto Populate Polling tool.

Figure 45 – Linking to alarmGroupState.2




88

Setting Up Map Polling

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection Icons Once you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you willneed to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Map

polling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device 'scommunications channel . This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of thelinked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map Viewmodule . The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime MapPolling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific iconsyou've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.

Auto Populate Polling The Auto Populate Pooling tool is a dialog box that can be called from the ConfigureIntersections module . It inspects the intersection that you have set up in that interface, andbased on the icons and data objects that have been placed in the intersection, it attempts tocompile a complete map polling list for you.

Figure 46 – Auto Populate Polling button from the Configure Intersections window

Note If you have configured some, but not all, of the map polling for a device ,and you decide to launch the Auto Populate Polling tool, the tool will promptyou with the message at right before you can proceed. Be aware that the tool will erase your current map polling entries for this device andattempt to create a completely new table based on the icons currently in theintersection display.

Figure 47 – Auto populate polling warning message

The Auto Populate Polling tool runs, performs its duty, and then reports on how many rowsof map polling data have been created for this device. An example is shown below.




89

Figure 48 – Auto populate polling completion message

To view the resulting map polling settings, open the Realtime Map Polling module. Defaultvalues are chosen for the polling parameters (such as polling interval and whether to leavethe connection open between polls or not.) These settings can, of course, still be edited ona row-by-row basis using the controls in the Realtime Map Polling module.




90

The Upload/Download Interface

Controller Upload and Download Traffic controllers and master controllers are a quite a bit more complex in their datahandling needs than most of the other traffic hardware that IQ Central tracks. They not only

have their internal configuration settings, which are quite extensive, but they also generatevery large sets of logging data, as well as alarm states and interactive controls. Because ofthis complexity, and the fact that every controller handles all of this data slightly differentlyfrom one another, IQ Central has a special module just for sending and receivingconfiguration parameters from these controllers.

The Controller Upload/Download module provides an environment where a user canconnect with a single traffic controller or master, and the display window will fill with tabsand data fields appropriate to that device . And the interface then allows the user to send andretrieve individual parameters to the device in the field, as well as to the IQ Centraldatabase . The state of individual fields are indicated by color coded backgrounds. Thesebackground colors are used to indicate when the memory settings are the same as thedatabase versions of these settings, and when they are the same as the field device'svalues.

Figure 49 – Upload/Download Module




91

Launching the Upload/Download Module There are several methods that can be used to open the IQ Central Upload/Downloadmodule:

From the Devices menu, open the Intersections group and choose Upload Download

From either the Devices toolbar or the Intersections toolbar , choose the UploadDownload icon(shown below)

Or you can open the Upload/Download module from the Map View module. If you right-click on an intersection controller or master controller, you will see a context-menu thatlooks like the one shown below.Select Upload Download from this menu, and IQCentral will not only load the module, but also automatically select the device that youclicked on in the Map Viewer and load its current database values.

Once open, this module allows you to perform the following functions when working withtraffic controllers and masters:

Set single parameter values on a controller

Set whole groups of values on a controller

Retrieving one parameter, a group of parameters, a page, or the entire database from acontroller

Sending and receiving one parameter, a group, a page, or the entire database from theIQ Central database

Copying a database from one controller to another (of the same type)

Editing default device parameters

Performing a coordination check

See the related topics below for more details about how to perform these functions.




92

The Upload/Download Interface When the Upload/Download module is launched, it initially presents a blank expression. Itneeds to be told with which device type and individual device it will be communicating. (Theexception to this is if you open the module from the Map Viewer, in which case it willautomatically load the groups, pages, and data cells for the selected device automatically.)

Figure 50 – The Upload/Download module with no device selected The screen is divided into three regions:

the top of the screen is where one selects the device type and device

the middle of the screen is where the device-specific groups, pages, and parameter cellsappear

the bottom of the screen provide controls for sending and receiving parts of thecontroller database to the central database and to the device.

Figure 51 – Interface elements of the Upload/Download module




93

When a device is selected, the middle of the module's window is filled with the data fields forthat type of device. The illustration above shows a typical screen for a Peek 3000E controller. In this example, you can see how the groups and pages of data are modeled tomatch the way the data is stored in this particular type of controller, as well as the color-coded parameter cells in the table, and the data transfer status area just below the datatable. Here, we are in the process of sending all pages and groups to the device. (The

screen reports that IQ Central is currently transmitting Block 98, which is the coordination phase allocation splits for phases 17 through 24, and the overall transfer is currently 32%complete.)

Memory, the central database, and the device

One important thing to keep in mind when working with the Upload/Download module is thatyou will be working with three copies of the data. There is the copy stored in the IQ Centralcentral database. There is the copy in active memory. And there is the copy stored out inthe device's memory. The window here always shows the data stored in active memory.When you first open the module and select a device, IQ Central automatically loads thecopy of the database from the central database into active memory. You can also use thecontrols at the bottom of the screen to copy the entire database from the device into activememory. And then you have the option to make changes to individual cells in the datatables, or you can send and receive groups of data between the central database or thefield device. All of this can create some confusion about what parameter values are storedwhere. This is the reason for the color coding in the data cells, and in the icons that appearon the Group and Page tabs. The purpose of these codes are to indicate when activememory matches and differs from the other two copies of the device database. The waythese color codes and icons are used are described in the next topic.

Editing Values in the Tables

The tables that appear under the Groups and Page tabs of the Upload/Download modulerepresent all of the configurable settings for the selected device. Simple entries can be

editing simply by clicking once and typing the new value. But some fields have morecomplicated settings, so these provide a special entry dialog box. To access these entrywindows, just double click the cell. There are three basic types of data that can be editedon these forms:

Simple Numeric Data

To enter a value in a number field, you can either double click on the cell or simply place thecursor in the cell and start typing. In either case, the number entry window will open,allowing you to type in an appropriate value:

Figure 52 – Number entry window

If the field allows a decimal, you can type it in directly. If it is an integer-only field, the dialogbox will not accept the decimal point. If you enter a value that is outside of the range for the




94

parameter, IQ Central will report the error as soon as you press OK. Pressing Cancel willretain the value that was stored in the parameter before you started editing it.

These general entry rules (error checking, OK, Cancel) are also true for the other two kindsof data entry.

Phase Input Fields that require you to choose one or more of the traffic phases for a particular parameterprovide a special phase entry dialog box, shown at right. You can either use the mouse tocheck or uncheck the desired boxes, or you can use the keyboard, as follows:

Figure 53 – Phase selection entry window

Table 21 – Keyboard shortcuts to edit phase parameters Key Function

1 Toggles the check box for Phase 1 on and off








9 Turns all the check boxes on

0 Turns all the check boxes off

Enumerated Values

This is used when there is a fixed list of optional values available for the cell. When a fieldcan only contain a predefined range of values, when you click on that field, a window willopen allowing you to select one of those predefined values. An example of this kind of dataentry is shown at right, in this case the type of permissive can only be one of three values:Yield, Single, or Multi. Highlight your selection and click OK to accept it. Or you can click theCancel button to retain the old value.




95

Figure 54 – Example of an Enumerated value selection window

Color Codes and Symbols in the Upload Download Module The Upload/Download module uses color coding, and icons on the page and group tabs, toindicate how data is synchronized between active memory, the central database , and thedevice . It is important to remember that IQ Central always knows the states of the centraldatabase and the active memory versions of the data, but it does not always know what isstored in the device in the field. The color coding assumes that the device version matchesthe database version, until you actually retrieve data from the device and the modulediscovers that it does not match.

Color Coding of Table Cells

When data is edited or displayed, the color of the data cell background will indicate the if thevalue matches the central database, and if it doesn't, what is the source of the difference:

a Yellow background (shown at right) indicates that the value in active memory matchesthe value stored in the IQ Central Database

Figure 55 – Yellow and green cell backgrounds in Upload/Download tables

a dark Green background (also shown at right) indicates that the value has been editedin active memory by the user, and it now differs from the value stored in the centraldatabase.




96

a Purple background (shown below) indicates that the value is different between activememory and the central database because it was retrieved from the device, and thevalue stored in the device doesn't currently match the central database.

Figure 56 – Purple cell background in the Upload/Download module

These cell background colors work with the difference icons that appear on the Group and

Page tabs of this window to indicate where data has been stored and how it is currentlysynchronized with the central database.

Tab Icons

When any value is different between active memory and the central database, an iconappears on the tabs containing the data. One of the 'difference icons' appears on both thePage tab and the Group tab containing the data. The icon that appears indicates whetherthe data is different in active memory, in the device, or in both places. The illustrations at thetop of this topic show examples of two of the three icons.

Table 22 – Upload/Download module 'Difference' icons

Icon Meaning

'Different in Active Memory' - The current value of one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from the central database

'Different in the Device' - The Device's value for one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from the central database

'Different in Both Places' - The values of one or more parameters in this page or group of data is different from both the central database AND the values stored in the device

Note A group tab that has two pages with different kinds of 'difference' iconsshowing will display the combined 'differing in both places' icon.




97

Getting Data From the Controller When working with the retrieval or transmission of data objects to and from the databaseand the controller, it's important to remember that, when you load a device in theUpload/Download window:

All of the tabs together are referred to as the entire database, or 'All'

Each top tab is referred to as a 'Group'

Each second tier tab is referred to as a 'Page'

Individual data objects are referred to as 'Selected Cell(s)'

If you want to retrieve the data that is actually stored in the controller , follow these steps:

1. Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download , or clicking on theUpload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).

2. Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish to

communicate with.3. If you want to retrieve the entire database from the controller, select All from the

Device Values pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.

4. If you want to retrieve a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the groupyou want to retrieve, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.

5. If you want to retrieve a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, andthen pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to retrieve.Select Page from the Device Values pull-down list.

Figure 57 – An example of choosing the scope of data to retrieve from the controller

6. If you want to retrieve single data objects, navigate to the group and page where thecells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a blockof cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.

7. Press the Get button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller,and request the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of thedata retrieval. When the retrieval is finished, the field values will be displayed in theUpload/Download table.




98

Sending Data to the Controller Sending data to the controller from IQ Central is very similar to retrieving data. Again, thesame interface elements represent data objects, pages of data, groups of pages, and thewhole database ('All'). If you want to send the data the data that is currently on-screen to acontroller, follow these steps:

1. Open the Controller Upload/Download module by either going to the Devices menu and opening Intersection > Upload/Download , or clicking on theUpload/Download button in the Intersection toolbar (shown at right).

2. Select the required Device Type and the particular Device that you wish tocommunicate with.

3. Set the values that you wish to send to the controller.

4. If you want to send the entire database to the controller, select All from the DeviceValues pull-down list in the lower left corner of the Upload/Download window.

5. If you want to send a whole group of data, select the top level tab for the group youwant to send, and choose Group from the Device Values pull-down list.

6. If you want to send a single page of data, select the top level tab of the group, andthen pick the particular second tier tab that shows the page you want to send. SelectPage from the Device Values pull-down list.

Figure 58 – An example of choosing the scope of data to send to the controller

7. If you want to send single data objects, navigate to the group and page where thecells are located. You can select individual data cells, click and drag to select a blockof cells, or click on a row or column header to select the whole line of cells.

8. Press the Send button. At this point, IQ Central will communicate with the controller,and transmit the data. The Upload/Download status bar will show the progress of thedata transmission. When the transmission is finished, the field values will bedisplayed in the Upload/Download table.

Interacting With the Central Database

The data for each controller that is connected to IQ Central will be stored in the IQ Centraldatabase . Previously, we showed how to send and retrieve data from a controller using thecontrols in the 'Device Values' area of the Upload/Download module. Sending and retrievingdata to the central database works very similarly, except it uses the controls in the DatabaseValues area at the bottom of the module.




99

Figure 59 – Controls in the Upload/Download module to interact with the IQ Central database

Just as with getting data from the controller and sending data to the controller, getting andsending data to the database involves selecting the scope of data to move, i.e. individualCells, a whole Page, a whole Group of pages, or the entire controller database ('All'). Onceyou've select the information to move, just press the Refresh button to pull data out from thecentral database, or press the Save button to store the data to the central database.

Copying Settings Between Controllers The ability to copy parameters and entire databases from one traffic controller to anotherwas added in IQ Central version 1.3. This is done using a new module , the Copy Device Data module, which can be launched in a couple of ways:

By clicking on the Copy button in the Controller Upload/Download module

Or by going to the Devices menu, opening the Intersections group, and selecting CopyDevices .

Figure 60 – Copy Device Data module

The Copy Device Data module allows one to copy all or part of a traffic controller (or master)database to another device of the same type. Although it will allow you to specify types otherthan controllers and masters, when you do so, you will be presented with a blank list ofoptions for copying. It's important to remember that this module is merely copying the dataentries inside the IQ Central database. You will need to send the new settings out to thedestination device after you have copied them here, for them to actually work on the newhardware.

The interface has the following parts:

Database component selection window – The left half of the module's window ispopulated by a representation of a device database. This area isn't filled in until youmake a selection in the Device Type selection list. If the type is one that cannot currently




100

be copied, no database listing will be provided. At the moment, the module only allowscopying between devices in the traffic controller category.

Device Type selection – Use this pull-down menu to select the type of device you willbe copying from and to. The copying function works only within a device type, meaningyou can only copy from one Traconex TMM-500 to another, or from one Peek 3000E toanother. But you cannot copy from a Traconex controller to a Peek controller, or from acontroller to a master.

Copy From/Copy To fields – These allow you to select which devices will serve as thesource of the configuration parameters, and which will serve as the destination.

Select All/Select None buttons – These buttons allow you to check all or remove allthe checks from the database component selection window list in the left half of themodule's window.

Copy button – Once the source and destination devices are selected, and you'veselected which parts of the database to copy using the Database component selection

window, press this Copy button to actually copy the data from one device to the other.Copy progress bar – As the data is copied from one device's database to the other,this progress bar shows how the copying process is proceeding. A complete databasecopy can take some time, depending on the size of the database, and the speed of thecomputer.

Close button – This shuts down the Copy Device Data module.




101

Central Override of Traffic Controllers and MastersIn the parlance of traffic controllers and masters, an 'override' is a command sent by acentral system software package that tells the device to exit from its normal operating modeand switch to the operation specified by the override command. This could be a changefrom the normal coordination pattern to a new pattern, the entry into a preemption sequence,

entry into intersection Flash mode, or any other central-software specified operationalchange.

Figure 61 – Central Override control window

With the release of IQ Central version 1.4, the capability was added for IQ Central to sendcentral override commands to traffic controllers and masters that have been configured toaccept such commands. This is done in IQ Central through the Map Viewer module . Usingthe Map View module, override commands to change to a new pattern, to free operation, to

Flash operation, or to resume Normal operation can be done for one controller , or a group ofcontrollers. When a central override command is requested for a device, IQ Centralpresents the window shown here, which allows the operator to specify which type ofoverride command to send to the field device. (This capability, naturally, assumes that thecommunications channel to this device is available and properly configured.)

Note If you decide to send a central override command that puts the intersectioninto Flash mode, IQ Central will ask you to verify your IQ Central login. Thisis a security feature, since going to Flash at the wrong time can be a safetyconcern. It also emphasizes the need for your IQ Central systemsadministrator to manage and maintain user accounts with traffic networksecurity in mind.




102



103

Chapter 5 – Camera ManagementIQ Central can manage, monitor and interactively control NTCIP cameras. Using its normaldevice and connection management tools, IQ Central can be used to configure andcommunicate with these traffic monitoring cameras. Once a camera is configured and

communicating with the central software, you can go further and set up a videocommunications channel , over which actual video from the device can be routed into IQCentral. The program also includes a couple of dedicated modules for working with NTCIPcameras, allowing a central operator to control focus, zoom, iris, pan, tilt and video detectionzones (for cameras that have those control available) using a graphical interface.

If you want to both control and see video from a camera, two communications channels willneed to be defined. The simple control channel is the same type of Connection channel asdefined for any other type of device in IQ Central. The channel for video from your camera,however, requires that you set up a special 'Video Connection', using the module of thesame name within IQ Central. Both steps are described below.




104

Creating a Camera-NTCIP DeviceCreating a camera device in IQ Central is basically just like creating any other type ofdevice, but we'll walk through the exact steps here for clarity.

1. First, we need to verify that the Camera-NTCIP device type is available in yourversion of IQ Central. Not all versions of IQ Central include the camera device type.Go to the Tools menu and open the Advanced Options submenu. From this area,select Device Types . This opens the Enter/Edit Device Type window.

2. Open the Device Type pull-down menu from the top of the Enter/Edit Device Typewindow. Verify that the device type 'Camera NTCIP ' appears in the list. If it does not,you will need to contact your Peek Traffic technical support representative to requestassistance in installing this device type.

3. Close the Enter/Edit Device Type window.

4. Open the Overview of Device Configuration window ( Devices menu > Add NewDevice... )

5. Double-click on a blank row to open a new device window.6. From the pull-down list at the top of the Device window, select New Device... (It

appears at the top of the list.)

7. In the Device Type field, select Camera NTCIP .

8. Select the Connection that will be used for the control channel for this camera. (Thevideo channel for the camera will be set up separately, later.) This Connections list ispopulated by channels that have already been defined in the Overview ofConnections module . That process was described previously, and can be read abouthere.

9. Give the camera a unique Device Name and Description. (Uniqueness is not

required by IQ Central, it's just a good idea.)10. Set the Device Address field or fields. The number of Address fields to fill out and

how to populate them depends on the type of device and the type of connection it isusing. These fields are important to the proper functioning and routing of SNMPmessages (of which, NTCIP is the type being used in IQ Central.) Read 'SettingDevice Addresses' for a detailed description of how to set these values.

11. Select the Save button.

12. Click on Close to exit from the Enter/Edit Devices screen.

13. Close the Overview of Device Configuration list.

Before the new device will appear in device lists throughout IQ Central, you will first need torestart the application.



Chapter 5 – Camera Management

105

Camera Control ModuleThis module is only useful if the system has devices installed with a Device Type of"Camera". Opening the Camera Control module allows the operator to change the settingsfor a camera. The controls within this module that may be used depend on the optionsavailable in the selected camera. Before you can make changes to settings, you will first

need to select a camera from the pull-down listing.Once a camera is selected, depending on its available features, you may be able toremotely adjust its zoom, focus, iris, tilt, and pan. And, no matter what the available featuresare for a particular camera, you can save those that are available as a preset configuration.




106



107

Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign ManagementIQ Central includes a set of modules specifically designed to allow a central technician tomanage variable message signs in the field. Message signs can be configured as devicesand placed on maps just like any other device in IQ Central, but the following modules let

the operator interact directly with these kinds of devices. This allows IQ Central to be usedto upload and download font sets, define and select sign messages, configure messageschedules, set up on-board error logging and log retrieval, as well as more advancedfeatures like automatic incident management.




108

Controls to Manage Traffic SignsTraffic sign management can be performed either from the Message Sign toolbar (individualbuttons from that toolbar are shown in the table below), or by going to the Devices menu,choosing Message Signs, and choosing the desired module to open.

Table 23 – Toolbar buttons used to perform traffic sign management Button Opens module... Description

Control module This is the interface used to directly view or set the message that appears on asingle message sign.

Summary module This module allows one to send and receive multiple data objects (such as timesettings, diagnostics commands, sign status, error log setup) for a singleselected message sign.

Bulk Operations module This module can be used to perform bulk data transfers (such as all messagesor all fonts) to and from a message sign.

Brightness Control module As the name suggests, this interface is used to change the brightness of themessage on a message sign, or to view the status of a photo sensor, for signswith those capabilities.

Edit Master Fonts module This is used to retrieve, send, or edit the individual characters of a sign's fontfiles.

Edit Schedules The Sign Scheduler module allows for the set-up of a kind of 'Time of Day'operation for message signs. This module can be used to set up pre-timedmessage change events, day plans, and weekly and annual schedules.

Error Logs This module is used to configure what sign status data to monitor for error conditions, when to log errors, and also provides an interface to retrieve andclear event logs.

SNMP Device Security Allows SNMP security settings to be configured for a message sign device.(Note: The menu command for this is at Devices > SNMP Device Security.)



Chapter 6 – Traffic Sign Management

109

Sign Control ModuleThe Sign Control form is used to interact with all the signs that you have connected . Thecurrent data for that sign will be displayed in the fields. All the available pre-programmedand changeable messages will be displayed. If you want to display all the pre-programmedmessages, make sure that Message Type pre-programmed is selected. If you want to view

the changeable messages, make sure that Message Type changeable is selected.Both the Changeable Messages and Preprogrammed messages are stored on the signcontroller . IQ Central allows you to display the pre-programmed messages on the sign fromyour computer, but you cannot edit the pre-programmed messages in any way. TheChangeable messages are also stored on the sign controller. Using IQ Central, you cancheck the contents of these messages (by using the Get selected Message from Signbutton). You can also change these messages and download them to the sign for future orcurrent displaying on the sign.

The Connect\Disconnect (red/green) button will display Connect (red) if you are notconnected to the sign and Disconnect (green) if you are connected to the sign. If the buttonis green, a connection has already been established. If the button is red, establish a

connection by selecting the required device and clicking on the red button.

To Send a Changeable Message to the Sign If you want to send a changeable message to a sign, you should first select the device byclicking on the drop down list box and highlighting the required sign. Then, selectChangeable Message type by clicking on the Changeable radio button.

All the available Changeable Messages for that Device will be displayed in the messagewindow. Highlight the one that you want to send to the sign. The message itself and its display information - Duration and Priority will display in the field below the message list.

Now that you have the message selected, you can choose from the range of Message

Commands that are available. To send the message to the sign (and not display it) clickSend Only. To send the message to the sign and display it, click on Send and Display.

Note about the Display Message on Sign

You should be cautious when using this option. The message number that you havehighlighted in the Device Messages list will be the message that is displayed on the sign.This may not be the same message on the sign – in other words, the text of the messagethat you see in IQ Central may not be the same as the text of the message that is loaded onthe sign controller. To avoid this happening, highlight the number of the message that youwant to display on the sign. Click on the Retrieve Selected Msg button. The text of thatmessage as it is loaded on the sign controller will then be displayed on IQ Central. If the textis OK, click on the Display Only button and that message will be displayed. If the text of the

message is incorrect, you can edit that message (by clicking the Edit Message button), andthen click the Send and Display button. Alternatively, you may want to select anothermessage and check if the content of that message is correct and then display that message.

Add a New Message If you want to add a new message, position the cursor on an “empty” line in the message listand then click on the New Message button. The Edit Message window will open, allowingyou to create your new message.




110

When you have finished creating your message click on Close. The message will bedisplayed in the Message List and the MULTI Msg window. Click on the Save button to savethe message to the database and Send Only if you want to send the message to the sign. Ifyou want to send and display the message on the sign, click on the Send And Displaybutton.

Edit an Existing Message If you want to edit a message that already exists, highlight that message in the DeviceMessages list and click on the Preview Button. This will open the Sign Message Edit windowso that you can make the required changes. Remember to send the message to the signand save it in the database.

Sign Message Edit Screen The Message Editor allows you to create new messages of varying types or configurationsas well as edit existing messages. This application gives you the flexibility of sending whatyou want to your sign, along with how you want the message displayed.

To open the message editor, open the Sign Control Module , select a sign type Device ,highlight one of the messages in the message list, and press the Edit Message button. Thiswill open the basic Sign Message Edit window, as shown here. Click on the image below tosee details about this interface.

Figure 62 – Sign Message Edit screen

Sign Message Editor - Advanced Screen Clicking the Advanced button in the basic Sign Message Edit screen will open a screen ofadvanced message options. This interface allows an operator to insert advanced tags intothe MULTI string that control how the pages will appear and how they will be displayed. Thetags that can be inserted from the Advanced screen are:

New Line (nl)

New Page (np)

Line Justification (jlx)

Page Justification (jpx)

Flash On/Off and Time (fltxoy and /fl)

Page On/Off and Time (ptxoy)




111

Click on the sample screen shown below to see more details about each control.

Figure 63 – Advanced Sign Message Edit screen

Moving Text Editing Screen This option allows you to insert various types of moving text into your MULTI Msg input box.It is available only on the Advanced screen of the Sign Message Editor. An example of theMoving Text editing screen is shown here. Click on the sample screen to see more detailsabout the controls.

Figure 64 – Moving Text Editing screen

Displaying a Message Page with Preset Times If you want the page to be displayed for a specific length of time (other than the default time), enter therequired values in tenths of a second, in the Page On and Page Off fields. Then click on the Timer button andthe new page tag will be inserted with the specified page on and page off times. Then type in the text for thenew page.




112

Displaying a Message Page for the Default Time

The default time for Page On and Page Off is specified on the Message Defaults tab locatedunder Maintenance, in the Sign Summary module. If you want the page to display usingthese defaults, you need only click the New Page button and then type the text for the newpage in the MULTI Msg window.




113

Overview of the Sign Summary ModuleThe Sign Summary module contains several tabs that provide information about thecurrently selected message sign. This is also the place where system defaults are set formessage signs.

A connection must be established to the sign before data can be sent to or retrieved from asign. To connect to the sign, select the required sign from the Device : list and click on theConnect button (just to the right of the Device list.) If the button is green, IQ Central isalready connected to the sign.

To display information about the sign, select the Tab that contains the required information,and click on the Refresh button on that tab. Note that each tab has its own Refresh buttonand each time the Device is changed or another tab is selected, the refresh button must beclicked to retrieve data.

The following tabs are available in the Sign Summary module:

Sign Configuration

Sign StatusTime

Message Defaults

Manual Poll

Sign Information

Pixels

Diagnostics

Note If you just want to run one or more quick diagnostic checks on the messagesign, use the Diagnostic Tests tab of the Bulk Operations module.

Sign Configuration The Sign Configuration module contains details of the physical attributes of the sign. Thefollowing information can be obtained by clicking on the refresh button one the device hasbeen selected and a connection has been established.

Sign Status The Sign Status tab of the Sign Summary module provides details of the current status of

the sign as far as temperature, door status, fan status and electrical information isconcerned. This information can be retrieved from the sign by clicking on the Refresh buttononce a connection has been established with the sign.

The following information is available on this tab:

Time

This represents the number of seconds that should be used when periodic mode isselected.




114

Message Defaults

The Message Defaults Tab contains details of the default messages that are to be used bythe sign under certain specific conditions. In addition, it contains the defaults that the systemis to use when creating a new message.

If you want to view the defaults that are currently in use by the sign, select the sign from the

drop-down Device list box. Then click on the Refresh button, and the values that arecurrently in use by the sign will be returned. If you make any changes to these defaults, youshould save them to the database (click Save) as well as send them to the sign (UpdateSign).

Manual Polling

This is a utility that will poll the selected device and display the retrieved information. Theinformation that is displayed can be edited by the user. These values are defined using theConfigure Logs option in Maps.

Sign Information

This returns details about the Make, Model and Software Versions of the Device .

Pixels Tab

This tab in the Sign Summary module is to allow for a more detailed analysis of the pixeloperation of the selected message sign. Although the group test for Pixel operation in theBulk Operations module does provide an overall health assessment for pixel operations, thistab allows for a much finer diagnostic of pixel operation.

Diagnostics Tab in the Sign Summary module

Although several of the tabs in the Sign Summary module can have diagnostic functions, theDiagnostics tab is particularly designed to allow for interactive analysis of the operation of a

message sign. After selecting a Device from the list at the top of the window and pressingRefresh , the operator can make changes to the white fields in this window and use thevalues in the grayed (read-only) fields to understand how the sign is operating.

Control Mode - This field indicates what equipment is driving the message sign. Do notchange this value unless you are fully aware of the implications of that change. Theavailable Control modes are: Other, Local, External, Central, Central Override, Simulation.

SW Reset - This control can be used to send a controller reset command to the sign. Toreset the sign, change the value to Reset. Once the sign's controller has been reset, thisfield will change back to No Reset.

Message Table Source - This field indicates the message number that is used to generatethe currently displayed message. This is a read-only field that cannot be edited.

Message Requestor - This read-only field stores a copy of the value in the ActivateMessage field. If the current message was not activated, then this field will display a value of0.

Memory Management - This field can be used to manage the sign's onboard memory.'Other' is used on a by-sign basis. 'Normal' is the normal operating mode for memory. 'ClearChangeable Messages' tells the sign to delete this part of memory. 'Clear VolatileMessages' can be used to delete this part of memory.




115

Activate Message Error - An Activate Message is a code that tells the sign which messageto display. This value is set when a message is sent to the sign for display. If a problemoccurs when the sign attempts to activate the selected message, an error occurs and themessage is not displayed. When this happens, an error is reported in this field.

Short Error Status - This indicates a summary of all of the errors that currently exist for this

sign. It is a read-only field, some details about these error codes are listed below.Controller Error - The value in this field indicates the particular type of error that hasoccurred with the sign's controller. This is a read-only field and the valid values are: Othercontroller error, PROM error, Program/processor error, or RAM error. Details about whatthese errors mean require consulting your sign's controller documentation.

Syntax Error - This error code identifies the first detected syntax error within a MULTImessage. It is a read-only field and the valid values are: Other, None, Unsupported tag,Unsupported tag value, Text too big, Font not defined, Character not defined, Field devicedoes not exist, Field device error, Flash region error, Tag conflict, and Too many pages.

Syntax Error Position - This indicates the offset from the first character of the MULTImessage where the syntax error has occurred.

Other Error Description - This indicates any IQ Central specific error messages.

Note For a quick overall assessment of the sign's systems, try using theautomatic Diagnostic Tests that are part of the Bulk Operations module.




116

Bulk Operations ModuleThis Tab contains utilities that will allow you to perform bulk downloads to and from amessage sign.

To retrieve the information from the sign, check the check boxes for the information that youwish to retrieve and then click on the Refresh button. Then Save that information to thedatabase by clicking on the Save button. To update the sign controller with the information,click on the Update Sign button.

If you select a sign and then click Update Sign, the information that is currently stored in thedatabase will be sent to the sign.

It is recommend that as part of the regular housekeeping of your signs that you ensure thatthe information on the signs and the information in your database is synchronized on aregular basis. To do this, select a sign and then click on the Refresh button. This will causeall the information (as indicated by the check boxes selected) to be uploaded from the signso that you can then click on Save to update the database.

To update a sign with information that is stored on the database, check the applicable checkboxes and then click on the Update Sign button.

Diagnostic Topics The Diagnostic Tests tab, located within the Bulk Operations module , allows you to do aquick check of all the subsystems on a message sign. Check the box next to each test thatyou wish to perform and then click the Run Diagnostics button. A Green check mark will bedisplayed if the test was successful and a red X will be displayed if the test failed.

If a test fails, you can run more detailed diagnostics (or simply see more details) using theSign Summary module:

Table 24 – Diagnostic Tests available for Message Signs

Diagnostic Test Location for Further DetailsPixels Sign Summary/ Pixels

Fans Sign Summary/Sign Status

Door Status Sign Summary/Sign Status

Temperature Sign Summary/Sign Status

Line Volts Sign Summary/Sign Status

Controller Error Sign Summary/Diagnostics

Power Supplies Sign Summary/Sign Status

More detailed and more targeted diagnostics tools for message signs are located in theSign Summary module.




117

Brightness Control ModuleIf you are controlling the brightness of the sign manually, you can set the desired level of thebrightness here. Enter the required level and then Send to the Sign.

Master Fonts ModuleThe Master Fonts Module is also known as the Font Editor. Whatever it is called, thismodule allows a user to view and edit the fonts that are used by message signs connected to IQ Central. The following topics describe how to access the Font Editor and how to usethe interface.

Using the Font Editor Interface The Font Editor allows a user to edit the fonts and special characters that are used in yourtraffic message signs.

Figure 65 – Font View screen

See the following topics on the parts of the Font Editor window to see more informationabout each piece of the interface.

Editing a Font To edit any selected font, manipulate the pixels into their desired format by clicking on themin the display box in the left hand side of the form. This allows you to customize anycharacter in any set of fonts.




118

Schedules ModuleIQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs thatis completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedulescontain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at aparticular time and/or a particular day or selection of days.

See Day Plans and Schedules for more information.

When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before theywill run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember thateach and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed.Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules.To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recoverthe schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule.Repeat this for each available Schedule number.

Opening the Message Sign Schedules window These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the MessageSigns > Edit Schedules control.

Day Plans and Schedules This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times onselected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example.We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:

1. You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect tothe sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices listand click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.

2. Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and ChangeableMessage 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want ChangeableMessage 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday)every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to aspecific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configureSchedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Mondaythrough Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked)every day of the month (all days checked).

3. Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.

4. Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured,but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.

5. Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linkedto the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.

6. Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Planevent is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to haveHour = 6 and Minute = 0.

7. We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. IndicateDay Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to displayChangeable Message 1.




119

8. Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign(click Update Sign.)

9. Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action1 to display Changeable Message 1.

10. It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify herebefore you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, selectthe sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1).Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.

Note Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when thatmessage is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculatedvalue that indicates the current version of the message. When youspecify a message for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for thatmessage from the sign. That CRC number is then stored togetherwith the message number in the database and on the sign. If, whenthe schedule runs, the message that is specified in the schedule hasa CRC that is different than the one that was saved at the time the

schedule was created, the message will not be displayed and theaction will be ignored. This eliminates the probability that anotheroperator could change a message that is allocated to a schedule,causing an incorrect message to be displayed.

11. Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and UpdateSign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so thatthe current version of that message is allocated to the action.

12. We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displayingchangeable message 2 at 6pm.

13. Select the Day Plan tab.

14. Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is18h00.

15. Save to the database and update the sign again.

16. Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activateChangeable Message 2.

17. Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 beforeadding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.

18. Save the information to the database and update the sign again.Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned,remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No otheraction has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not haveto do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.






121

View Recorded Events This allows you to view the contents of the message sign's Log File. You can select to view

just those events for a specific Event Group. You also have the option, within the selectedEvent Group, to see only events within a certain date range.

The bottom of this screen also has two check-boxes that can be used to clear out some ofthe events in this sign's event log, although you'll have more detailed controls over event logclearing if you use the Clear Event Log tab of the Error Logging module.




122

SNMP Device Security ModuleUsing this feature without fully understanding the consequences of the changes you makecould result in communication with any or all of your Devices being permanently disabled.To understand a little bit about the device-level security that is provided as part of the SNMPprotocol, we've described how it operates in a separate topic. This device-level security is

managed in IQ Central using the Device Security module , also known as the SNMP DeviceSecurity module.

Note In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Securitymodule only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message signdevices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is notimplemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of theother device types within IQ Central.

Opening the Device Security Module There are a couple of ways to launch the SNMP Device Security Module:

• Use the SNMP Device Security module icon, which is located in the Message Sign toolbar:

• Or you can open the Devices menu and choose SNMP Device Security .

To see how the Device Security interface works, check out this Example Screen.

Device-Level Security SNMP communications, the basis for the NTCIP protocol, provides for a password to becreated to control who has access to Devices. This password is referred to as theCommunity Name. The default Community name is public. The “public” Community Namecan only be changed using a “Super Password”. The default “Super Password” isadministrator.

Note In IQ Central versions up to and including version 1.4, the Device Securitymodule only supports SNMP Device Security settings for message signdevices. At present, the editing of SNMP Device Security settings is notimplemented for traffic controllers, cameras, weather stations, or any of theother device types within IQ Central. And the rules listed here for the operationof device-level security are currently only in force for message signs.

All of your Devices must use the same Community Name. If you change it for one Device ,you must change it for all Devices, and any new Devices that are connected must also beupdated to this Community Name as soon as they are connected. This is not an insignificantchallenge and we recommend that you do not make any changes to either the UserCommunity Name (Password) or the Administrator Community name (Super Password)unless you are absolutely sure of what you are doing, and the advantages of restrictingunauthorized access to your Devices far outweigh the disadvantages of ensuring that thechanges to Community Names are administered correctly.

Effectively, if a transaction is sent to a Device with the incorrect Community Name, thetransaction is “silently discarded”. The Device appears to be broken and the transaction isignored. No error message is returned advising you of this action.



123

Chapter 7 - Incident Management ModuleIncident Management is a tool that allows you to automate processes that are predefined,depending on data that is received from external sources. At preset intervals, IQ Central willpoll the Devices, retrieve specified data, and use that data in calculations to determine the

action (if any) that should be triggered. Incident Management uses Excel as the calculationengine. A standard Excel spreadsheet template is provided and this forms the basis for allthe calculations that are performed by the Incident Management feature.

The spreadsheet consists of three sheets. The first sheet contains the input that is to beused to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet is passed to thesecond sheet which manipulates the data and thus determines if any action needs to betaken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the third sheet which then triggersthe required output, depending on the outcome from the second sheet.




124

Configuring the Incident SpreadsheetsSome functionality of the Incident Management module is controlled using Excelspreadsheets. These spreadsheets are stored in a single Excel file in the IQ Centraldirectory where you installed the system. It's called 'Incident Management Template.xls'.The file consists of three separate sheets. The first sheet ('Input Objects') contains the input

that is to be used to determine if any action needs to be taken. The data from this sheet ispassed to the second sheet ('Calculations') which manipulates the data and thus determinesif any action needs to be taken. The results of the data manipulation are passed to the thirdsheet (Output Actions') which then triggers the required output, depending on the outcomefrom the second sheet.

To select the input for the first sheet of the spreadsheet:

1. Click on the Configure Spreadsheet button.

2. Select the Device Type from the list. All the Devices of that Type that are configuredin IQ Central will be listed, as well as the available Log Table objects. Note that theobjects that are displayed for selection here are the only objects that can be used asdata for the calculations in the Incident Management module.

3. The available Log table Objects are those objects that are included in the LogConfiguration for each Device. The Log is configured in Maps, and the maps Logdetermines which objects will be retrieved from a Device when it is polled.

Note: If the Device(s) that you are intending to use as the source of data for yourIncident Management calculations is not one of the Devices on your Map and doesnot have a Log Configured, no objects will be available to you for selection when youconfigure the spreadsheet in Incident Management.

4. Click the checkboxes next to the Devices that are to be used in the Spreadsheet.Once the Devices have been checked, the list of Available Log Table Columns willbe un-grayed and you will be able to select them for your spreadsheet.

5. Highlight the required object and then click on the double right arrow to move theselected object for each of the selected Devices to the Spreadsheet ColumnSelection window.

6. Once you have made all the required selections, click on the Update ExcelSpreadsheet button.

Note: Until you Retrieve the values for the spreadsheet, the Log Date Time, the OID Value, and Status fields will remain empty.

The Calculation spreadsheet will use the data that it retrieved into Sheet 1 (Input Objects)and will then perform calculations to determine what action should be taken. Thecalculations are performed using standard Excel formulas and macros. Calculations will betriggered by a change in the Input values in sheet 1 (Input Objects) when the Devices arepolled. If there is no change to the input data, no calculations are performed and no outputactions are triggered. If there are changes in the data retrieved, the calculation is triggeredand output Actions are triggered.

When it has completed its calculations, specific cells will be marked and the program willuse these cells to determine if any action is to be taken. If some action is to be taken, thataction will be performed by Sheet 3 (Output Actions).



125

Defining Actions There are a range of actions that can be triggered by Incident management.

1. To define Actions, select the 3rd Sheet (Output Actions) and double click on anempty line – preferably the first empty line, in the Action Column. Select from one ofthe following Actions:

Activate Message -- This will activate the message specified in Message on thespecified Device, using the Duration and Priority settings indicated here.

Download and Activate Message -- This will download the message generatedby Sheet 2 (Calculations), on the Device specified by the Output Actions using theDuration and Priority settings specified on the Output Actions sheet.

Trigger Scenario -- This will trigger the Scenario selected in the Scenario andSOPs field. If there is a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached to theScenario, that SOP will also be included in the activation.

Trigger Scenario SOP -- Only the selected Standard Operating procedure will betriggered and not the Scenario to which it is attached.

Trigger Camera Preset -- This will trigger the camera presets indicated in theCamera Preset field.

2. Each row of the Output Action sheet will contain one action that is to be triggered. Ifyou want to trigger a message that should be displayed on multiple Devices, youwould create a scenario that would cater for that and then trigger that Scenario inIncident Management.

3. The Status cell for each action is the indicator that Incident Management uses totrigger each Action. If the status is Active, the Output Action specified in that row willbe activated.

4. Close Excel and Save the spreadsheet.




126






128

Activating an Amber AlertFollow these steps to activate an Amber Alert:

1. Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree to display all the available Scenariosand Amber Alerts.

2. The pre-prepared messages and the signs on which the messages should bedisplayed can easily be seen when the “tree” is expanded.

3. It is advised that you Verify the Amber Alert before actually activating it. This step willwalk through the Amber Alert without actually activating it, verifying that the signs areconnected and then retrieving the selected message so that it can be verified that thecorrect message will be displayed when the Amber Alert is activated.

4. To activate an amber alert, highlight the required Amber Alert, and click on theActivate button. Full details of the procedure that is activated will be displayed in theActivity Log.

5. When the Amber Alert has to be stopped or cancelled, the devices can be reset

using a Blank Signs scenario (if one has been created for you). In this case, selectthe required group of signs and activate the blank scenario. If there is no scenario toblank the signs, blank the signs using the Sign Control module.



Chapter 8 – Crisis Management in IQ Central

129

Displaying a ScenarioTo display a Scenario, follow these steps:

1. First, open the Scenarios and Amber Alerts module .

2. Expand the Scenario tree until the Scenario that you want to activate is displayed in the tree.

3. Highlight that Scenario and click on the Verify button. This will run through the Scenario as if it wasbeing displayed, checking that the devices are available and that the messages that have beenallocated to display are still the same on the sign controller .

4. The results of this verification will display in the Activity window. If you are satisfied with the results,click on the Activate button to activate the Scenario.

5. The Message will display for the duration indicated. If it has been set to run forever, the messagewill be displayed until you display another message, or blank the signs. Blanking manually can beachieved by individually accessing each sign and either displaying a different message or blankingthe sign. Or you can create a new Scenario to display another message or blank all the signs usedin the previous scenario. If the message in the scenario has a number of minutes duration, whenthat number of minutes is reached, the End Duration message specified for that device will bedisplayed.

Creating a Scenario A scenario is a pre-defined message that is sent to a specified group of devices (or a set ofcamera positions sent to a group of cameras if the camera module is installed) when acertain event occurs. An Administrator creates scenarios, so that a user can implement theprepared procedure. This ensures that the correct information is displayed on the devices atthe correct time.

Creating a Scenario

1. Expand the Scenarios and Amber Alerts tree and highlight SCENARIOS.2. Right click the mouse and select New and then select Scenario Group. A new

directory will be added to the tree.

3. Rename the directory to meaningfully indicate the contents of that group ofscenarios.

4. Once this is done, highlight that directory and then right click the mouse. Select New,and then choose Scenario Sign Group.

5. Enter a specific name for this Scenario, as well as a description of the Sign Group.

6. Indicate the Activation priority for the Scenario message. In addition, indicate if the

message that is sent is to override the priority of the message this is being displayedon the Device when the Scenario is activated, and if the CRC check for the messageshould be ignored.

7. Click Save to update the scenario tree with the Sign Group.

8. To define which signs and which message on the sign will be activated, right-click onthe Sign Group.

9. Select New and then Device.




130

10. Select the Device that is to be added to the Sign Group and select the actualmessage that should be displayed.

11. Repeat these last couple of steps until all of the signs (and messages) that you wishto appear in the scenario are included.

Note: If the message that you wish to display does not appear in the DeviceMessages list, you will need to add a message to the device using the Sign MessageEdit function which is available in the Sign Control module .

Standard Operating Procedure Each Scenario that is added may have a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) attached toit. This procedure will provide instructions to the Operator, detailing the steps have to befollowed in the event of the Scenario occurring. This standardizes the response to scenariosand ensures that all the necessary steps are taken and all the necessary people have beenadvised of the situation.

To set up a Standard Operating procedure for a Scenario, highlight the Sign Group for

which the SOP is to be created. Right click the mouse and select New and then StandardOperating Procedure.

The following parameters define an SOP:

Title

Name

Description

Contact Name

Mode

Notify

Path in Scenarios

Phone

Priority






132

provide a continuous level of zooming and panning capability, but with the same four levelsof device details overlaid on the map images. Once you zoom down in a GIS map so thatyou have reached a new device detail level, that level of detail for that type of device isdisplayed over the map image.

Note Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. Whenyou purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representativewill need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mappingdata into IQ Central.




133

Getting Started With MapsWhen IQ Central is first installed, the mapping function is installed, but it needs to beconfigured before you can use it. The steps required to get mapping up and running on anew system are:

1. Save map data files onto your system.

2. Verify proper map file paths in the IQ Central database

3. ( GIS systems only) Define Layer Groups

4. (GIS systems only) Configure Layers

5. (GIS systems only) Set zoom settings by device type

6. Define views

7. Pick a default view for the Map View module

8. Open the Map View module

9. Place device icons on the map view, as desiredWhen you complete these steps, the map system of IQ Central is up and running and readyfor use.






135

Table 25 – Default Layer Values Parameter Default value to enter

LayerGroupID 1

LayerLoadOrder 1

SymbolType 2

Style 0

SymbolSize 1

ColorRed 1

ColorGreen 1

ColorBlue 1

OutlineColorRed 1

OutlineColorGreen 1

OutlineColorBlue 1

WidthShapeFrom 0

WidthShapeTo 5

WidthNamesFrom 0

WidthNamesTo 5

FieldName NAME

AllowDuplicates 0

FontName Arial

FontBold 0

FontItalic 0

FontSize 8

UseDefault 0MaskLabels 0

DataPath (You've already set this one)

PlaceOn 1

PlaceBelow 0

PlaceAbove 1

LabelPosition 0

FontColorRed 0

FontColorGreen 0

FontColorBlue 0

12. Repeat the above values for each layer in the table.

13. Close the table

14. Close Microsoft Access.

15. Open IQ Central using an account with Administration privileges.

16. Open the Layer Editor by opening the Maps menu and choosing GIS Layers.




136

Use the Layers window to edit the layer values to the settings you need. Use the MapManager to verify the appearance of your Layer settings.

Setting Up Map Polling for Intersection IconsOnce you have configured the icons and linked data of an intersection display, you willneed to perform the next step, which is to set up map polling for these data objects. Mappolling is the repeated, automatic request for the desired data across the device 'scommunications channel . This polling allows IQ Central to show the current state of thelinked data objects as graphic icons, when the intersection is viewed in the Map Viewmodule . The configuration of map polling can be done manually, using the Realtime MapPolling module. Or you can let IQ Central help you set up map polling for the specific iconsyou've set up in your display, by choosing the Auto Populate Polling tool.




137

Overview of Map ManagementMaps must be configured for use before they will appear as you want them to in the MapView portion of IQ Central. To configure the map system, you will need to use the MapManagement module . However, the way that maps are configured is highly dependent uponwhether you are using the basic BMP version of IQ Central or the GIS-mapping enabled

version. In both cases, after the map files have been successfully stored on your IQ Centralcomputer, the primary tool to configure how maps operate is the Map Management module.

Opening the Map Management module

Press the Map Management icon:

OR

Go to the Maps menu and choose Map Management

OR

Press Alt-m , then the letter ' m ' again

Storing Map Data Before the various map modules can be opened or utilized, you will need to load some mapdata onto your IQ Central system. This is especially true if you are using the GIS version ofIQ Central, since launching any of the IQ Central map modules without any data loaded willresult in error messages.

Loading BMP Map Data BMP map data is much more simple than GIS data, usually consisting of nothing more than

a couple of bitmap image files. Because of this, and the way that IQ Central handles BMPmap management, you do not need to preload map data files before you use the BMPversion's map modules. Instead, you just need to save the images you want to usesomewhere on your system or network, then point to these image files from within IQCentral's Map Management module . If you want to make it easier for yourself, you can juststore the bitmap files you plan to use in IQ Central's MapFiles folder:

<User-Selected Install Location >\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\

By default, IQ Central installs with a blank default bitmap file called blankdefault.bmp, storedin the above folder. Again, if you installed IQ Central to the default location, the directory is:C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\

Loading GIS Map Data To load GIS data to your IQ Central system, save all of the ESRI GIS data files to thefollowing location:

<User-Selected Install Location >\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\

As installed, the GISData folder will not exist in the MapFiles location. You will need tocreate it first, and then copy the GIS data into that folder.

The default location for this data (if the installer chose the default installation directory) is:




138

C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\GISData\

If the user installed IQ Central elsewhere, the installation directory for GIS map data will be<User-Selected Install Location> \Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\MapFiles\ .

Managing BMP Maps

The standard version of IQ Central has the capability of monitoring objects that have beenplaced against a bit-mapped background image, such as a map or satellite photo. Unlike theGIS-mapping-capable IQ Central, which uses a single, dynamic map environment, thestandard version uses BMP maps, which are discrete image files. These BMP map imagesare linked to the program using the Map Management module , and can then be linked toone another via user-defined zoom areas within the images. In the standard version of IQCentral, the Map Management module is used to add, edit, delete, and set the zoom areasfor these BMP map image files. The Place Device on Map module then allows you to placedevices in a set location on one or more of the map images. Finally, the Map View moduleallows you to see the bitmapped images, navigate between them using their zoom areas,and shows the status of 'placed' devices against the map background images.

Figure 67 – Example BMP map file displayed in the Map Management module

The following topics describe each of the functions that can be performed to manage anduse maps in the BMP version of IQ Central.

Adding a New BMP Map To add a new BMP map or maps, you must first have stored the bitmap (*.bmp) file or files of those mapssomewhere that can be accessed from this computer. If the map or maps are to be accessible from multiplenetworked work stations, make sure the file location is a network drive so that the file path is the same fromall workstations. Then follow these steps to add the map to IQ Central:




139

1. Go to the Maps menu and select Map Management.

2. When the module opens, select the Add a New Map button.

3. Enter the Name of the map as you want it to be described on the pull-down 'Maps'lists in the Map Viewer and Map Management modules.

4. Enter a Description of the map. This description is displayed when the map isopened. It can contain pertinent information about the map itself as well as thedevices that are located in that map area, or any other details you would like to add.

5. You can either type in the name and full path of the map file, or you can click onBrowse to navigate to the location where you stored the bitmap file. Highlight the.bmp file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its complete path will be stored in the IQ Central database .

If you enter the path and file name manually, you can click on the Test Map button to“test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 above for each bitmap file you wish to add to IQ Central.

When you are finished adding all of your bitmapped file images to the Map Managementmodule, you may wish to add navigation features by creating zoom links between the mapimages. To do this, refer to the topic called 'Adding Zoom Areas to BMP Maps'.

Editing an Existing Map

There are two meaning for 'editing a map' that may potentially cause some confusion. In IQCentral, editing a map means changing the link to the external map file or editing the zoomareas associated with that image. On the other hand, editing the actual image itself can bedone, but it must be done using an external image editing software package, such asMicrosoft ® Paint, Corel ® Paint Shop Pro ® , Adobe ® Photoshop ® , or any similar program. Anychanges made to the actual image file that is currently linked to IQ Central will appear in IQ

Central's Map View and Map Management modules the next time that map is viewed.To edit the link to a map file in the BMP version of IQ Central, follow these steps:

1. If not opened yet, launch the Map Management module by going to the Maps menu and choosing Map Management , or by clicking on the MapManagement icon in the toolbar. (Shown at right.)

2. Go to the Maps pull-down list and select the map for which information is to bechanged.

3. Make the desired changes to the map information, such as the map's name,description, or the path to the file.

Note: This is the point where you would also make changes to zoom areas. Fordetails about changing or editing Zoom Areas of a BMP map, refer to this topic .

4. When you've made all of the desired changes, click the Update button, which will beenabled as soon as any change is made to the current settings.

Deleting a Map

To delete a map from IQ Central when you are using BMP maps, follow these steps:






141

Figure 68 – Placing a zoom area

5. After you click on the map, the zoom area indicator will switch to a blue indicatorshowing the center of the zoom area, along with four corner indicators. (Shownbelow.) Position the zone and the corners by clicking and dragging on any of them.

Figure 69 – Using the zone corner handles to resize the zoom area

Try to shape the zone so that it is approximately the same area that appears in themap that will function as the destination of this link.

6. In the Zoom Area control, type in a name for this zone.

7. In the Zoom to drop down box, select the other map that will function as thedestination of this hyperlink.

8. When you are satisfied with the location of the zoom area, as well as its name andlinked map, press the Save button in the Zoom Area box.




142

This will store the settings to the IQ Central database . The zoom area icon will turngreen to indicate that it has been saved and is now active when this map is openedin the Map Viewer (as shown here.)

Figure 70 – Green zoom area icon indicating that the zone has been saved 9. Verify that the new Zoom Area appears in the pull-down list of the Zoom Areas

control.

10. Repeat the above steps to create more zoom areas on the same map. Note thatwhile you are creating additional zoom areas, you will not be able to see whereexisting zones have been set up. It's best to select adjacent areas beforeconfiguring the new zoom area, so you know approximately where the edges of the

new zone should sit.

Modifying an existing zoom area

Follow these steps to modify the name, link or area settings of a Zoom Area in the BMPversion of IQ Central Map Manager. If you are going to link to a new map, make sure themap is already configured in the Map Manager before performing the following steps.

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module.

2. Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window andchoose the map for which you want to edit a zoom area.

3. In the Zoom Areas box, select the zoom area to be edited from the drop-down list.The zoom area center and corner indicators will appear on the map.

4. If you want to change the position or shape of the zone, click and drag the zoomarea indicators on the map.

5. If you want to rename the map, type in a new name in the Zoom Areas box.

6. If you want to change the hyperlink target of the zoom area, select a different map inthe Zoom to drop down list.

7. When you have finished making changes to the zoom area settings, press the Savebutton to store the changes in the IQ Central database.




143

Deleting a zoom area

Follow these steps to remove a map zoom area from a BMP map.

1. If not already open, open the Map Management module.

2. Go to the Maps drop down list at the upper left corner of the module's window andchoose the map for which you want to delete a zoom area. The center indicator ofthe selected zoom area will appear.

3. Press the Remove button to delete the zoom area.

Using the Map Management Module With GIS Maps For a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the Map Management Module is used to view theinstalled shape file data, activate and deactivate layers of information, and create and deletepre-configured 'map views'. These map views are then available for use in the Map Viewmodule.

Figure 71 – Map Management module (GIS version)

The way that the layers of GIS data appear within the Map Management module is actuallydefined elsewhere, in the Layers module. The best way to first get GIS shape files up andrunning on your system is to open the three modules at the same time: Map Management,GIS Layers, and GIS Layer Groups. Then make changes in the GIS Layer Groups and GISLayers modules, save the changes, and then see how the maps look in the MapManagement module.

The Layers module will be populated based on what shape files have been installed on yoursystem. Investigate the list in the Layers module, and then go into the GIS Layer Groupsmodule to define what each layer will be called when viewed in the map modules. Then you




144

can go into the Layers module and assign one of these layer groups to each layer. Whenyou return to the Map Management module, these layer groups will now appear as items onthe Layers drop-down box.

The actual appearance of layer data within the Map Management and Map View modules isset by adjusting the parameters for each layer in the Layers module. This includes the fill

and outline colors for each set of shapes, the font, font color, and font size for text labels,which shape file field will provide the label information, and at what zoom levels each bit ofinformation will appear. A detailed discussion of how to configure layers is described here.

Note Peek does not distribute BMP or GIS data files along with IQ Central. Whenyou purchase IQ Central, your local IT or electronic resource representativewill need to contact Peek Traffic in order to integrate your local mappingdata into IQ Central.

Adding a New GIS Map

This option is available only if you have the GIS Maps version of IQ Central installed. It

cannot be accessed in the BMP Maps version of IQ Central. Follow these steps to create anew GIS map to your IQ Central environment.

1. Open the Map Management module .

2. Select Create New Map View from the Map View drop down list box, the Full extentmap will be opened.

3. Enter the Name of the Map View in the map View Name field. This is the name thatwill reference the map when it is selected for display.

4. Enter a description of the Map in the Description field.

5. Target the area for the map view by positioning your cursor around the area that is to

constitute the map view. Hold down the left hand mouse button and drag the cursorto define an area. Release the mouse button and the map will zoom in to displayonly the selected area. Continue this process until you have a view that displays thecorrect area for your map.

6. Click on the Save View button to save the map view and add it to the Map Views list.

Deleting a GIS Map View

To delete a Map View that is no longer used, select the Map View that is to be deleted fromthe Map View drop down list. Click on the Remove View button and verify that you wish todelete the view.

Creating Map Views A 'map view' is a map display defined to appear in a certain way in the Map View module ofIQ Central. The meaning of 'map view' is different on BMP and GIS systems, because theway that a 'view' is defined is fundamentally different in the two environments.

Map Views in BMP systems

A 'map view' in the standard BMP version of IQ Central is just a single map file. Eachbitmap map file creates a single map view. So the creation of views for the Map Viewermodule is just the normal process of adding BMP files in the Map Manager module.




145

Map Views in GIS systems

The GIS mapping version also uses the Map Management module to create map views.However, in GIS environment, a map view is actually a stored set of viewing parameters

that defines how the data will appear when it is opened in the Map Viewer. Since GIS datacan be viewed dynamically in the Map Viewer, these map view definitions can be importantwhen you want to focus the attention of the operator on a particular region of the map, oreven on a single intersection .

Creating a GIS Map View

As described in the Map View Creation Overview, GIS mapping allows you to save a set ofmap viewing parameters as a 'map view.' These map views can then be pulled up within theMap Viewer module so the operator can see these pre-defined views of the map data. A'map view' stores the four corners of the viewable area of the GIS data set, the zoom level,and which of the GIS data layers are visible.

To define a GIS map view:

1. If it is not already open, launch the Map Management module. This can be

done by either pressing the Map Management button in the toolbar (shown atright,) pressing Alt-m,m , or by going to the Maps menu and choosing MapManagement .

2. Use the Zoom In , Zoom Out , and Pan controls to display the portion of the map youwish to appear in this view.

3. Use the Layers drop down box to define which of the GIS data layers will be visiblein the view. Place a checkbox next to those layers you wish to appear in the view.Remove the checkbox from those layers you wish to hide.

4. Fill in a Map View Name and a Description in the two fields at the bottom of the MapManagement window. These fields will accept any alphanumeric entry, includingpunctuation. The Map View Name must be unique.

5. Note: The current list of Map View names can be seen by pulling down the MapViews list at the top left corner of the Map Management module. But if you select anyof these other views before you define this new view, you will lose your view settings.

6. Press the Save View button, located at the top of the Map Management window.

Close the Map Management module.Open the Map View module (Press F3 , or press the Maps button (shown at right) on thestandard toolbar to open the Map Viewer) and select the new map view to verify that itappears as you wish it to appear.




146

Working With GIS Map LayersIn a GIS-enabled IQ Central system, the GIS Layers and GIS Layer Groups are handledusing two modules with those same names available on the Maps menu. The followingillustration shows how GIS shape files create layers within IQ Central, which are mapped toLayer Groups within the GIS Layers module .

Figure 72 – Placing a zoom area

These layer groups then are available under the Layers button in the Map Managementmodule. Which layers are visible or invisible are set before a Map View is saved in the MapManagement module. The Map View module then uses these settings to determine what todisplay when a user selects a particular view of their GIS maps.

Creating GIS Map Layer Groups Layer Groups are a way that IQ Central maps the layers of your GIS shape files into theLayers that appear in Map View and the Map Management module . If you want to just usethe layers that are provided by your shape files, just create a single layer group for each ofthem. Otherwise, you can create a group of layers of similar qualities. Say that you haveshape files of 'lakes', 'rivers', streams', and 'oceans'. You may want to create a single LayerGroup called 'Water' that will allow you to activate and deactivate them on your maps as agroup. But be warned that linking them together will prevent you from activating ordeactivating any of the shape file layers individually in your maps. Shape layers can beassigned to one, and only one, Layer Group. And Layer Groups are what you have accessto in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module. You do not have access tothe actual shape file layers in that setting. The actual assignment of shape layers to yourlayer groups is done in the GIS Layers module.




147

Figure 73 – Layer Groups module

Adding a Layer Group To add a new layer group to your list, follow these steps:

1. Open the Layer Groups pull-down list to see what groups have already beencreated. If the group you need is not already on the list, select New Layer Group... This item appears at the top of the list.

2. Type in the name of your new layer group in the Layer Group Name field. This is thetext that will appear in the Layers pull-down list in the Map Management module.

3. Press the Save button to store the name of the new Layer Group.

Important If you type in a new layer group name and press Save without firstchoosing New Layer Group... from the top field of this dialog box,you will not be creating a new layer group , but instead you willrename whatever layer group was currently visible in the top list. Forinstance, on the screen above, if you neglect to change the LayerGroups pull down list from 'parks' to 'New Layer Group...' beforetyping in 'streets', you won't be adding a new Layer Group, but willinstead be renaming the 'parks' group to 'streets'.

Changing the Name of a Layer Group To change the current name of a layer group, follow these steps:

1. Select the Layer Group you wish to modify in the top pull-down list on this dialog box.

2. Type in the new name in the Layer Group Name field.

3. Press the Save button. This will change the name of the group.




148

GIS Layers The GIS Layers, or just 'Layers', module is used to configure how GIS data will appear in theIQ Central map viewers. In this window, each row represents one layer of geographic data,and each layer represents one GIS shape file that has been stored on your system andconfigured in the IQ Central database. Some examples of the data that shape file layerscould contain are:

Roadways

Water features

City boundaries

Landmarks

A shape file can store information about three types of geographical features: line featuressuch as rivers and roadways, fill features such as cities and neighborhoods, and pointfeatures such as landmarks and mile markers.

The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and thecontrols at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. For more information on how toedit a layer, click on the sample screen shown above.

Note When using GIS maps, the "Layers' button in the Map Management moduleactually does not represent these shape-file based layers, but rather showsthe names of the GIS Layer Groups that have been defined in IQ Central.Shape file layers are assigned to these layer groups here in the GIS Layersmodule.

Opening the GIS Layers Module

There are a couple of methods to open the GIS Layers module:Go to the Maps menu and choose GIS Layers

OR

Press Alt-m , and then the letter ' L'

Details About Configuring Layers

The Layers module displays a list of layers in the table at the top of the screen, and thecontrols at the bottom to edit a single selected row of data. The table columns and the rowsbelow are roughly aligned, so you will edit entries, generally, from left to right. The tableitself is only used to display current settings and select which layer to edit. It is not used toedit values, with one exception. The Color columns can be double clicked, and if you don'tlike the current value, selecting No will open the color edit dialog box.

These values all determine how and when a layer's components are displayed on a map.The File Name, and Symbol Type and Style, are all set automatically when you add a newlayer to the system. But the symbol type and style can be changed by the operator, ifdesired. The values that appear in the Field Name drop-down list are pulled directly from theGIS shape file. The rest of the values in a layer are defined solely by operator preference,based on how they want the shapes and labels of the data on that layer to appear on IQ




149

Central maps. The best method is to keep this module and the Map Management moduleopen together as you go back and forth, tweaking the layer settings, saving them, and thenrefreshing the map view to see how the layers appear in the map environment. After thelayer values have been tweaked to the operator's satisfaction, that is the best time to createviews that will be available to day-to-day operators in the Map View module.

Important When changes to layer values are saved, they do not appear on theMap Management module until that window is closed and re-opened.

Figure 74 – Using the Layers module to configure GIS map layers

Always remember to Save your settings whenever you make changes, otherwise they willbe lost when you exit the Layers window.

Adding a New Shape File as a GIS Layer

The following steps describe how to point IQ Central at an existing GIS shape file and pullingthe information in as a new layer in the Layers module :

1. Store the shape file on your computer somewhere where it will be permanently

accessibly by IQ Central.2. Go to the Maps menu and open the Layers module by selecting GIS Layers.

3. Press the New Layer button.

4. Using the Open dialog box, navigate to the place where you stored the GIS shapefile, highlight it, and press the Open button.

5. The new layer will appear at the bottom of the list and will be selected. Beforeworking with the layer, be sure to set a couple of the values immediately. First, set






151

Managing Devices on MapsThe ability to work with devices in IQ Central's map viewer module include these functions:

Table 26 – Functions available from device icons in maps Global Functions

(Works for all devicetypes)

Traffic Controllers &

Masters(Additional functions)

NTCIP Cameras

(Additionalfunctions)

Message Signs

(Additional functions)

Place a device on themap so that it will appear in the same locationwhenever the MapViewer is opened

Perform central overridefunctions on single units or groups of devices

Streaming video inupper three zoomviews

Open the Sign Controlmodule

View the current statusof the device

Open the DatabaseUpload/Download modulefor a single controller or master

Open thePan/Tilt/Zoomcamera control

Run sign pixeldiagnostics

Dialupconnect/disconnect

Configure up to 4 zoomlevel representations of the device

Interactively change thezoom level view for asingle device

Placing Devices on Maps Devices can be placed at locations on pre-configured maps whether you are using BMPmaps or GIS maps. Placing devices on maps is not done in the Map Management module.The basic process for using devices on maps follows these steps:

1. Configure the maps to operate as you want them to

2. Add devices to your system and configure their connections to the real worldhardware

3. Configure how devices change their appearance as one zooms into a map

4. Use the Maps > Place Icon on Map command to position devices on your maps

5. Open the Map View module and track the status of your devices. Zoom into the mapto see more details about the state of each device .

For the most part, devices function the same way in the Map View module no matter whichversion of mapping you are using. However, there are differences on when the variousdevice zoom icons are activated as you navigate around on the maps. The following topicsdescribe how to place device icons on maps and how to specify how they will operate in theMap View environment.




152

Zoom Level Icons

Important Aside for the fact that the maintenance icon is often used as theZoom Level 0 icon, maintenance icons are not the same as zoomlevel icons

The two, four, or five icons that represent an individual device in the IQ Central map vieware not the same as the device icons that are specified elsewhere in IQ Central. Thoseicons (as configured in Tools > Advanced Options > Icon Management and Tools >Advanced Options > Link Icon to Device Type ) are called 'maintenance icons' and areused everywhere else in IQ Central when displaying a list of device types. Thesemaintenance icons are used in Device Types drop-down lists and when first placing adevice on a map. But the icons or graphics that appear when viewing a live map aredifferent than these maintenance icons.

1. First of all, 'Zoom Level Icons' is a misnomer, because these are not restricted tosmall iconic images; they can actually be large graphics files. This is in contrast tomaintenance icons, which, in order to work properly in the interface, must be smallimages (i.e. actual 'icons').

2. A second difference is that there is only one maintenance icon assigned to eachdevice type, but up to five Zoom Level Icons can be assigned to each device type.(By default, two images are assigned to sensor and weather station devices, fourimages for controller and camera devices, and five images for traffic sign devices.)

3. A third major difference between maintenance and Zoom Level icons is thatmaintenance icons can be entirely user-defined. The operator of an IQ Centralsystem can change all of the maintenance icons for all device types in his or hersystem using the Tools > Advanced Options commands in the interface. ZoomLevel icons, on the other hand, are fixed, at least for camera, weather station,sensor, and sign device types. (As of IQ Central version 1.2.)

The Zoom Level icons for controller type devices can be edited in IQ Central, using theMaps > Intersection Displays command.

Placing an Icon on a BMP Map Each device that you can connect with using IQ Central can be displayed on a map. To dothis, you should first have allocated an icon to each device. The available icons aredisplayed along the bottom of the map. The drop down list boxes attached to each icon willlist all the devices that have been added to the system.

Note You will only be allowed to position one instance of each device on a map. If

you attempt to position a device a second time, an error message will bedisplayed.

The Device Icons Displayed window will list the description of each device that has beensaved as an icon on this map. The Device Icons Temporarily Displayed is a list of thoseicons that you have added to the map but have not yet saved as a permanent part of themap. Any devices that are not in either of these lists, but do appear when you click on thedrop-down list box attached to the icons, have not been added to the map.




153

Follow these steps to add a device to a BMP map:

1. Click on the drop down list box attached to the icon that represents the device thatyou want to add to the map. You will notice that those devices that have alreadybeen added to the Map will be grayed out in the list so that you cannot select them asecond time.

2. Highlight the name of the actual device from the drop down list box and release themouse button. The list will close and the cursor will change to a square with a crossinside.

3. Drag this square to the point on the map where you want the device located andclick the left-hand mouse button. The icon will be displayed and the description of thedevice will be added to the Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.

4. Repeat these steps for each Device that you want to see on the map.

5. When you are certain that the icons are in the correct position, you should save theicons to the map so that next time you access the map the icons remain positionedin the right place.

Placing an Icon on a GIS Map Icons that are place on GIS maps are geo-located using latitude and longitude values. Thismeans that they will move with the map when the map is panned or zoomed. The icons willalways be located in the same geographical position, regardless of which portion of the mapis being displayed. If you zoom in to a smaller area, you might find that some of the devices“disappear”, since those devices are no longer physically located in the actual area that youare now viewing. The same thing will happen if you pan the map in any direction.

Follow these steps to place an icon on a GIS map:

1. Select the Device that is to be placed on the map from the drop down lists at thebottom of the page. All devices that are currently configured in IQCentrol will belisted here. Devices that have already been placed on the map will also not beavailable for placement.

2. Drag the Icon representing the Device to its exact location on the map.

3. The name of the device will appear in the Devices Temporarily Displayed list. Whenyou are sure that it is correctly placed, click on the Device Icon and then on the Savebutton on the Toolbar. The device will now be listed in the Devices Displayed list.

Setting GIS Zoom Levels If GIS maps are enabled on your system, then you have the power to control how each typeof device appears as you zoom into the map image. Up to five distinct zoom appearancescan be set, depending on the device type. Using the GIS Zoom Levels window, you specifyat what upper zoom level a particular device appearance shows up on the map. Zoom level0 is the view to assign when you have zoomed way out on the map, showing the entire city,state or region. Zoom level 5, on the other hand, is the view you wish to see of this devicewhen you have zoomed all the way into the map and are showing a very localized area.What you are selecting on this screen is the threshold level IQ Central will use to decidewhen to display the next higher level of detail about the device on the map view. Theparameter that is tested against is the horizontal size of the displayed map.




154

GIS Zoom Levels - Example

This example shows some settings that might be used for a portable sign device . Noticethat these settings switch from the top level (simple icon) view of a portable sign to the'small icon' view when the map display is at or below 19.8 miles. Then the GIS Map Viewerswitches to the 'Medium Small Size' view of the device when the map's horizontal size isless than 6.6 miles. This process continues as you zoom into a map, until you reach themaximum detail display of the sign (Large Size) when the map displayed is less than 1.32miles across.

Figure 76 – Setting Device Zoom Levels

Opening the GIS Zoom Settings module

To open the GIS Zoom Levels window, you have a couple of options:

Go to the Maps menu, and choose GIS Zoom Levels .

or press Alt-m together and then press the letter z

Setting the GIS zoom levels for a particular Device Type

These are the steps required to set the zoom levels for one kind of device:1. Open the GIS Zoom Level window ( Maps > GIS Zoom Levels )

2. In the Device Types pull-down list, choose the type of device you wish to edit.

3. Starting at the right side of the screen, set the Zoom 0 level. Set it to the horizontalsize of the map where you want the device to first show up as you zoom into theimage. You can either use the slider or you can type in the number (in miles) directly.

4. Set the Zoom 1 level for the next level of detail.




155

5. Repeat the process for each of the available zoom levels. (In general, signs havefive levels, controllers and cameras have four levels, and sensors and weatherstations use only two zoom levels.)

6. Press the Save button to store the new values in the IQ Central database.

7. If you want to modify zoom settings for other device types, select another devicetype and repeat the process.

8. When you are finished editing the zoom levels of devices, press the Close button toexit the Zoom Level module .




156

Viewing MapsThe Map Viewer module is the primary interface for dealing with all of your devicesgeographically. It allows you to show pre-configured maps of your city or region, with thedevices that are connected to IQ Central positioned on the map(s) at their physical locations.

The Map View module not only shows device locations, but also can be used to interactwith the devices directly. The viewer can be used to:

Navigate between maps (BMP mapping) or zoom and pan across the available mapdata ( GIS mapping)

Select pre-defined 'Map Views' to display

Poll visible devices at regular intervals

Retrieve the current status of individual devices

Left open with all device status windows open so that you can verify at a glance thecurrent status of all devices

Zoom into detailed 'front panel displays' of controller devices

The BMP version of Map viewer, shown below, is described in the following section, titled"Using the BMP Map Viewer Interface."

Figure 77 – Map Viewer interface (BMP version)

The GIS version of Map viewer, shown here, is described in the section after that, titled"Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface."






158

Using the GIS Map Viewer Interface

When the GIS version of the Map Viewer module is first opened during a user's session, theMap Viewer module displays the first map view in its list. The interface provides a group ofbuttons above the map, the map display area (showing any devices that are located withinthe area of this map, and a log of map loading activity at the bottom. Click on the portions ofthe Map Viewer window shown below for more details about using the interface:

Figure 80 – GIS Map Viewer




159

Accessing Devices in the Map Viewer Module Whether using the GIS or BMP versions of Map Viewer, there are several functions that canbe performed directly from device icons located on the map. To access these functions,highlight the icon on the map that represents the device that you want to work with and clickthe right-hand mouse button. Each particular device type has its own set of options. Thefollowing table illustrates which options are available for which Device Type. For moreinformation about any of these options, click on the particular function to open a pop upwindow with more detail.

Table 27 – Commands available in the device icon drop-down menu Type of Device Command

Save Icon PositionRemove IconDisplay Object Polling RateSave Object PositionType of Grid Display (Standard,Hide, Alarm)

Intersection /Sensor

StatusSave Icon PositionRemove Icon

Camera

Camera Control Save Icon PositionRemove Icon

Polling RateSign ZoomSave Object Position

Sign View

Display Object

Type of Display

Grid (Standard,Hide, Alarm)

Sign(Portable, Overhead, VSL,etc.)

Status Save Icon PositionRemove IconDisplay Object Polling RateSave Object Position

Weather ViewType of DisplayGrid

Weather Station

Weather Status

Selecting a Map in the Map Viewer The image shown at right shows the steps to changing the currently selected map view inthe GIS version of the Map Viewer. But the process is essentially the same in the BMPversion of the viewer. The only difference is that instead of selecting a pre-defined windowinto the GIS map data, a 'view' in the BMP environment is just a single bitmap map file.




160

Figure 81 – Map Views menu

In either case, clicking on Map Views or Maps opens a drop-down list of the available mapimages configured on your system. This list is always shown in alphabetical order. Selectone of the available map views and it will display in the Map Viewer window.

You cannot define maps or map views inside the Map Viewer module . That work must bedone in the Map Management module. For GIS map views, the layers of data that areavailable in any given map view are also defined in the Map Management environment.These layers cannot be turned on or off inside the Map Viewer.

Setting the Default Map There is no place in IQ Central to explicitly select which map will appear by default in yourMap Viewer. However, there is method to pick which of your map views or map files will beshown automatically whenever the Map Viewer is opened. The Maps button (BMP version)and the Map Views button ( GIS version) both list the available maps that can be loaded intothe viewer. These lists are alphabetical, and the first item in this list is what the Map Viewerloads as its default map.

To set a default map for the Map Viewer:

1. Open the Map Management module

2. Open the view that you wish to use as the default

3. Change the Map View Name (GIS version) or the Map name (BMP version) byadding a '0-' (a zero followed by a dash) before the actual name. This will force the

map to appear first in the Map list.4. Press the Save button to store the new name ( Save View in the GIS version of Map

Management.)

5. Look in the Map Views list in the Map Management module to verify that your newlyrenamed map appears at the top of the list.

6. Close the Map Management module.

7. Open the Map Viewer. Your selected default view should now load as the default map.



161

Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling EventsPolling and scheduling are two different methods used by the central software toautomatically retrieve data. IQ Central performs both polling and scheduling functions, andin fact several types of each.

PollingPolling is the regularly occurring attempt by the central software to go out to all devices of aspecific type and retrieve their current status information. There are two kinds of polling inIQ Central: Map Polling and Log Polling.

Map Polling - Map Polling is used to define which data objects to retrieve from fielddevices and how often. After the data is retrieved and used by the program, it isgenerally discarded. Map polling is used, as the name suggests, to update the status ofdevices in the Map Viewer, but it also used as the source for Alarm monitoring data. Theonly time when this data is stored is when an alarm condition is detected, and then thedetails are stored to the Alarm log. The details of configuring and utilizing Map Pollingare described in the Map Polling section below.

Log Polling - Log polling is similar to Map Polling in that it is used to define which dataobjects to retrieve from field devices and how often to do so, but unlike Map Polling, theresulting data is then stored to a data log for that device . The details of configuring andutilizing Log Polling are described in the Log Polling section below.

Note One other note about Map versus Log Polling concerns the DeviceStatus viewer. One might expect the Status module to use the generaldata object polling capability of Map Polling, but that is not the case.Instead, it displays current data as retrieved by the Log Polling process,as well as general communications status information. It does not useMap Polling data.




162

SchedulingThere are two types of scheduling available in IQ Central: Message Sign log retrievalscheduling, and Traffic Controller log retrieval.

Message Sign Scheduling – The Message Sign scheduling process is handled entirely

within IQ Central. The details of configuring and utilizing Message Sign Scheduling aredescribed in the Message Sign Scheduling section below.

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval – The second kind of scheduling, Traffic Control logretrieval scheduling, requires that an external software module be installed along with IQCentral. This software is called the IQ Central Scheduler. If installed on your system, youcan schedule times for the central software to connect to traffic controllers or masters,and to retrieve that data logs back into the IQ Central database . These events can occureither immediately, once in the future, or at regular intervals in the future. The resultingdata can then be used to generate reports. Traffic Controller Log Retrieval is describedin the section below.

Map PollingMap Polling is a method in IQ Central to request that individual NTCIP data objects beretrieved from devices at regular intervals. The resulting data is used for the monitoring ofdevices in the Map Viewer, and also as a source of data to test for Alarm conditions. MapPolling data is not generally stored to the IQ Central database , except for individual datapoints when an alarm condition is detected or cleared. Because most of this data is notstored to the database, most data polling is done with Map Polling. (The IQ Centraldatabase file would grow very rapidly if too many data objects were polled using the LogPolling version of polling.)

There are four tools used to work with Map Polling:

The main map polling configuration window

The Polling Assistant

The Batch Update window

and the Dynamic Objects Configuration window.

Launching the Main Map Polling Configuration Window Map polling is configured using the Polling Options commands available under the Maps menu. The primary settings are in Maps > Polling Options > Map Polling Configuration. TheMap Polling Configuration module is used to define what data objects are polled, based on

device type or individual devices.



Chapter 10 – Polling and Scheduling Events

163

Map Polling ConfigurationThe Map Polling Configuration module is used to tell IQ Central what data objects anddynamic objects should be requested from a device when it appears in the Map Viewer. Thiscan be set by Device Type or by individual device. The Map Viewer uses this list of objectsas a starting point. If the device's view in the map uses any of the objects in this map polling

list, then those objects are requested from the device. The Map Viewer then uses the datato update the device's representation on the map.

Opening the Map Polling Configuration module This screen is opened by going to the Maps menu and choosing Polling Options > MapData .

Or, by clicking on the Map Data button, which is available on either the Standard toolbar orthe Map Configuration toolbar.

Using the Map Polling Configuration interface

This 'Realtime Map Polling' window (shown at right) is used to define what data is retrieved(at regular intervals) from devices that are currently visible in the Map View module. A singleretrieved data object is defined by creating a single row in the map polling list, displayed atthe top of the Realtime Map Polling window.

Figure 82 – Interface elements of the Map Polling Configuration module

Polling object list – This list shows all of the NTCIP objects that are currently configured toprovide data to the Map Viewer when the device is visible on the map.




164

Filter - Device Type – Filters the content of the polling object list to show only the datapoints that are currently configured for devices of this type.

Filter - by Selected Device Type – Turns the device type filter on or off.

Filter - Device – Allows a user to filter the list to show only polling objects currentlyconfigured for that specific device.

Filter - by Selected Device – Turns the device specific filter on or off.

Object – Shows the name of the object currently highlighted in the Polling object list. Whena New Row button is pressed, this is where you select what object will be polled.

OID – Displays the numeric object ID of the currently highlighted data object in the Pollingobject list.

Description – This text shows some hints about the contents of this object, as well as its internal structure (if the object is used to store more than one data point, as many are.)

Poll frequency – This shows how often the data specified in the currently selected row ofthe Polling object list is requested from the device (in whole seconds.)

Enable – This is an on/off switch for this data object. An object can be configured in thePolling object list, but turned off, if you temporarily don't want to poll for that data.

Leave Connected – This defines whether the connection channel is kept open in betweeninstances of polling for this data object.

Protocol (Normal/Dynamic) – This should be kept set to 'Normal', unless you specificallywish to poll for dynamic objects that you have defined using the Dynamic Object module ofIQ Central.

New Row – Adds a new object row to the Polling object list for the selected Data Type orspecific Device, whichever is currently selected in the window. Once you select the newrow, you'll need to fill in the Object, Poll Frequency, Protocol, Enabled, and LeaveConnected fields, and then choose the Save Row button to store it to the list.Remove Row – Deletes the highlighted map polling object from the above polling object list.

Save Row – Stores the current settings for this data object into the table above.

Filtered Group - Enabled – This control can be used to set the Enabled state for all of theobjects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn't performed until you pressthe Save All button.

Filtered Group - Leave Connected – This control can be used to set the same LeaveConnected setting for all objects currently listed in the Polling objects list. The change isn'tperformed until you press the Save All button.

Poll Frequency – This can be used to set the same polling frequency value for all of therows currently listed in the Polling object list. When you enter a value here, click the SaveAll button to store the frequency in all of the objects listed.

Save All – Used in to store changes made to multiple rows of the Polling object group(made using the three controls to the left - Enabled, Leave connected, and PollingFrequency.)

Refresh Server Polling – This sends the current list of map polling object values to thedevice or all devices of this type (depending on what is selected in the Filter section above.




165

Polling Assistant – A tool that can help fill in the polling data object table when workingwith traffic controllers. ( Note: The Polling Assistant is only available when a single device isselected. The button is grayed out when you have all devices, or all devices of a type,selected.)

Copy From – This command allows you to copy the entire Polling object list from another

device. Note that this device does not have to be of the identical type.

Note Using 'Copy From' will overwrite the current data in your Polling object list.This control gives you an option to cancel out of the process if you decidenot to do so.

Close – This closes the Configure Map Polling window. If you've made changes within thewindow that haven't been saved to the database , you will be asked if you wish to proceed. Ifyou select Yes, your changes will be discarded. If you choose No, you will be returned tothe window.

Using the Polling Assistant Since configuring map polling can be a complex process, particularly for devices such astraffic controller s that can have many data objects, IQ Central includes two tools to assistyou in configuring map polling objects. The first was the Auto Populate Polling tool,available in the Configure Intersections module. The second is described here: the PollingAssistant. Unlike the Auto Populate tool, which works only for traffic controllers, the PollingAssistant can be used with any device type.

The Polling Assistant is a very smart module that presents a list of logical bits of data basedon the type of device on which you are currently working. It asks you what data you wish topoll on, in the form of one screen of check boxes. It then takes the items that you check,and populates the Polling Objects list with exactly the data objects that contain that

information. It uses one polling interval value for items that are considered cycle or intervalstatus data points, and a different polling interval for more general device status objects,such as Alarms and Patterns. The example below shows how the Polling Assistant appearswhen working on a 3000E TS2 traffic controller.

Again, the resulting data will be used in two places, in the map viewer, and in the Alarmssystem.




166

Figure 83 – Intersection Polling Assistant dialog box

Controls at the bottom of the window allow you to select all of the check boxes on thewindow, or clear all of the check boxes.

Finally, you can either cancel out of this window to make no changes to the current Pollingobjects list, or you can choose OK to tell the assistant to erase the current contents of thePolling objects list and fill in the objects for all of the checked objects in this window.

Note The Polling Assistant is only available in the Map Polling Configurationwindow when a single device is selected. The button is grayed out whenyou have all devices, or all devices of a type, selected.

Caution Using the Polling Assistant will overwrite the current data in your Pollingobject list. Choose the Cancel button in the Polling Assistant if you donot wish to overwrite the current list.

Notes About Configuring Map Polling for Alarm Monitoring

This Polling Assistant tool can be very useful when you are attempting to set up polling forthe IQ Central Alarms monitoring system. A couple of important points should be consideredwhen picking what data to poll specifically for alarm monitoring:

The basic alarms that most users watch for are based on one item in the above checklist:

Short Alarms (basic alarms)




167

The Second-by-Second Status data objects are generally not polled for alarm monitoring(i.e. phase states, overlaps, ped states, rings, etc.)

The alarm monitoring system uses the 'Poll When Map Closed' value as its datacollection interval. However, if the Map Viewer module is open, and you've configuredthe polled data to be retrieved more often while the map is open, AND the device in question is within the Map Viewer window, the alarm viewer will monitor the data at thishigher rate.

Most users monitor the Short Alarms data objects at an interval of about 60 seconds.

Another set of data that may be important for alarm monitoring is the Detector Data that isconfigured in the lower right corner of the Polling Assistant window. These data objectsconcern Volume and Occupancy detector data, and they have their own polling intervalvalues. Again, the alarms system uses the polling interval of 'Poll When Map Closed' unlessthe Map Viewer is open and the device in question is visible in the Map Viewer, at whichpoint the Alarm monitoring system uses the Map Open polling interval.




168

Performing a Batch UpdateIf you've configured a bunch of data objects to be polled from devices as part of your MapPolling (and Alarm Monitoring) strategy, you may, at some point, wish to set a bunch ofpolling objects to have the same intervals or connection settings. The Batch Update optionin the Map Polling Configuration module gives you that capability. To perform a batch

update, follow these steps:1. Open the Map Polling Configuration module ( Maps menu > Polling Options >

Map Polling Configuration , or click on the Map Polling Configuration button inthe Standard toolbar)

2. In the Map Polling Configuration, select the device that you wish to modify.

3. Select the group of polling objects that you would like to batch change.

4. Click on the Batch Update button (shown in the illustration below)

Figure 84 – Batch Update button in the Map Polling Configuration window

5. This will open the Batch Update dialog box. You can use this tool to change a groupof objects to use the same map polling interval, map closed polling interval, pollingobject enabled flag, and leave connected flag.

Figure 85 – Batch Update dialog box

6. Set the value or values that you want to have applied to ALL of the objects youselected in the main Map Polling Configuration window.

7. Click OK to make the changes to those objects, or Cancel to leave the values wherethey were.




169

Dynamic Object ConfigurationThe Dynamic Object Configuration module , also known as the ' STMP Polling' module, allowsthe user to configure multiple NTCIP objects in a single device into a single 'dynamic object'.Dynamic objects are part of the NTCIP standard. They are intended to be compound dataobjects that can easily be created and recreated, as necessary, in order to cut down on

network overhead. For example, if 20 objects are called using a single command, thenetwork traffic required to send and receive 20 separate data objects is cut downdramatically.

Figure 86 – Interface elements of the Dynamic Objects Configuration window

Dynamic objects are defined in this window, but they are actually used elsewhere within IQCentral. Once a dynamic object has been created, it is given a Dynamic Object number. Itcan then be called, by number, from within the Map Polling Configuration window.

Opening the Dynamic Object Configuration module The Dynamic Object Configuration module can be opened a couple of different ways in IQCentral:

Go to the Maps menu, open the Polling Options submenu, and choose DynamicObjects .

or Press the Dynamic Objects button (shown at right) on the Map Configurationtoolbar




170

Using the Dynamic Object Configuration Interface The Dynamic Object Configuration module is used to create and modify the dynamic objectslist. The list is displayed at the top of the window. The rest of the window provide tools toadd rows, delete rows, and save changes made to rows.

A row in the table is made up of a definition of which dynamic object to assign the object,which device type or device it applies to, and which object. In this environment, a dynamicobject is defined as all of the rows that are assigned to the same dynamic object number.

Device Type to Verify OID - Why do we have a second field to select a Device Type? If weleave the 'For Device Type' field set to All Devices , we still need a device type master tableto populate the object selection list. This field tells the Dynamic Object Configuration moduleto use this device type's object list to populate the Objects list control.

ActiveX Type - This is almost always set to 'Integer'. The only time to change this is whenthe Description of the object specifies that the data object is something else, such as an'octet'.

OID Length - This should always be set to '1'.




171

Log Polling

Overview of Log Polling The two Log Polling tools mentioned in this section are used for several functions. Theprimary function of the Log polling module is to retrieve data objects from devices at regular

intervals and to store the resulting data in the IQ Central database . A secondary function ofthis module is to configure how IQ Central monitors the communications connection statusof each type of device . And finally, the Log Polling windows are also used to configure howoften 'Time Syncing' is performed between the central IQ Central computer and the devicesin the field.

Device Type Data - This module is used to define what Log Polling data should berequested from each Device Type.

Device Type Polling - This module is used to determine how often the above data should bepolled for from each type of device and individual device. This module is also used toconfigure how often the time should be synchronized between the central computer andfield devices. It is also used to define how IQ Central judges the status of communications

with a device.

Launching the Device Type Data window Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type Data .

Launching the Device Type Polling window Go to the Tools menu, open the Logging Options submenu, and choose Device Type Polling .

About the System Log The data from Log Polling is stored to the IQ Central System Log, which is discussed indetail in the "System Log" section of the Database Maintenance and Archiving chapter ofthis manual, beginning on page YY.




172

Device Type DataLog polling is defined on these two modules: Device Type Data and Device Type Polling.The Device Type Data module is used to define what data objects will be polled for eachDevice Type. It does not configure how often polling will occur. All of the rest of the pollsettings, and any per-device choices, are done in the Device Type Polling module (along

with a few other related settings.)The primary function of this interface is to set up the data table that will be used within theIQ Central database to store the resulting log polling data for each type of device you aretracking. The basic steps to use this interface are:

1. Select a device type

2. Select a data object

3. Add the object to the log polling list

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired objects are in the list

5. Update the database table so it can receive data from the selected objects

6. Refresh the IQ Central server so that it polls for the requested data for devices of thistype

Interface Controls These are the controls in the Device Type Data window:

Device Types – Use this pull-down list to choose the device type for which you will besetting the log polling objects list

Devices –This list merely operates as a reference list to show you what devices arecurrently configured in your system under this device type. Selecting a device in the listdoesn't do anything.

Object – The NTCIP data object within the device that you wish to poll at regular intervals.Note that the interval to poll each object is set in the Device Type Polling module, not here.

Instance – In some cases, but not all, data objects are split up into several pieces toaccommodate all of the values assigned to the object. For instance, the DetectorVolumeobject has 28 instances, one for each detector . The phaseStatusGroupGreens object (and,in fact, all of the objects in the 'phaseStatusGroup' class) have two instances: '1' for phases1 through 8, and '2' for phases 9 through 16.

Data Type – This is a read-only field showing what type of data will be returned when theobject is polled.

Description – This read-only text shows a description of what type of data the objectcontains, and in some cases, a bit about how the data is stored within the object. (Forinstance, which bit is used to track a simple binary state in the device.)

Base OID – This read-only data shows the object ID of the currently selected Object.

Add Object to List button – This button tells the module to add the currently selectedObject to the 'Log Object List for Device Type' list.

Log Object List for Device Type – This shows a list of all of the data objects that arecurrently configured to be log polled for this type of device. Note that this table contains all




173

of your recent changes, so it may not be the same list currently being used by the IQ Centraldata server or within the database tables.

Update Database Table – This tells IQ Central to create the log polling data table for thisDevice Type, if none currently exists. Or it tells IQ Central to update the current table toinclude the fields that have been added since the last time the list was edited. If you have

double-clicked an item in the list to tag it as a 'REMOVE' item, this button will delete theobject from the Device Type table, including all the data that was previously recorded forthese types of device for this data object. In such a case where you are removing data, youwill be asked to verify that you do actually wish to delete the data from the IQ Centraldatabase.

Refresh Server Polling – Tells the NTCIP Data server to use the new list of objectsfor this type of device. This button serves the same function as the Refresh ServerPolling button (shown at right) located on the Standard toolbar.

Close button – Closes the Device Type Data module without saving any changes you'vemade, although it will prompt you to save if it detects any changes.




174

Device Type Polling The Device Type Polling module has several functions, but the primary one is to take theobjects that were defined as log polling data points in the Device Type Data module, and setup a polling interval for devices of that type. Unlike the Device Type Data module, thiswindow allows you to set the schedule by individual devices, rather than by the wholedevice type. But this environment also allows you to set other polling parameters on adevice-by-device basis. These include:

Intervals for Communications status checks (which show up in the Status module.)

How often to perform a time synchronization on the device (based on server PC'scurrent date and time)

and parameters used to judge the current communications status when the device isviewed in the Map Viewer the IQ Central system log

Figure 87 – Device Type Log polling window




175

Communications Failure Testing'Communications Failure Testing' means "How does IQ Central know when to report that adevice has gone offline , or whose communications can be judged to be ' marginal '?" Theparameters that determine when IQ Central will switch the comms status of a device to'marginal' and then 'offline' are actually defined in the Device Log Polling window.

IQ Central tests a device's communications status using a cascading set of rules:

1. Open the Device Log Polling window ( Tools menu, then Logging Options > Device Log Polling .)

2. Locate the communications failure testing parameters in the lower right corner of thiswindow. These parameters use the number of poll intervals as the test conditions.Each device is polled as often as is necessary to fulfill all of its Map Polling AND itsLog Polling requirements. These may be irregular intervals between polls if, say, theshortest map polling interval is 7 seconds, and the device type polling interval is setto 5 seconds. In this case, the interval between subsequent poll attempts could be 1,2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds. No matter . . . the following tests just count poll attempts andwhether or not they succeed.

3. Set the Marginal Count value. This is the number of polls that must be missed in arow before the device is judged to be in a 'marginal' comms state.

4. Set the Marginal Poll Skip value. After a marginal state is determined for a device, IQCentral is instructed to skip polling for his device for this many poll intervals. It thentries again. If the attempt succeed, the device returns to a good communicationsstatus. If it fails again, IQ Central increments the count of polling failures and waitsanother Marginal Poll Skip duration before it tries again. It repeats this process until iteither succeeds in communicating with the device, or it reaches the next testcondition.

5. Set the Offline Count value. This is the number of bad poll attempts in a row(counting each marginal poll skip interval as ONE failure) before the device is judgedto be 'offline'.

6. Set the Poll Persistence value. This determines how many hours, minutes, andseconds IQ Central will wait before it retests a device that has gone 'offline'. This isto prevent devices that are offline from eating up bandwidth as IQ Central repeatedlytries to regain a connection.

7. As soon as IQ Central receives a reply from the device in any of the above rules test,it changes the device's state back to ' online ' and starts the testing process over againfrom the top.

ImportantRemember, the above comms failure test parameters apply to allpolling, both Map Polling and Log Polling attempts atcommunications.




176

Message Sign Scheduling

Schedules Module IQ Central includes a schedules module that is designed especially for message signs thatis completely separate from the Traffic Controller Scheduler. Message sign schedules

contain a collection of Day Plans that determine what should be displayed on the sign at aparticular time and/or a particular day or selection of days. See Day Plans and Schedulesfor more information.

When schedules are created and saved to a Device , they need to be activated before theywill run. When schedules are activated (see Activate Schedule), you must remember thateach and every schedule that has been saved to the Device will be activated and displayed.Please check all the schedules that are resident on the Device before activating schedules.To do this, select a schedule number on the Schedules tab and Refresh. This will recoverthe schedule details from the sign so that you can check the contents of the schedule.Repeat this for each available Schedule number.

Opening the Message Sign Schedules window These controls can be accessed under the Devices menu by navigating to the MessageSigns > Edit Schedules control.

Day Plans and Schedules This function allows you to specify certain events that are to occur at certain times onselected days. The simplest way to describe how this works is to work though an example.We'll walk through how one would create a day plan and schedule for a message sign:

1. You must be connected to the sign before you send data to the sign. To connect tothe sign, open the Sign Control window; select the required sign from the Devices listand click on the Connect button. Then return to Edit Schedules.

2. Let's assume you want to display Changeable Message 1 at 6am and ChangeableMessage 2 at 6pm every weekday of the year. In addition, you want ChangeableMessage 2 to be displayed all weekend (from 6pm on Friday until 6am on Monday)every weekend. To do this, we need to set up a schedule that will be tied to aspecific day plan that will activate two separate events. To accomplish this, configureSchedule 1 to activate Day Plan 1 every month (all months checked), Mondaythrough Friday (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday checked)every day of the month (all days checked).

3. Save this schedule to the database by clicking on the Save button.

4. Update the sign by clicking on the Update Sign button. The schedule is configured,

but the day plan has not been defined yet. That's our next thing to do.5. Click on the Day Plans tab so that we can set up Day Plan 1, which is already linked

to the Schedule 1 schedule that we have just created.

6. Select Day plan Number 1, and select Day Plan Event Number 1. This Day Planevent is to be activated at 6am so the Day Plan Event Time should be set to haveHour = 6 and Minute = 0.




177

7. We then need to indicate what action is to be taken by this event number. IndicateDay Plan Action 1, which will be set up on the Events and Actions tab to displayChangeable Message 1.

8. Save the Day Plan to the Database (click on Save to Database) and update the sign(click Update Sign.)

9. Select the Events and Actions tab. Here we need to set up Display Message Action1 to display Changeable Message 1.

10. It is important that you check the content of the message that you specify herebefore you create the schedule. To do this, click on the Sign Control Button, selectthe sign and highlight the required message (in this case Changeable Message 1).Then click on the Get from Sign button and preview the message.

Note Each message has a CRC number that is calculated for it when thatmessage is created and whenever it is changed. This is a calculated valuethat indicates the current version of the message. When you specify amessage for an action, you must retrieve the CRC for that message from

the sign. That CRC number is then stored together with the messagenumber in the database and on the sign. If, when the schedule runs, themessage that is specified in the schedule has a CRC that is different thanthe one that was saved at the time the schedule was created, the messagewill not be displayed and the action will be ignored. This eliminates theprobability that another operator could change a message that is allocatedto a schedule, causing an incorrect message to be displayed.

11. Before you click on Save to Database to save this action to the database and UpdateSign to save this information on the sign, click on the Refresh CRC from sign so thatthe current version of that message is allocated to the action.

12. We must now repeat the previous two steps to create a day plan event for displayingchangeable message 2 at 6pm.

13. Select the Day Plan tab.

14. Next, we need to set up Day Plan Event Number 2, which will call Day Plan Action 2at 6 p.m. Note that the Day Plan Event Time is in military time format – 6pm is18h00.

15. Save to the database and update the sign again.

16. Click on the Events and Actions tab to set up Day Plan Action 2 which will activateChangeable Message 2.

17. Once again, remember to check the contents of changeable message 2 before

adding it to the day plan, and retrieve the CRC from the sign for that message.18. Save the information to the database and update the sign again.

Now, as far as the displaying of Changeable Message 2 on the weekend is concerned,remember that Changeable Message 2 has been set to display at 6pm on Friday. No otheraction has been specified to take place until 6am on Monday morning. So, we do not haveto do anything else to keep Changeable Message 2 displaying all weekend.




178

Scheduling of Traffic Controller Log RetrievalIQ Central Scheduler adds a scheduled traffic controller data log retrieval capability to the IQCentral traffic management central system. This is an add-on module that must be installedseparately from the rest of IQ Central. Contact Peek Traffic to order the IQ CentralScheduler module if it is not currently installed.

The IQ Central Scheduler is a separate application that works in conjunction with IQ Central.It maintains its own database of tasks to be performed on devices that have been configuredin IQ Central. The Scheduler functions as a Windows service, always running in thebackground. After a user schedules a particular event for a particular IQ Central device , thescheduler makes sure that those events occur on time.

With release version 1.0 of the IQ Central Scheduler, the only kind of events that can bescheduled are log retrievals from three types of traffic controllers: Peek 3000E controllers,Peek M3000E masters, and Multisonics OSAM masters. An interface is provided within IQCentral to program tasks for these kinds of devices. The full IQ Central Scheduler iscomposed of this interface, which is used to schedule tasks at some single point in thefuture or at regular intervals in the future, and the Windows service, which makes sure that

those task occur at the defined time or times.This package requires a properly installed and configured IQ Central system, version 1.2 orhigher, to operate. Scheduled log retrieval can be configured for the following trafficcontrollers using this module:

Table 28 – Traffic Controller support for scheduled log retrieval Translator FirmwareType of Traffic Controller

Part # Version

Controller FirmwareRequired

Multisonics OSAM-32 MasterController

97-599 v1.0.1 or higher v2.22

Peek 3000E Controller 97-602 v1.0.1 or higher v3.6.2

Peek M3000E Master Controller 97-601 v1.0.1 or higher v2.8.2

Once the data logs have been retrieved from one or more traffic controllers using thisScheduler module, they show up as data sets in the IQ Central Reports module .

Installing the IQ Central Scheduler To install IQ Central Scheduler on your IQ Central system, you will need the IQ CentralScheduler v1.0 installation CD. The scheduler must be installed on each computer where IQCentral is installed. The installation will require a system restart at the end of the process.

1. If a previous version of IQ Central Scheduler was installed on your system, you will

need to remove it before you can install the newer version. To do this, go to the Startmenu and choose Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs > IQ CentralScheduler. With the Scheduler highlighted in the programs list, choose Remove.

2. Place the IQ Central Scheduler v1.0 installation CD in the CD-ROM drive on your IQCentral computer. If you are going to install the program to a server and one or moreIQ Central workstations, start by installing the Scheduler on the IQ Central server.




179

3. Autoplay should automatically start the scheduler installation script, but if yoursystem is configured not to use Autoplay, browse to the CD directory and run theSetup.Exe file.

4. Follow the displayed steps to install the files. You will need to agree to the licenseagreement to continue with the install. On the third screen, Custom Setup, you have

the option to pick which components will be installed and to pick where the files willinstall. For a single computer system or the server of an IQ Central network, goahead and install everything. But you can use the Browse button to select a differentplace to install the program, if you wish.

5. Proceed through the rest of the install screens. On the last screen, select Finish toexit the installation program.

Note Although the scheduler program should be installed on each workstationwhere you might wish to access the schedule data, the schedule calendaritself is maintained in a centralized repository on the IQ Central server, sothat everyone can see the same schedule.

6. If you are installing the program to a single IQ Central computer, that completes theinstall. However if you have an IQ Central network, you’ll need to complete a couplemore steps to get the program working on all of the computers in your network.Repeat the above steps on each IQ Central workstation in your network, with thefollowing changes:

7. On each workstation other than the server, when the installation gets to the thirdscreen (Custom Setup), we want to deactivate the install of the Scheduler Service.The Scheduler Service should only be installed on the server. To deactivate thiscomponent, click on the Schedule Service item in the window and change its settingto Entire feature will be unavailable . Refer to the section below to see how thislooks in the window.

8. Change the install location if you wish, then proceed with the rest of the workstationinstall. Note that the Browse button will not become available again until you selectRequired again at the top of the list. This is to prevent individual components frombeing installed in different locations. On the last screen, select Finish to exit theinstallation program.

9. Repeat the install on each IQ Central workstation where you wish to use thescheduler.

10. Now we need to make sure that the data file of scheduled tasks is available in acentral location that can be accessed by the server (or single IQ Central computer)and all of the IQ Central workstations where Scheduler is installed.




180

Note The path to the network location of the IQ Central Scheduler task database can be either a mapped drive location or a UNC path. (Universal NamingConvention) Scheduler will work in either case, with one slight condition. Adrive mapping, such as assigning the server drive to be the P: drive, forexample, is only available if a user is logged in on the workstation. If thescheduled task is to occur when no users are logged into the workstation,the service may not be able to find the scheduled task file. Because of this,Peek recommends that you tell the Scheduler how to find the task file usingthe UNC path instead. As an example, if the workstation has a mapping ofdrive P: to be the C: drive on the server, which is where the centralscheduled task file is located, the two valid options are (assuming thescheduler was installed in the default location):

P:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ CentralScheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml

But the better choice would follow the UNC convention, which doesn’trequire a user mapping to find a network location (of the form:

\\servername\sharename\path\filename ).

In our case, it might look like this, if the sever on our network is called ‘IQCentralServer’ and there is no sharepath:

\\IQ CentralServer\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQCentral Scheduler\ Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml

11. If the location on the server is hidden to the workstations, you will need to move thedata file out to a network location where they can access this file. If this is the case,move the ScheduledTasks.xml file out to the desired network location, and thenlaunch IQ Central on the server.

12. Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing SystemScheduler.

13. When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.

14. Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. The Scheduler Optionswindow will show that the local scheduler is pointing to the original location of thetasks file. The default location is C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ CentralScheduler\Configuration\ScheduledTasks.xml, but this location may have changed ifyou installed the Scheduler to somewhere other than the default location during aCustom install. In either case, use the Browse button to locate the task file, called

ScheduledTasks.xml.15. Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window to

accept the new location.

16. Close the Scheduler.

17. On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and choose Manage.In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications groupand choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active servicesin Windows.




181

18. Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close theComputer Management window.

19. Now we need to make sure that each workstation is also pointing to this central taskdatabase file. Go to one of the workstations and launch IQ Central.

20. Open the Scheduler interface by opening the Tools menu and choosing SystemScheduler.

21. When the IQ Central Scheduler window opens, select Options from the Tools menu.

22. Now we need to point the Scheduler to the central task file. Use the Browse button tolocate the ScheduledTasks.xml task file.

23. Once you’ve located the task file, select OK in the Scheduler Options window toaccept the new location.

24. Close the Scheduler on the workstation and restart it.

25. Repeat steps 20 through 25 on each workstation.

This completes the installation of the IQ Central Scheduler.

Launching the Scheduler Interface The Scheduler service will start automatically each time Windows starts, but to access thetask configuration interface of IQ Central Scheduler, follow these steps:

1. Open IQ Central . Be sure to log in as a user that has sufficient rights to access theScheduler module .

2. Go to the Tools menu and choose System Scheduler .




182

Using the Scheduler Interface The Scheduler task configuration interface is shown in the figure below. There are four partsto the interface: the menu bar at the top, the tool bar just below that, the current task list onthe left side of the main window area, and the configuration fields on the right side of themain window area.

IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface

Figure 88 – Scheduled Task Editor

This interface is used to create, edit, delete, and manage traffic controller log retrieval tasks

in IQ Central. The menu commands are self-explanatory. The purpose of the five toolbarbuttons is shown in this figure:

Scheduler’s Toolbar

Figure 89 – Toolbar buttons in the Scheduled Task Editor

In the task list of the main Scheduler window, you can see all of the tasks that havecurrently been configured. The highlighted row or rows is the selected task or tasks, whichcan be deleted as a group. Editing can only occur on the row with the black triangle at theleft end, indicating which database record is currently selected. The current values of that




183

task’s data fields are shown in the right side of the window. The operator can make changesto any of those settings to change the selected task’s operation.

Additional detail about each task is available in the Complete tab that appears at the top ofthe right side of the window. For the most part, this is just the same data displayed in atabular format. One additional field that is important on the Complete tab, however, is the

DeviceDisplayName field at the top of the table. The text entered here shows up in the Tasklist right after the“Retrieve logs from “ label.

Scheduler’s Complete tab

Figure 90 – Complete task details These are the essentials of the IQ Central Scheduler task configuration interface. Forinstructions on performing specific operations with the Scheduler, refer to the followingtopics.




184

Adding a Scheduled Task If you wish to schedule a single or regularly-occurring retrieval of logs from a trafficcontroller in IQ Central, you can do this by creating a new task in the IQ Central Scheduler.To do this, you must have the device already configured and set up with a validcommunications channel (a ‘connection’ in IQ Central terminology.) To create a new task,open the Scheduler module and follow these steps:

1. Open the Add Task dialog box by either pressing the Add a New Task button in thetask bar (shown at right) or by going to the Edit menu and choosing Add New Task.

2. When the Add Task dialog box appears (see Figure 5), choose the device that willbe the target of the log request. The device list appears at the top of the Simple tab.

Figure 91 – Task creation dialog box

3. Select which of the six available log types to retrieve from the device by placingchecks in the checkboxes next to each type. You can choose one, or multiple logs.

Note The precise information that appears in each of these data sets is dependenton the device from which you are retrieving the data. The grouping of data intologs is handled differently by each type of controller and master.

4. Select how regularly the task should occur. It can be daily, weekly, or monthly.

5. If you selected Weekly, choose which days of the week you wish the retrieval tooccur. If you selected Monthly, select which day of the month.






186

Deleting a Schedule Task To delete a task or multiple tasks in the IQ Central Scheduler module , follow these steps:

1. Open the Scheduler interface.

2. Select the task to be deleted in the list on the left side of the window. If you want to

delete multiple tasks at once, you can shift-select to add a whole range of tasks, orCtrl-select to add individual tasks to the highlighted list. Make sure all of the tasksyou wish to delete are highlighted, and more importantly, none that you don't want todelete are highlighted. (See figure below.)

Figure 92 – Selecting multiple tasks for deletion 3. To delete the selected tasks, either press the Delete Selected Task(s) button in the

toolbar (shown at right), or go to the Edit menu and choose Delete selected task(s).

4. Although the task or tasks are deleted in memory, the change has not yet beenstored to the Tasks database . To do that you can either close the Scheduler interface(this will not interfere with task events, since those are handled by the backgroundWindows Scheduler service) or you can press the Save Changes button. (Shown atright)

This completes the deletion of tasks in IQ Central Scheduler.

Changing the Location of the Task Database If you wish to move the location of the IQ Central Scheduler tasks database , you can movethe file manually, but you will also need to point all of the Scheduler modules on all IQCentral workstations to find the file in the new location . The file itself is calledScheduledTasks.xml , a standard XML data file. By default, it is stored at C:\Program Files\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central Scheduler\Configuration\ . This filecan be moved anywhere where all Scheduler clients can access it, either locally or across anetwork. Once the file has been moved, open the Scheduler interface on each workstation,and follow these steps:




187

1. Go to the Tools menu and open the Options window.

Figure 93 – Options dialog box for the System Scheduler

2. Select the Browse button and navigate to the new location of the tasks file.

3. Highlight the tasks file and select Open.

4. Select OK to save the new database location.

5. Restart the Scheduler interface.

6. The next few steps are only important on the one machine where the Schedulerservice is running. This would be on the stand-alone computer, or the server of theIQ Central system, if that's where the IQ Central Scheduler was defined to run onyour network. On the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon andchoose Manage.

7. In the Computer Management window, click on the Services and Applications groupand choose the Services item. This will display a list of the currently active servicesin Windows.

8. Right-click on Peek Scheduler and choose Restart. After it restarts, close theComputer Management window.

9. Repeat this process on the other workstations, if there are any.

This completes the process of changing the location of the scheduled tasks database file.




188



189

Chapter 11 – Alarm MonitoringPrior to version 1.5 of IQ Central, alarm monitoring in the software was linked solely to theMap Viewing module. This limited its usefulness considerably, so a new global devicemonitoring alarms system has been created and added to IQ Central.

The core of the new alarm monitoring system is the IQ Alarm Processor, a Windows Servicethat now runs in the background and is automatically started whenever the server ispowered up, and is automatically restarted if it should ever go down (for example, when theoffice loses power or when Windows locks up.)

The other components of the new alarm monitoring function include an AlarmConfigurations module, where new alarm tests are defined for devices, an Alarm Statusviewer module, Alarm and Device History reports, and a new status bar that indicatesoverall alarm status with an icon and informative tooltip text.

The basic idea for performing alarm monitoring in IQ Central follow these six steps:

1. Install the Peek IQ Alarm Processor along with IQ Central

2. Define what data, when retrieved from devices, will cause IQ Central to raise analarm

3. Define how alarm states are indicated in the IQ Central interface (in the Status barand in the Alarm Status module)

4. Monitor the status bar to see when alarms are detected

5. When an alarm is detected, open the Alarm Status module to get the details andthen either handle the situation or acknowledge the alarm to be handled later.

6. To diagnose ongoing or chronic problems, use the history reports in the Alarm Statusmodule to troubleshoot the problem.

The next sections describe how to use the various parts of the alarm monitoring system thatwere introduced above.




190

Using the Alarm Configuration WindowThe Alarm Configuration window is a standalone application that is launched from within IQCentral. It performs the function of allowing a user to define what alarm conditions willtrigger alarms within IQ Central. These alarm conditions are based on data retrieved fromdevices via Map Polling . So the operator configures IQ Central to retrieve certain NTCIP

data objects from a set device or type of device, and the Alarm Configuration window is thenused to define what operating limits will be used to trigger alerts within IQ Central's alarmsystem.

Launching the Alarm Configuration Window The Alarm Configuration window can be launched in a couple of ways:

Go to the Tools menu, open the Alarms group and choose Configuration

or

Right-click on the alarm icon located in the IQ Central status bar (at the

bottom of the main window) and choose Alarm Configuration

Alarm Configuration Interface

The Alarm Configure window's interface is described below. It has four basic areas:

a device list on the left

an inherited alarm condition area in the upper right,

the defined alarm condition list in the middle right

buttons to add, delete and save changes to the alarm conditions list, in the bottom rightof the window



Chapter 11 – Alarm Monitoring

191

Figure 94 – Alarm Configuration window

It's important to remember that this interface doesn't show anything about the current state of alarms . It only shows what alarm conditions have been defined.

Alarm conditions can be defined globally, for all devices in the system, by entering themunder the System node. Or they can be defined for a device type or group type by definingthe alarm condition at that level. Or they can be defined on a device-by-device basis, byentering the condition at the lowest level of the device hierarchy tree. The left side of theinterface shows the list of devices in a variety of formats, based on which tab is selected atthe bottom of the area. The default view is 'View by Group', which is shown in the illustrationbelow.




192

Figure 95 – Device Hierarchy - 'View by Groups'

Each device, group or device type, or the System node is given a graphical icon whichshows what alarm conditions have been defined for that node. The appearance of this iconfollows these rules:

Node Icon Meaning

No alarm conditions are defined or inherited at this node level

At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level

At least one alarm condition has been defined at this node level AND ithas also inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher in thedevice tree

This node has inherited at least one alarm condition from a node higher in the device tree




193

View By Type Display

The 'View by Type' tab in this window works in the same way as the 'View by Groups',except that the device trip in the left part of the window is organized by device type, ratherthan Groups. This tree view uses the same node icons to indicate assigned and inheritedalarm conditions, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 96 – Alarm Configuration window - "View by Type"




194

All Alarms Display

The final method of organizing the device tree is a simple 'All Alarms' view, which simplylists all of the configured alarms in the system. Alarm conditions cannot be added, edited ordeleted in this view, although the list can be sorted. As you can see from the figure below,this is a list of all alarm conditions sorted by Severity level.

Figure 97 – Alarm Configuration window - "All Alarms"

It is useful to note that if you find the alarm condition you're looking for in the All Alarmsdisplay, select it, and switch back to one of the other two displays, you will be presented

with the editing controls for that device and alarm condition.For details on how to create, delete, or modify an alarm condition, refer to the "Setting Up aNew Alarm" topic.




195

Using the Alarm Status WindowThe Alarm Status module is used to view and track all of the alarms that are currently activein the system. An alarm is 'active' if no data has been received that acts as a 'cleared' statefor the alarm. (The clear state for an alarm is defined when one defines an alarm condition.)

Launching the Alarm Status Module There are a couple of methods that can be used to launch the Alarm Status module:

Go to the Tools menu, choose Alarms , and then select the Status command

or

Right-click on the alarm status icon in the IQ Central status bar at the bottom of the IQCentral window, and choose Alarm Status .

or, probably the easiest option:

Press the F7 function key.

Using the Alarm Status Interface When the Alarm Status module appears, it shows a list of all of the currently active alarms,meaning device data that was retrieved during polling and resulted in tripping an alarmcondition. 'Current Alarms' are those that have not been cleared by the data going back intothe acceptable range. Alarms that have been 'acknowledged' in the main IQ Central windowwill show up in this list.

Figure 98 – Alarm Status window

The alarms list is sorted by date and severity, by default, but it can be resorted by the userat any time by clicking on one of the column headers in the list. Clicking on a column headeragain will toggle the sort between ascending and descending sorts.




196

The Dock/Restore button tells the Alarm Status window to 'dock' itself along the left edge ofthe IQ Central window or to return to its previous position.

The Auto Refresh feature is OFF by default. This option tells the module whether or not toupdate the current list with the latest alarms that have occurred. The Refresh View buttonwill perform this refresh of the list manually, whenever the button is pressed. The Auto

Refresh refreshes the current alarms list every 10 seconds or so.

Note It may be useful to turn off the auto-refresh function when you have sortedthe list in some manner, because the auto-refresh function will automaticallyreturn the alarm list to its default sort criteria of ascending date anddescending severity.

The buttons at the bottom left of the window provide access to the alarm history viewer withtwo different filtering criteria, each based on whichever current alarm row is selected in thecurrent list. The Display Alarm History option opens the Alarm History viewer and filters thelist by the currently selected alarm type. The Display Device History option opens the AlarmHistory viewer and filters the list by all alarms (current and historic) that have occurred forthe selected device.

The background and text colors that appear in the Alarm Status window's alarm list can bemodified using the Settings controls located in the Alarm Configuration module.

Note Some useful information about setting up polling for alarm monitoring isprovided in the topic "Using the Polling Assistant" in the Polling &Scheduling Events chapter.




197

Setting Up a New AlarmThis topic describes how to create new alarm conditions in IQ Central, and also how todelete alarm conditions, and modify existing alarm conditions.

Creating a New Alarm Condition

These are the steps to perform when you want to set up a new device-based alarmcondition in IQ Central:

1. Open the Alarm Configuration module. ( Tools menu > Alarms > Configuration , orright-click on the alarm icon in the status bar and choose Alarm Configuration )

2. If you are hoping to apply the alarm condition to a device type, switch the view toView by Type with the tab at the left end of the bottom edge of the window.

3. On the left side of the window, select the group, device type or device for which youwish to define the alarm condition. (If it will be an alarm condition that is to apply toall devices in the system, choose the System node.)

4. Click on the Add button at the bottom of the alarm conditions list.A new item will appear in the alarm condition list. Alarm conditions have somegraphical indicators to provide information about the state of the alarm conditiondefinition, as shown in the next figure.

Figure 99 – Features of the alarm conditions list in the Alarm Configuration window

5. Select an alarm Type from the drop-down list. This list is populated based on whattype of device or devices are covered by the selected node.

6. Choose the Severity of the alarm that will be generated should this condition bebreached. The Severity of an alarm condition is used to determine how IQ Centralwill respond when this level severity of alarm appears. Whether or not the status baralarm icon blinks, or if it generates a tooltip text message, or if there is an audioindication that this type of alarm has arrived are defined by severity level in the Alarmsystem Settings window .




198

7. Type a Message that will appear when the alarm condition is detected. Thismessage will also be stored in the Historical Alarm database.

8. If the alarm condition has an expanded detail arrow in the corner, click on it toaccess the extra data fields that are available to define this type of alarm condition.

Figure 100 – Example of data fields in the expanded alarm conditions view

9. Fill in any additional fields required to define the alarm condition. An expanded alarmcondition view can provide extra fields to define what inputs are used and how theymathematically tested, or it can provide a way for you to only test individual bits in aretrieved data object.

10. Once the alarm condition is defined, you will see a yellow triangle at the upper leftcorner of the alarm row. This indicates that the condition has been modified, but notsaved. Press the Save button at the bottom of the list. The yellow triangle shoulddisappear.

That completes the creation of an alarm condition. The new alarm condition becomesactive as soon as you save it. You can create or edit more conditions, or exit the window atthis point.




199

Editing an Existing Alarm ConditionTo edit an alarm condition, follow these steps:


2. Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.3. Select the alarm condition that you wish to change.

4. Make the desired change. You may need to expand the alarm condition box to seeall of the fields that define it.

5. When you are finished modifying the alarm condition, press the Save button at thebottom of the alarm conditions list.

That completes the modification of an alarm condition. The new settings for the alarmcondition become active as soon as you save the alarm. You can create or edit moreconditions, or exit the window at this point.

Deleting an Alarm ConditionTo delete an alarm condition, follow these steps:


2. Select the node in the device tree for which the alarm condition is defined.

3. Select the alarm condition that you wish to delete.

4. Press the Delete button at the bottom of the list. Notice that the alarm condition is notremoved from the list immediately, however the yellow triangle does appear at thetop left corner of the alarm condition. This means that the alarm condition has beenmarked for deletion.

Caution Before proceeding, be sure you have marked the correct alarmcondition for deletion. Once the alarm condition is deleted and thechange is Saved, it cannot be recovered. It will need to be re-created ifyou wish to use that alarm condition again.

5. Press the Save button at the bottom of the list to finish deleting the alarm condition.

That completes the deletion of an alarm condition. The old alarm condition will go inactiveas soon as you save the deletion.




200

Handling AlarmsIf you have configured alarm conditions in your alarm system, alarms will begin showing upin your IQ Central interface in a number of ways, depending on how you configured youralarm system and what severity level of alarms are being detected. IQ Central providestools for monitoring alarms, but how your office handles these alarms will depend on using

procedures that respond to the signals that IQ Central provides.1. When a Critical level alarm (typically) arrives, you may have configured it to give a

pop-up message in the status bar (as shown below). This pop-up will not disappearuntil you acknowledge the alarms. This is intended to make sure that serious alarmsare actually seen by human eyes.

Figure 101 – A critical alarm configured to display a tooltip popup message

2. To acknowledge such an alarm, right click on the alarm icon in the status bar. (Thealarm icon, by the way, will always show the highest level of alarm that is currentlyactive in the system.) In the popup menu, choose Acknowledge Alarm . This does notclear the alarm or remove it from the Alarm Status viewer. It just removes theimmediate alert.

Figure 102 – Acknowledge the alarm to temporarily remove the tooltip message from your IQ Central display

3. Presumably, at this point, you will wish to dispatch someone to address the problemwith the device, or at least schedule some action.

4. For normal status monitoring, you may wish to keep the Alarm Status window openas a status monitoring tool in your IQ Central interface. If you open the Alarm Statusmodule (F7), choose the Dock button, and check the Auto Refresh checkbox, thismodule will sit on the left edge of your IQ Central window and continuously update toshow the current state of active alarms. Keeping this module open will not changethe way that the alarm icon in the status bar behaves.




201

Figure 103 – The Alarm Status module docked to the IQ Central window and auto refreshing

5. Another way to monitor the normal status of alarms is to hover over the alarm icon inthe toolbar. This will present a summary of the current alarm condition within IQCentral at the moment, as shown below.

Figure 104 – Current alarm status tooltip visible when hovering over the alarm icon

6. You may wish to attempt to troubleshoot an alarm. One way to do this is to select thealarm in the Alarm Viewer module and use the two buttons at the bottom of themodule to investigate the history of this type of alarm and this device within yoursystem.




202

Configuring the Alarms SystemThe Alarms system has a set of global parameters that determine how the system operates,based on alarm severity level. These parameters determine how the alarm service presentsan incoming alarm, in both audio and visual representation.

Opening the Alarm Parameters The Alarm Parameters window is accessible from the Alarm Configuration module. Followthese steps to open the Alarm Parameters window:


2. Click on the Settings button at the bottom of the Alarm Configuration window. (shownat right)

3. Select the tab for the alarm severity level whose behavior you wish to modify.

Setting the Parameters There are three levels of alarms available in IQ Central: simple informational alarms, moreserious Warning alarms, and the most important 'Critical' alarms which usually deal withoperational shutdowns, security issues, or serious safety issues. The Alarms SystemSettings window has three tabs of settings, one for each type of alarm. The same controlsare available on each pane, but the settings are independent of one another.

Typical Settings for a Critical Alarm

The following figure shows what the Critical Settings pane looks like with some typicalvalues entered.

Figure 105 – Alarm System Settings - Critical settings




203

Audio Settings

No Sound – As the name suggests, when this severity level of alarm arrives, IQ Centraldoes not make a sound. This is typically the setting for Informational alarms.

System Sound – This option tells IQ Central to play one of the standard Windows systemsounds when this type of alarm arrives.

Play Wave File – Another option to the System Sound above is to provide IQ Central withyour own audio file (a .wav file) to be played whenever this severity of alarm arrives. It'simportant to keep this sound file short, say no more than 5 seconds, so that many incomingalarms will not step on one another during their audio alerts. To use this option, click on thePlay Wave File check box and then press the Browse button to open an Open file dialogbox where you can navigate to, and select, your desired audio file.

Test – This button toggles between 'Test' and 'Stop Test'. When the test is activated, it willplay either the system sound or the selected .wav file, using the repeat interval specifiedbelow.

Repeat Interval – This setting tells IQ Central how many seconds to wait before repeatingthe sound. This repetition will continue until the alarm is 'acknowledged' in the Status bar.Setting this value to 0 tells the alarm system to play the sound only once and stop.

Visual Settings

Fore Color – The color of the font text that will appear in the Alarm Status module for analarm with this severity level.

Back Color – The color of the background for an alarm of this severity level as it appears inthe Alarm Status module.

Flash Repeat Interval – This tells IQ Central whether or not to blink the alarm icon in the IQCentral status bar. To configure a flashing icon, check this checkbox, and then set thenumber of seconds for each phase of the flash. (e.g. Setting a value of 2 here will cause theicon to stay ON for 2 seconds and then go OFF for 2 seconds, for a flash cycle length of 4seconds.)

Show Popup – This tells IQ Central to display a persistent pop-up tooltip window over thealarm icon in the Status bar whenever this level of alarm arrives. This is typically only turnedON for critical alarms, because this kind of display will require a user to 'acknowledge' eachalarm that arrives before the pop-up can be dismissed from the screen. Setting this valueON for informational alarms, for example, could result in an annoying situation in which theuser is perpetually required to acknowledge incoming alarms while working with IQ Central.

After you've made changes to the available settings, you can either switch to the otheralarm severity panes and make changes there, or you can click OK to save the new settingsand leave the Alarm System Settings window, or click Cancel to discard your changes andexit the settings window.




204

Typical Settings for A Warning Alarm

Figure 106 – Alarm System Settings - Warning settings

As an example of how the Warning alarm indicators may be set up, the above dialog boxshows that this type of alarm will cause a custom sound file to play once, and then the alarmwill appear in the Alarm Status module with an orange background with black text. Thealarm icon will not blink and no popup will appear over the IQ Central status bar.

Typical Settings for an Informational Alarm

Figure 107 – Alarm System Settings - Info settings

Finally, the above screen shows how one might configure an Info alarm to be alerted withinIQ Central. In this example, the arrival of an Informational alarm will not generate any soundeffects, nor will it flash the alarm icon or show a popup message. This type of alarm willappear as a yellow row with brown text in the Alarm Status module.



205

Chapter 12 – ReportsThere are three sources of data for reports within IQ Central: device configurations, deviceactivity, and user activity. Reports on device configurations would include data about howmany and what types of devices are configured in IQ Central. Reports on device activity

would include event log reports, performance data, environmental data, and any other datacollection logs that the devices collect. And reports on user activity could include IQ Centrallogin/logout and account activity records, as well as any front panel interface activity logs

that are collected by field devices.

Report generation in IQ Central is based on the reporting tools of the Microsoft Accessdatabase in which IQ Central stores its data. A set of pre-configured reports is included inthe IQ Central Report Selection Module , but additional reports can be configured for IQCentral using your own copy of Microsoft Access and its report configuration tools.

Using the Reports InterfaceThe Report Selection window in IQ Central is used to select from a list of pre-configuredreports. When a report is selected and you select the Create Report button, the data isretrieved from the IQ Central Access database and formatted as a Word file. Once visible inthe Word window, all of the tools of the Word environment are available. This means thatthe appearance of the report can be reformatted to meet your needs, or a template can beapplied to meet a standard report layout. This also means that the data in the report can beexported using any of the Word export filters.

Only one report can be selected and created at a time. If the report you need is not visibleon the list, it is possible to create a new report using the Access database environment.

Applying Report Filters The Report Selection window also allows the operator to select what filters or sorting criteriato use when generating the report.

Note Some of the reports do not utilize all of these filter selections.

First check the box next to the report that is required. Then select the parameters that willfurther define the report. Each of the report filters is described below. Once you have madethe required selections, click on the Create Report button to process the report.

Date Range

If you click on “For Date Range”, the Date Range fields will open allowing you to select therequired date range for the report. Click on the drop down list box for Start Date and EndDate to open a calendar page from which you can select the required dates.

If you click on “For All Dates” the Date Range selection boxes will not be displayed and thereport will be generated for all dates.




206

Device Type

If you click on “For Selected Device Type”, the available Device Types will be listed in thewindow and you will be able to select the required Device Type by highlighting the requireddevice Type in the drop down list

If you click on “For All Device Types”, the Device Type selection will not be displayed and

the report will be generated for all Device Types.

Devices

If you click on “For Selected Devices”, all the Devices for the selected Device Types will belisted, allowing you to select a specific device. Click the drop down list box and highlight therequired device.

If you click on “For All Devices”, the Device selection will not be displayed and the report willbe generated for all devices.

Users

If you click on “For Selected Users”, a Users list will open, allowing you select a specificuser. Click the drop down list box and highlight the required user.

If you click on “For All Users”, the User selection will not be displayed and the report will begenerated for all Users.



Chapter 12 – Reports

207

Generating Source Data for ReportingIt is important to remember when running an IQ Central report that the process of runningthe report generates no new data. It counts entirely on the existing data stored in the IQCentral Access database . There are a couple of different methods/tools used to populate thedatabase with the data you will need. Data comes from possible sources:

User activity

Device configuration data

Device log files

Getting this data into the access database depends on the source and type of data. Somedata, like IQ Central user activity, is automatically logged by the software. This is why usersmust log in when starting the application. Other data is created as a side-effect of normaluser operation, such as device configuration information. When you create an instance of adevice type, the information for the device is stored in the database and becomes availablefor reporting.

The third source of data, however, requires a bit more IQ Central configuration. Devicesoften keep data logs of what is going on in and around their location. To store this data inthe IQ Central database, there are a couple of methods, depending on the type of deviceand the type of log:

Alarms and Status event logs This kind of data can be retrieved by IQ Central using the Log Polling functionality. Thisinvolves regularly sending out a message to a device and asking for the status of pre-configured pieces of data. This kind of data retrieval should be used sparingly, since regularreporting of many data points can quickly generate a huge amount of data. This type of dataretrieval can be done for any type of device and is called Log Polling.

Controller Log Retrieval Traffic controllers are often configured to store large amounts of operational, user access,and environmental data on-board. This information can be pulled back into IQ Central usingscheduled log retrieval. This source of data is only available for controllers and mastercontrollers, and the exact data that is available depends on the make and model ofcontroller being accessed.

Message Sign Log Retrieval Another source of error log data is message signs. Message Signs can be configured tocollect user-defined error logs, and these logs can be retrieved into the IQ Central database

using the Message Sign Bulk Operations module.




208

Exporting Report DataOnce a report has been created using the Report Selection module , it is presented in aWord window. In Word, you have the option to export the report data in a variety of formats.

Basic Export

1. If you want to keep the basic report before making any changes, save the Word file.

2. If you just want the table headers and data, highlight the report's header and deleteit.

3. Open the File menu and choose Save As.

4. In the Save as type: pull-down list, choose the type of data export you wish togenerate. Common types of data export include: XML, HTM, RTF (rich text format),or TXT file.

5. Type a file name and save the file.

Structured Export 1. If the basic method doesn't provide enough data structure for the final destination,

you can perform a bit more pre-export manipulation to get a more usable datasource. Again, delete any non-data text from the file. But keep the columnheaders. The text to remove may include header and report footer text, as well asgraphical elements such as rules.

2. Now we need to convert the data text to a table. Highlight the data, including theheader row. Go to the Table menu and choose Convert > Text to Table.

3. When asked for details on the conversion method to use, remember that the numberof columns will usually equal the visible number of columns plus one (for an initialspacing tab), and be sure to separate the columns at ' Tabs '.

4. If there is a blank column at the left edge of the table, highlight it and go to the Table menu and choose Delete > Columns to remove it.

5. Verify that the table is logically consistent. If there are problems with the conversion,you can undo the conversion ( Edit > Undo , or CTRL -Z) and try again.

6. When the data is complete and correctly formatted within the table, highlight thetable and Copy it.

7. Open Microsoft Excel.

8. Past the table into Excel.

9. Save the data file. You now have an easily-ported data file of the report.



Chapter 12 – Reports

209

Creating a Custom ReportThe method to create a custom report in IQ Central requires you to close IQ Central andopen the IQ Central database with Microsoft Access. The creation of Access reports takes abit of knowledge and practice, but it is very powerful. The basic process is described here:

1. Close IQ Central.

2. In Windows, navigate to the location of your IQ Central database. The file is calledNTCIPServerDB.mdb. The default location for this database file is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic Corp\IQ Central\.

3. When you find the file, double-click it to open it in Microsoft Access.

4. Click on the Reports button on the left side of the database window.

5. A report is based on a set of data. You can use either a simple data Table (such asthe table 'DeviceList') or a Query as your data source. A query is a way to sort,merge, combine, filter, or repackage the data on one or more tables into a new listingthat shows only the data you want. If the table or query already exists from which

you wish to pull your report, you can go ahead and start building the report. If not,you will need to go to the Query section of the database and put together the dataset you need. Only after you've got the set of data you wish to report on can youstart to generate the report. (Once a query is set up, the next time you run the reportthe query will go back to the source data tables and update itself. In this way, thereport will include the latest data stored in the database.)

6. To create a report from scratch, you can either generate a new report by clicking theNew button at the top of the window or click on the 'Create report by using wizard'option at the top of the Reports list. In either case, the first step will be to name thereport. The second step will be to tell Access what data set (Table or Query) to useas the report's data source.To create a report by modifying an existing design, select the report that you want toemulate, choose Copy, and then Paste it to a new file name. When the new fileappears in the Reports list, highlight it and click the Design button at the top of thewindow. Keep in mind that the name you give a report is the name that will appear inIQ Central's Report Selection list.

Note A report's name is important. If you wish to hide a report so thatit will not appear in the Report Selection list, just start the reportsname with an underscore character ('_') AND ALSO right-clickon the report, select Properties, and make sure the Hiddencheck box is checked. One may wish to do this if one is creatinga single report with several sub-reports within it. You probablywould not want the sub-reports to show up on the Report

Selection list in IQ Central. Just give them names that start withan underscore, such as '_Critical Alarms', and call the sub-report from a master report that doesn't start with anunderscore, such as 'Alarm Events'.

7. Select a data source for the report, place the fields you want to appear in the report,and format the text fields and labels as desired.

8. Save the report.




210

9. Test it to see if it presents the data you need in the manner you had hoped for.

10. Tweak and save the report until it fits your requirements.

11. Close Access.

12. Restart IQ Central.

13. Open the Report Selection window and verify that your new report appears in the list.



211

Chapter 13 – User Management & SecurityThe IQ Central has a three tiered user-level security system that limits what each logged-inuser can access within the IQ Central environment. It controls access by requiring that allusers log into the system before they can perform an actions. By default, the system is

delivered with three User Accounts, each with its own preset Password, already created.Table 29 – Pre-configured User Accounts

User Name Password Access Level

Level1 1 Operations

Level2 2 Maintenance

Level3 3 Administration

It would be wise of you to add your own Users Accounts. After you've created your own useraccounts, you can then delete the above standard accounts so that you have complete

control over who has access to your system, and at what level. Keep in mind that only userswith Administration Level access have full control of the system, including the ability to addand delete other User Accounts.

The system will not allow you to delete the Administration user if you have not first createdanother Administration user. We advise that you not limit the access of the AdministrationAccess Level (as defined in the Access Levels module .) The Administration level of accessshould always have full read-write ability for all functions. This is important so that you haveat least one level of users that has access to the full functionality of the system.

For more details on how to manage user accounts and the general security of IQ Central,please check the related topics below.




212

Managing User AccountsUser Accounts are used to control who can access what parts of the IQ Central interface.User accounts are split into three levels of access: Operations level, Maintenance Level,and Administration level. The exact access that each of these levels gains is set using theAccess Levels module , which is discussed in the Managing IQ Central Security topics. But

managing the accounts themselves is done mostly using the User Management controlsunder the Tools menu. Unless you change the settings yourself, user managementfunctions are only available to those users with Administration access.

Note Even if a user does not have administrative level access to IQ Central, he orshe can still change the account password on his or her own account.

The primary tool used to perform these functions is the User Administration Module .

Adding a New User Account

Open the User Administration module by going to the Tools menu and selecting UserAdministration , then click on Add/Delete . Note that the User Administration tools are onlyavailable to users with Administration level access.

To add a new User, select the required level (Operations, Maintenance or Administration)from the drop down list at the top of the window. Click on the New button and the New Userfields at the bottom of the window will become available for input. Enter the Name of thenew user as well as their Password. The Password must be entered twice, in the Passwordfield and in the Confirm field, in order to verify that you have typed what you thought youdid. Passwords can be anything up to 10 characters in length, can contain letters and/ornumbers, and are case-sensitive.

Once you have filled in the fields, choose the Add button to add the new user to the list

above. Verify that the user appears in the left window, and verify that this list is showing theproper access level, as indicated by the selected item in the top pull-down box and also bythe color-coding of the name itself.

When you are finished adding new accounts, select Close to exit the User Administrationmodule.

Deleting a User Account To remove a User Account from the system, open the User Administration module by goingto the Tools menu and choosing User Administration, then clicking on Add/Delete. Onlyusers with Administration level accounts can access the commands in the UserAdministration submenu. In the window, make sure the user's account you wish to delete

appears in the right-side window. (Accounts in the left-side window do not activate theRemove button when selected.) To make the account appear in the right-side list, makesure the access level pull down at the top of the window is set to one of the other two levelsto which this user does NOT belong. That moves those types of users to the left-side list,and your user will then appear in the right-side list. Now, highlight the Name of the user'saccount you wish to delete and click the Remove button.

When you are asked to verify the deletion of the account, be sure you are deleting thecorrect account, and choose Yes to proceed. Choose No if you decide to keep the account.






214

4. Type the new password again in the Confirm field.

5. Press the Change button to make the modification to your user account.

6. Click Close to exit the Change Password dialog box.

Setting a User Password Passwords are attached to individual User accounts. Passwords can be anything up to 10characters in length, can contain letters and/or numbers, and are case-sensitive. Pleasemake a note of your password, as it is stored on the system in an encrypted format so thereis no way to retrieve the password if you forget it.

Typically, there are only two ways to modify a password: either by the Administrator userwhen the User Account is first created, or by the logged-in user himself. However, there is awork-around method to change the password of an existing account if you are anAdministration user.

To Change the Password of another User if You are an Administration User

1. Open the User Administration module . (Tools menu > User Administration >Add/Delete) or via the Toolbar button.

2. Write down the name of the account you wish to modify. Be sure to match the caseof all letters in the Name.

3. Make sure the selected security level (Operations/Maintenance/Administration) issomething other than the one assigned to the target user.

4. Select the User Account in the right-side list.

5. Press Remove to delete the account. Verify that you do wish to remove the account.

6. Select the Security Level that you wish the user to have with the new passwordusing the pull-down list at the top of the window.

7. Click the New... button.

8. Type in the name of the account you just deleted. Be sure to match the accountname exactly.

9. Enter the new password in both the Password and the Confirm fields.

10. Press the Add button to add the user account.

11. Click on the Close button to exit the User Administration module.

The account now exists with a new password.



Chapter 13 – User Management & Security

215

User Administration ModuleThe User Administration module allows an Administration level user to add, delete, andmodify the security level of user login accounts within IQ Central. Click on the image belowto see additional details about the controls in this module.

Figure 108 – User Administration module




216

Managing SecuritySecurity within IQ Central is enforced by the fact that every user who wishes to use thecontrols of the system and access the devices being managed must first log into the systembefore any controls are available. User Management is a separate part of this process, andis described in the Managing User Accounts topics.

But after user accounts have been defined, there are several other tools for reviewing,modifying and monitoring system security, as described in the following topics:

Device Security (NTCIP device passwords) - Only available for Message Signs in IQCentral v1.1 through v1.4

Access Levels for user accounts

Viewing a list of all logged in users

As an example of the importance of maintaining system security, please notice what canhappen if the wrong person has access to the Central Override capability for trafficcontrollers in IQ Central. A Central Override can be sent to one or many devices. If anunauthorized person were to send a central override to multiple traffic controllers in yoursystem, and say, they put those intersections into Flash mode during rush hour, one canimagine that this would cause a serious safety problem, as well as a logistics nightmare. Forthis reason, Flash override commands require a user to type in his or her user account loginand password again, before the override command will be sent. But, of course, this safetyfeature emphasizes the importance of maintaining network security. If the networkadministrator has not maintained control of user accounts and passwords, access to criticalfeatures such as Flash overrides may be available to personnel who should not have it.

Currently Logged In Users This module performs two important functions:

It lists all of the user sessions that are currently logged into IQ Central. This includes alllocal logins as well as all users across a network, if you have a networked IQ Centralsystem. It also may include some agent logins, such as the IQ Central scheduler serviceor the IQ Alarm Processing service.

It allows an administrator level user to shut down another user login remotely. This isintended to allow an administrative level user to restart an entire IQ Central network fromone workstation when necessary for database maintenance.

Opening the Currently Logged In Users window

The Currently Logged on Users command on the Tools > User Administration menu displays a listing of all of the users that are currently logged into IQ Central. Oryou can use the Currently Logged in Users button on the User Administration toolbar(shown at right.)






218

Access Levels ModuleYou can set various access levels for each user that has access to the system. Thefunctions that a particular user can access are set based upon the Security Level that is setfor that operator.

Each User Account has a security level allocated when the account is created. IQ Centralhas three default security levels: Operations, Maintenance, and Administration. Everymodule and window in IQ Central has controls on it. Using the Access Levels module, youcan specify which controls are accessible by each level of user. Each level can have one ofthree types of access allocated – Read-Write, Read Only, or Not Accessible. Read-Writeallows the user full access to the field or control function. Read-Only allows limited access,(i.e. the user can only view the field or control function, but cannot make changes.) And NotAccessible renders that field or control completely unavailable to that level of user.

Note It is important to remember that 'Security Level' and 'Access Level' are twoseparate concepts within IQ Central. Security Level is the level assigned toan individual user account, which is selected from the three pre-configuredsecurity levels. Access level, on the other hand, is a way of modifying whatthe members of the Operations, Maintenance, and Administration groupscan access within the IQ Central interface. Security Level assigns the levelsto users; Access Levels define exactly what each of those levels can do.

Version 1.6 also added a couple of enhancements to the Access Levels module. First, thecolumns of the table can now be used to sort the table by that column's data. Just click onthe column header to switch between an ascending or a descending sort order. And asecond change is that the MDI item in the Access Levels list (Choose 'MDI' in the SelectWindow field), which is used to control what menus and interface elements are accessibleby each of the three user groups, now includes a full listing of the command path for themenu item in the Description field. This is very helpful when an administrator is trying to

restrict access to particular controls in IQ Central. The figure below shows the Access LevelModule's MDI list, sorted by the Description field.

Figure 110 – MDI selection in the Access Levels window



Chapter 13 – User Management & Security

219

The MDI selection in the Access Levels window allows an administrator to control whatcommands each group can see (and use) in the IQ Central menus

Changing the Access Level for a Module Control

1. To do this, click on the Select Form drop down list box and highlight the form forwhich you want to set access levels.

2. Each control that is available on the form will be listed in the Control name list. Thedescription field provides you with a brief description of what the function of thecontrol is. Select the control you wish to modify.

3. When the control is selected, its details will be displayed in the edit fields below thedata window. Select the applicable access requirement for each Level and click onthe Apply button.




220



221

Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance &Backup

IQ Central uses an Access database to store all device data, event log information, program

data, and system logs. The topics in this section describe how to work with the database,how to keep it operating correctly, and how to backup and restore part or all of thedatabase.

Working in the IQ Central Access DatabaseIQ Central stores most of its configuration and customer information in a single MicrosoftAccess™ database . Some configuration of IQ Central requires that the operator open thisdatabase and make some modifications directly to the tables stored there. If you need toopen and modify the IQ Central database, be aware of the following facts:

The central Access database for IQ Central is stored at C:\Documents and

Settings\All Users\Application Data\Peek Traffic\IQ Central\ . The file is calledNTCIPServerDB.mdb . This area of your hard drive may have been locked down byyour IT staff. However, to use IQ Central, you will have already requested Administrationaccess to this folder in order to use the application.

This database file will always be stored in the above location, no matter where youinstalled the rest of IQ Central.

Caution BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN EDITING THE DATABASE DIRECTLY.FOLLOW DIRECTIONS ABOUT DOING SO EXPLICITLY, SINCE

MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE IN THE DATABASE WHILEYOU ARE WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER YOUR IQCentral INSTALLATION INOPERABLE.

When editing values in Microsoft Access, your changes will be saved automaticallywhenever you exit a record.

It is OK to edit the values stored in the IQ Central tables in Access, but do not changethe names of the tables themselves, or the field column names within those tables.




222

Here is a list of the tables included with an installation of IQ Central:

Figure 111 – IQ Central database table listing

To edit the contents of a table, simply double-click on the table to open it, highlight the cellyou wish to change, and type your change.



Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup

223

System LoggingIQ Central has several tools that allow the system to record a history of events that haveoccurred during operation. This System Log keeps track of user activity, changes to thedevice and connections lists, communications events, and optionally, user comments. Theevent log entries can be viewed from within the User Comments Module , or they can be

printed as an Event Log report.

Note The System Log is a different log record than logs retrieved from trafficcontrollers and master controllers using the System Scheduler tool, and it isalso different than the Device Event Logs retrieved from Message Signs.Those events are stored in separate tables within IQ Central. The SystemLog is more like the top level record of activities within the softwarepackage.

The system log can grow quite large if there are a lot of devices being tracked, especially ifExtended Logging has been turned on. This is the point of the Size Event Log module, to

allow for the management of the size of the System Log.

Size Event Log Module The Event Log Size module is used to define how much space the IQ Central System Logcan take up within your IQ Central Access database , and on your hard drive. This tool setsthe number of event log records the system will track. IQ Central will never grow the table toa size larger than the one defined here. When the table is full, IQ Central will beginoverwriting the oldest records.

The module also displays how much of the currently configured space is being used by logrecords and the number of entries this represents. By default, the System Log event table isconfigured to be 21,000 records.

Opening the Event Log Size Module

To open the Event Log Size module, you can perform one of the following options.

Go to the Tools menu and choose Logging Options and then Size Event Log .

or you can select the Event Log Size icon on the System Maintenance toolbar

Note If you resize the log to smaller number of records than the current setting,you will be deleting records in the database. If there is data stored in thoserecords, they will be erased.

Extended Logging Extended Logging is an option available under the Tools > Logging Options menu. Thisoption controls the amount and type of detail that is included in the event log files. Forstandard operation, extended logging should not be turned on, since it can cause the logdata tables to grow very quickly. It should only be turned on if additional detail is required inthe log file for diagnostic purposes.




224

If Extended Logging is active, a check mark will appear next to it when the drop down menuis opened. If there is no check mark, Extended Logging is inactive. To make it active when itis inactive, or inactive when it is active, click on the menu option and follow the prompts.

User Comments Module

The IQ Central System log can be documented. Users can attach comments to events todescribe what was happening, what caused the event, or what the resolution was.

To add a particular note to a specific event, open the User Comments module by selectingUser Comments from the View menu. A window will open, allowing you to enter acomment for a particular event. If you know the date of the event for which you want to adda comment, enter that date in both fields. If you are not sure of the date, you can enter arange of dates so that all the events that were logged between those dates will be displayedin the list so that you can locate the required event.

You can also specify that events logged by a specific operator should be displayed. To dothis, select the specific operator from the drop down list box. Only events logged for thatoperator will be displayed so that you can add the required comment.

Adding a Comment

1. Locate the event for which you want to add a comment. Click on that event and the'Comment' field will be activated.

2. Type in the comment you wish to attach to the event.

3. Click the Save button and the comment will be added to the event log. The commentwill also be included on the Event Log report when it is printed.



Chapter 14 – Database Maintenance & Backup

225

Archive and Restore ModuleThis option is used to create backups of your database , and/or to restore your database fromone of these backup files. You either can choose to archive the entire database or selectspecific tables for archiving. When restoring from a file, you can choose which specifictables from the archives to restore into the current database.

The module acts on a database table-by-table basis. So, one select s the tables one wishesto work with, and then chooses whether to ‘archive’ the tables to an external MicrosoftAccess database file (i.e. a .mdb file), or to ‘Restore’ the selected tables from an externalAccess file.

Figure 112 – IQ Central Archive and Restore module

As long as no significant database changes have occurred as part of an IQ Central update,which is specified in the release notes for the update, the Archive and Restore module canbe used to back up your database information before the software update, and then it canbe used to restore the data back into your updated system.




226



227

Chapter 15 – IQ Central CustomizationIQ Central has historically been a user-customizable application that allowed a great deal offreedom when it came to configuring the interface and the operation of its various modules.As the application has evolved, however, Peek Traffic has attempted to steer the application

more toward a user-friendly interface and away from pure customizability.Several of the customizing modules are still available within IQ Central, however it isrecommended that extensive customization of the application using these tools be avoided,unless you are working with a qualified Peek Traffic customer service representative, andyou fully understand the impact that your changes will have on the rest of the program.

The tools that still remain within IQ Central to customize its operation are:

Icon Management - Used to set icons for modules within IQ Central. This should not beconfused with intersection icon management, which is handled using the traffic controller map management tools.

BlockBuilder - Used to set up master block tables within the IQ Central database .

FormBuilder - Used to define and modify module window interfaces and link them toitems in the IQ Central database.




228

Device Icon ManagementThe Icon Management module is a simple interface for attaching graphical icons to keyfunctions within IQ Central. The module can be launched by going to the Tools menu,choosing Advanced Options and then Icon Management , or by clicking on the IconManagement icon (shown at right) in the System Maintenance toolbar.

It has the following controls:

Select Icon

Icon Name

Icon File Name

Icon Detail

Using this interface, you can perform the following functions:

Editing an Existing Icon

Adding a New IconDeleting an Icon

Linking an Icon to a type of device

Icons

You can specify the icons that are to be used in the map system. The system is installedwith standard icons, but you can customize these to suite your needs. You can use any .icofile (size 32x32). To access the icon information, click on Icons from the Maps menu. Youcan add new icons or you can delete or edit existing icons.

Adding an Icon

Deleting an Icon

Editing an Icon

Icon Name

Enter the name of the icon as it should appear in the Icon Names list when you accessicons in IQ Central. Select the icon you want to use from the drop down box, or choose toAdd a New Icon.

Icon File Name

The Icon File Name indicates the physical location of the saved Icon File on your computer’shard drive. You can enter the name and full path of the icon file or you can click on browseto select the icon.

Highlight the .ico file that is to be added and click on the Open button. The file name and its complete path will be stored in the Icon File Name field.

If you manually enter the path and file name in the Icon File Name field, you can click on theTest Icon button to “test” that the path and file name that you entered is correct.



Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization

229

Icon Detail

If you choose to add a new Icon, or you just want to view the details for the Icon fileselected, click on the Icon Detail button. The following information will be displayed:

Icon Name

Icon Filename

To add a new Icon, enter the name of the Icon and then enter the filename (including its path) in the filename field. If you do not know the full path and file name, click on the Browsebutton to navigate to the directory that contains the Icon file that you want to use.

If you enter the file name manually, you can check that it is correct by clicking on the TestIcon button. This will locate the Icon and display it sop that you can verify that the correctIcon has been selected.

Click on Save to save the Icon to the database and have it allocated to the Device Type.

Editing an Icon If you want to change the image that is being used as an icon, click on that icon from theIcon Names drop-down list box. The current icon will be displayed. Browse to the new .icofile that is to be used and select that file. The new picture will then be used. You will not beable to use an icon file that is already being used. This will prevent any confusion aboutwhat the icon actually represents when it is displayed on your map.

Creating an Icon from an Image File

If you do not have an appropriate .ico file and no software available for the creation of .icofiles, you can create one by opening any other type of graphic image in Windows Paint,setting the image size to 32 x 32 pixels, and saving it as a bitmap file (.bmp), but before yousave it change the extension to .ico. If you do this, the image file will be useable by IQ

Central as a device or interface icon.

Adding an Icon

To add a new icon:

1. Select Add a New Icon from the Icon Names drop-down list box.

2. Enter the name that is to be used by the Map system to identify the icon.

3. Enter either the full path and file name of the icon file, or click browse to locate theicon file.

4. Select the icon that you want to use and then click on the Open button.

Note If you choose to enter the file and path name of the .ico file(without using the browse button), you can check the iconfile by clicking on the Test Icon button.




230

5. The icon that you have selected will be displayed on the form so that you can checkthat you have selected the correct one.

6. Once you have added the required information, click on Add to add the informationto the system.



Chapter 15 – IQ Central Customization

231

Link Icon to Device Type ModuleWhen you have added all the icons to the system (see Adding an Icon), you can link eachDevice to a particular icon. To do this, select Link Icon to Device Type from the Map menu.

All the Device Types that are installed in the system will be displayed in the drop down listbox attached to the Device Types field. Select a Device and then double click that DeviceType in the list that is displayed. This will open the form to allow you to allocate an icon tothat Device Type.

Click on the Icon names drop down list box and all the available icons will be displayed.Select the one that you want to use for the Device Type that is highlighted. That icon willdisplay next to the field so that you can check that it is the correct one. When you haveselected the correct one, click on the Link to Icon button to complete the process.

Note that you will not be permitted to allocate an icon to more than one Device Type. Thisensures that there is no confusion when the icons are placed on a map.




232

BlockBuilder & FormBuilderBlock Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer Specific Object Groups. Itfacilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object to and from controllers that operateunder legacy protocols.

FormBuilder is used to connect the blocks of a legacy controller to the display windows within IQ Central.

Users of IQ Central should never need to use BlockBuilder or FormBuilder.

BlockBuilder Module The BlockBuilder module , which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQCentral system, can be launched in a couple of ways:

Using the toolbar: Click on the button, located on the Administration toolbar.

Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options >BlockBuilder .

With the keyboard shortcut: Just remember, its an alternate TAB: Hold down the ALT key and press t, then a , then b .

Using the BlockBuilder Module Block Builder is a function that allows objects to be grouped into Manufacturer SpecificObject Groups. It facilitates the conformance of the uploading and downloading of object toand from controllers to legacy protocol.

FormBuilder Module FormBuilder is an interface that allows IQ Central to be customized in the screens used to

interact with the IQ Central database . FormBuilder requires a detailed knowledge of theunderlying database structure and contents of the IQ Central database.

The FormBuilder module , which should only be used by advanced Administrators of an IQCentral system, can be launched in a couple of ways:

Using the toolbar: Click on the button, located on the Administration toolbar.

Through the menus: Go to the Tools menu and choose Advanced Options >FormBuilder .

With the keyboard shortcut: Hold down the ALT key and press t, then a , then f.

Warning BlockBuilder and FormBuilder should only be used by very advancedusers. It is not recommended for any operator of IQ Central withoutthe direct supervision of a Peek Traffic representative. Contact PeekTraffic for more information on using the BlockBuilder module .



233

Glossary1880ELThe model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3000E The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3800ELThe model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

390CJ The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation. 'CJ' stands for"Chris Johnson", a senior engineer from the old Traconex Corporation days, and now with Peek Traffic.

820AThe model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Actuated Identifies a type of traffic controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of eithervehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated .

Adaptive Split ControlA means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.

Advance Call Detector A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersection which calls the green to thatapproach.

Advance WarningA per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or red indication. Typically usedat hidden intersections with “prepare to stop” indicators.

ASTC Controller Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller : the name given to a controller design specified by New York CityDOT. This acronym was chosen to distinguish it from the more general ATC standards development program.

ATC Controller Advanced Traffic Controller , a design developed per the ATC standards development program of the Stateof California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have a separate engineboard and run the Linux operating system.

Auto/Manual SwitchA traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signal operation and permits manualoperation.

Barrier A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in which all rings areinterlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing of conflicting phases fortraffic phases on different rings.




234

BIU Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinet hardware.Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs and outputs.

Cabinet An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector electronics and otherassociated traffic control or monitoring equipment.

CallThe result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to the controller indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.

Connected

Connected and Disconnected are separate states than Online /Offline . A device is 'connected' if thecommunications channel to that device has been opened on the IQ Central computer. A connected devicedoes not mean that any communications with the device have occurred, just that the channel has beenopened on the PC end.

CMU/MMU Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This device monitors thegreen, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper red signal and thewatchdog signal from the controller . Any real and potential unsafe condition will force the intersection controller into flash mode.

Device

In IQ Central, a 'device ' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages using the NTCIPcommunciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQ Central are message signs, trafficcontrollers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras. But additional devicetypes can be created by the user.

Detector FailureFor traffic controller operation, this is a detector which fails to indicate that a vehicle is present when it is, orfails to go off when a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneoussignaling.

DimmingThis feature of some traffic controllers allows the brightness of selected non-LED traffic signal indicators to belowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.

Disconnected

Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online /Offline . A device is 'disconnected' if thecommunications channel to that device has been closed or lost on the IQ Central computer. Only connecteddevices can also be 'online'.

Dual EntryA mode of dual-ring traffic controller operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Call does not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, a phase isselected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.

EGB



Glossary

235

Extended Green Band

EPEnd of Permissive

EPP

A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.

Flash MemoryFlash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved during long periods ofpower outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. ( EEPROM )

FOSee ' Force Off '.

FOM Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over fiber opticcables.

Force Off Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller , causingtermination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemption and Coordinatedoperation.

Fully Actuated Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detection capability.

FSK Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies for specificsignals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency to another, keyed torepresent a different information character with each frequency.

GIS

Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or GPS data)to data points in a database .

Greenband AnalysisA method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set of coordinated traffic intersections.

Greenband The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the last possible vehicle in a group

of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of a progressive traffic control system.




236

HDLC Address

HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control," which is a group of protocols for transmitting synchronousdata packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organized into a frame. The HDLC level is abovethe SNMP , NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which means that the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP(and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore counts on thephysical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) to control clocking and synchronization of the transmission andreception of frames. A numerical address is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to theproper location.

IntersectionThe location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work in such a location.

IntervalA unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a t ime-based (non-NEMA)traffic controller.

IQThe brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek Traffic Corporation.

ITSIntelligent transportation systems

Lead/Lag OperationA feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase sequence on a phase-pairbasis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed, the odd phase will lag the even phaseinstead of leading it as it does in normal operation.

M3000The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic Corporation.

MAC AddressThe unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet. Stands for 'Media AccessControl' Address.

Maintenance Icon

There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom LevelIcons . Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-down lists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as whenfirst placing a device on a map. There is only one maintenance icon associated with each type of device. Theicons assigned to device types can be edited in IQ Central using the commands under Tools >AdvancedOptions.

MarginalThis is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have a marginalcommunications state if IQ Central attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set number of times.

MCE A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.



Glossary

237

MIB

A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organized heirarchically.A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a generic communications protocol, suchas SNMP or NTCIP . Each bit of information in a MIB file has a unique object identifier which is identifiedeither by its object name or its object descriptor.

MIlitary Time

A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this time-keeping method, the timestarts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 at the following midnight. Civilian timecan be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour for any hour after noon. But since most of youtraffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably already know all this.

MMU Malfunction Management Unit, See ' CMU/MMU'.

MOE Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of a configuredintersection controller 's operation.

MSCLRA traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.

MultisonicsA traffic equipment and software company owned by U.S. Traffic Corporation.

NEMANational Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a couple ofcompeting standards for intelligent traffic control systems.

NTCIP

A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computers together in anon-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol'. IQ Central isdesigned as a central software system to communicate with any traffic hardware that speaks the NTCIPprotocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol and its purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, orspecialized version, of the more generic SNMP communications protocol. NTCIP uses the same datastructures and methods as SNMP, including MIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.

Object Identifier

Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . Anobject identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabetic characters) separated by periods,

to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information. For example, a bit of data may have the objectidentifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, the Object Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier isfunctionally equivalent to the alphanumeric Object Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.




238

Object Name

Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its object name . Anobject name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy by separating different domainlevels by periods. For example, an object name might be: device .device-type.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent to the numeric objectidentifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Offline

A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the device and IQ Central.This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the device disconnecting, or by a problem thatshuts down the connection. A device can either be online , marginal , or offline.

OIDSee ' Object Identifier '.

OLAOverlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identified with asingle letter identifier, hence Overlap A ( OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in a controller interface.

Online

A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications have occurredbetween the device and IQ Central. A device can either be online, marginal , or offline .

OSAM-32The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

PAPhase allocation

PE A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for ' Preemption '.

Peek TrafficA traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.

PreemptionAn alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller , typically triggered by a ' preemption input' beingsignalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.

RCU

Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a coaxialcable communications facility.

RGBA traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.

ROM Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power is removed.Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.



Glossary

239

SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control

Semi-Actuated Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicle detection capability.

Serial InterfaceA device , which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to a printer or anotherperipheral unit.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allow intelligent networkdevices to communicate with one another, and with network device management software. SNMP is part ofthe well known TCP/IP protocol suite.

SPLSee ' Split '.

SPStart Permissive period

Split In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. So instead ofset times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase. A split is apercentage of the total time available in the cycle.

STMP

Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplified management andcommunications between traffic equipment and software.

TBC Time-based coordination . Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time of day usingan internal clock.

TCP/IPTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used to send dataacross an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a unique IP address.

T/F Terminal and Facilities

Time Reference Point A point in time which serves as the start time or source time reference for an entire artery or region of trafficflow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a time offset between thestart of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time Reference Signal. The start of the Greentime reference signal in this system is known as the Time Reference Point .

TODTime of Day




240

TMM-500The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

TraconexA traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Transyt A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

USBUniversal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.

US TrafficA traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

WRM Walk Rest Modifier

WatchdogA monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the BIU. If no changein state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time (typically 1 second), this denotes acontroller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put the intersection into FLASH mode.

Zoom Level Icons

There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQ Central: Maintenance Icons and Zoom LevelIcons . Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, to show the current state of a device . There can be upto five Zoom Level Icons associated with each type of device. The number assigned depends on the type ofdevice. Signs have five zoom level icons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom level icons.Weather stations and sensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exception of traffic controllers, these

zoom level icons cannot be edited in IQ Central. The icons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited usingthe GIS Zoom Levels command under the Maps menu.



241

#1880EL: The model number of a Transyt brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3000E: The model number of a Peek brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

3800EL: The model number of a Transyt brand master traffic controller made by Peek TrafficCorporation.

390CJ: The model number of a Traconex brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

820A: The model number of a Multisonics brand traffic controller made by Peek Traffic Corporation.

AActuated: Identifies a type of controller which responds to calling signals generated by the actions of

either vehicles or pedestrians. See also Semi-actuated and Fully-actuated.

Adaptive Split Control: A means of intersection split selection based on vehicular activity.

Advance Call Detector: A detector located a considerable distance upstream from an intersectionwhich calls the green to that approach.

Advance Warning: A per-movement output used to give advance notice of an upcoming yellow or redindication. Typically used at hidden intersections with "prepare to stop" indicators.

ASTC: Advanced Solid State Traffic Controller: the name given to a controller design specified by NewYork City DOT. This acronym was chosen by Peek Traffic to distinguish it from the more generalATC standards development program.

ATC: Advanced Traffic Controller, a design developed per the ATC standards development program ofthe State of California and the Federal Highway Administration. Requires the controller to have aseparate engine board and run the Linux operating system.

Auto/Manual Switch: A traffic cabinet switch which, when operated, discontinues normal signaloperation and permits manual operation.

BBack Panel: A board within a controller cabinet upon which are mounted field terminals, fuse

receptacles or circuit breakers, and other components of traffic controller operation not included inthe controller unit itself, or its ancillary devices. Such back panels are typically found in older trafficcontrol cabinets.

Backplane: A printed circuit connector interface board, typically with no active or passive components.However, the use of passive components is accepted for most applications.

Barrier: A logical term to describe a line of compatibility in a multi-ring intersection signal plan in whichall rings are interlocked. Barriers assure that there will be no concurrent selection and timing ofconflicting phases for traffic phases on different rings.

Baud Rate: The data transfer rate of data transmission to a communications channel, usually expressedin 'bits per second'.

BIU: Bus Interface Unit, required to interface a TS-2, Type 1 traffic controller to any type of cabinethardware. Converts NEMA TS2-Type 1 EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data to cabinet discrete inputs andoutputs.

BPS: Bits Per Second - a measure of data transmission speed

Buffer: A temporary storage location for data. The buffer accumulates backed up information for laterrelease. A device or section of memory used to compensate for differences in data transfer flowspeeds or variable latencies in a communications channel.




242

CCabinet: An outdoor, weather-tight enclosure for housing controller units, master units, detector

electronics and other associated traffic control or monitoring equipment.

Call: The result of a detector or signal activation by either a pedestrian or a vehicle. A signal to thecontroller indicating that a vehicle or pedestrian is present and is 'requesting' the right-of-way.

Capacity: The maximum number of vehicles that can pass over a given lane or roadway during a givenperiod, under prevailing traffic conditions.

CBD: Central business district. The portion of a municipality in which the dominant land use is intensebusiness activity.

Channel: An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output.

Checksum: A numerical value that is calculated by applying a predefined algorithm to a set of data. It isused to determine if a portion of memory or a message has been corrupted in any way.

Clearance Interval: The interval from the end of the right-of-way of one phase to the beginning of aconflicting phase.

Closed-Loop System: A software and hardware system in which a computer controls an externalprocess using information received from the process. For example, the closed loop in a trafficcontrol system is from the computer to the controllers and then from the detectors back (through thecontroller) to the computer.

CLR: Traffic controller screen abbreviation for 'Phase Clearance'. Includes Ped Clearance times for CNAphases.

CMU/MMU: Conflict Monitor Unit - Also known as an MMU (Multifunction Management Unit). This devicemonitors the green, yellow, and red AC loadswitch outputs for conflicts, the absence of a proper redsignal and the watchdog signal from the controller. Any real and potential unsafe condition will forcethe intersection controller into flash mode.

CNA: Call to Non-Actuated. Provides a method of phase timing where vehicle and pedestrian detectorsare not required to serve the associated phases, with operation as defined by NEMA. An actuatedcontroller feature in which the associated phase will always serve the Walk plus Ped Clear time,regardless of detector inputs.

Compatibility Line: In traffic intersection controller operations, this is the dividing line crossing bothrings (in dual ring operation) that separates compatible phase combinations. Usually, it dividesphases associated with North/South from those associated with East/West. Also known as the'Barrier'.

Conditional Service: A dual-ring feature which allows re-service to an odd phase (i.e. a left turn phase)once the opposite 'through' phase has gapped out. The service is conditional upon the timeremaining in the adjacent 'through' phase's Max timer.

Conflict Monitor: A device used to continually check for the presence of conflicting signal indicationscoming from a traffic controller, and to provide an output in response to the conflict (usually AllFlash).

Conflicting Phases: Two or more traffic flows which would result in interfering traffic movements ifoperated concurrently.

Connected: Connected and Disconnected are seperate states than Online/Offline. A device is'connected' if the communications channel to that device has been opened on the IQCentralcomputer. A connected device does not mean that any communications with the device haveoccurred, just that the channel has been opened on the PC end.

Controller: A device which, through software and firmware programming, manages the sequence andduration of traffic signals. Also, a device which manages the sequence and duration of variablemessage sign messages.



Glossary

243

Coordination: Also known as 'COORD'. The state where two or more intersections are configured tocommunicate with each other in order to time their signals in some manner that improves thegreater system performance, rather than being timed independently at each intersection. Suchindependent operation, by contrast, is known as Free operation.

COTS: Commercial off the Shelf - standard product offering available for purchase from commercialvendors.

CPU: Central Processing Unit - The chip that controls all computer operations and performscomputations. Also may refer to the entire physical unit housing the chip.

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check. A form of checksum data verification used to verify the validity ofinformation transferred across a communications channel.

Critical Intersection: A selected, heavily traveled intersection within a coordinated traffic artery. (See'Coordination') This intersection would be employed to dynamically control the split at otherintersections within the artery, based on its vehicle detector inputs.

CVM: Controller voltage monitor. An open collector output that is maintained 'low' by a traffic controlleras long as the internally generated operating voltages are within tolerances. This output is used bya conflict monitor to place the intersection in Flash, should all voltages fail in the controller.

Cycle: The total time required to complete one complete set of signal states around an intersection. Inbasic, pre-timed control, the cycle length is fixed. In actuated systems the cycle length can beincreased up to a predetermined maximum, based on the continued detection of vehicles. In acoordinated system, the cycle of all connected intersections are monitored continuously andadjusted as needed to maintain the coordinated plan.

Cycle Zero Point: See 'Time Reference Point'

DDatabase: Traffic controllers and central system software (such as IQCentral) typically uses two

distinctly different meanings for the term 'database'. The first is the typical one used in mostcomputer systems: a central system stores and maintains all of the information it gathers from thefield about all connected devices in a set of database files on the central computer. The second

meaning of database pertains only to traffic controllers. This meaning of 'database' is defined as thecomplete set of operating parameters stored in a single traffic controller or master controller.

Density: A measure of the concentration of vehicles in an intersection, stated as the number of vehiclesper mile (space density) or as the flow volume divided by the average speed (point density.)

Detection Zone: The area of the roadway in which a vehicle will be detected by a vehicle detector.

Detector: A device that senses the presence or absence of a vehicle in a particular area (the DetectionZone). Vehicle detection methods include inductance detecting loops (the most common type),piezo pressure sensors, light beam sensors, radio ID sensors, air tube sensors, and mechanicalswitches.

Detector Failure: A detector which fails to indicate that vehicle is present when it is, or fails to go offwhen a vehicle is absent. Types of failures include non-operation, chattering, and erroneous

signaling.Detector Memory: A feature of some controllers in which the actuation of a detector is retained in

memory until the corresponding phase is serviced.

Device: In IQCentral, a 'device' is any piece of hardware or software that the application manages usingthe NTCIP communciations protocol. The pre-configured device types in IQCentral are messagesigns, traffic controllers, master controllers, weather stations, RTMS sensors, and traffic cameras.But additional device types can be created by the user.

Dimming: This feature of some controllers allows the brightness of selected traffic signal indicators to belowered during night time operation, typically by lowering the voltage applied to the output.




244

Disconnected: Connected and Disconnected are different states than Online/Offline. A device is'disconnected' if the communications channel to that device has been closed or lost on theIQCentral computer. Only connected devices can also be 'online'.

DLL: A dynamically linked library file. In the Windows environment, programs store data, graphics, andother resources in these linked libraries. IQCentral, TOPS, IQ-Link and most other Windowsapplications use them.

Dual Entry: A mode of dual-ring operation in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a Calldoes not exist in a ring when the controller crosses the barrier to activate a phase within the ring, aphase is selected in that ring to be activated in a predetermined manner.

Duplex: Two-way communications over a single communications link.

EEEPROM: Electronically erasable/programmable read-only memory, the programmable memory storage

area in many traffic control components.

EGB: Extended Green Band

EP: A traffic controller display screen abbreviation for 'End of Permissive'.

EPP: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'End of Pedestrian Permissive'.

EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (typically using UV light to erase)

FFlash Memory: Flash memory is a type of nonvolatile memory. The data stored in flash will be saved

during long periods of power outage. It is a variation of electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. (EEPROM)

FO: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Force Off'.

FOM: Fiber Optic Modem, a device that modulates a signal appropriately so it can be transmitted over

fiber optic cables.Force Off: Action taken by an external source which generates a signal to the intersection controller,

causing termination to begin in the phase currently exhibiting the right-of-way. Used in Preemptionand Coordinated operation.

FSK: Frequency shift key, A form of digital frequency modulation employing discrete frequencies forspecific signals, for example for marking signals. The transmitter is changed from one frequency toanother, keyed to represent a different information character with each frequency.

Fully-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control in which every phase has a vehicle detectorinput capability.

GGIS: Geographical Interface Systems - The attachment of geographical information (i.e. coordinates or

GPS data) to data points in a database.

Green Band: The time, in seconds, elapsed between the passing of the first vehicle and the lastpossible vehicle in a group of vehicles moving in accordance with the designed speed of aprogressive traffic control system.

Greenband Analysis: A method of analyzing the amount of green light time available in a set ofcoordinated traffic intersections.



Glossary

245

HHDLC Address: HDLC stands for "High-level Data Link Control" which is a group of protocols for

transmitting synchronous data packets between point-to-point nodes. In HDLC, data is organizedinto a frame. The HDLC level is above the SNMP, NTCIP and STMP protocol layers, which meansthat the HDLC frames are what surround SNMP (and NTCIP, and STMP) data transfers. The HDLCframe is synchronous and therefore counts on the physical layer (e.g. TCP/IP, RS-232, etc.) tocontrol clocking and synchronization of the transmission and reception of frames. A numericaladdress is used by HDLC to direct these frames across the network to the proper location.

IIntersection: The location where two or more roadways meet or cross, or a Controller assigned to work

in such a location.

Interval: A unit of time that is assigned to a certain controller behavior or signal output by a time-based(non-NEMA) traffic controller.

IQ: The brand name for a line of traffic control equipment and software produced by Peek TrafficCorporation.

ITS: Intelligent transportation systems

LLead/Lag Operation: A feature of some traffic controllers which makes it possible to reverse the phase

sequence on a phase-pair basis. When the phase pairs (such as 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8) are reversed,the odd phase will lag the even phase instead of leading it as it does in normal operation.

MM3000: The model number of a Peek brand master traffic controller unit manufactured by Peek Traffic

Corporation.

MAC Address: The unique numerical identifier for a physical device that is attached to the Internet.Stands for 'Media Access Control' Address.

Maintenance Icon: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral:MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Maintenance Icons are used in device type drop-downlists, menus, and dialog boxes, as well as when first placing a device on a map. There isonly onemaintenance icon associated with each type of device. The icons assignedto device types can beedited in IQCentral using the commands under Tools >AdvancedOptions.

Marginal: This is the online state for a device that is supposed to be online. A device is judged to have amarginal communications state if IQCentral attempts to communicate with it, and fails, a set numberof times.

MCE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Manual Control Enable'.

MIB: A Management Information Base - A generic collection of information that has been organizedheirarchically. A MIB usually describes a network object so that it can be used with a genericcommunications protocol, such as SNMP or NTCIP. Each bit of information in a MIB file has aunique object identifier which is identified either by its object name or its object descriptor.

Military Time: A method of indicating the time of day that is often used in the military. In this time-keeping method, the time starts at midnight, indicated as 00:00, and proceeds to a time of 24:00 atthe following midnight. Civilian time can be converted to military time by adding 12 to the hour forany hour after noon. But since most of you traffic industry guys are ex-military, you probably alreadyknow all this.




246

MMU: Malfunction Management Unit, See 'CMU/MMU'.

Module: A functional unit that plugs into an assembly. In the IQCentral environment, a module is a pieceof software that makes up a functional component of the entire IQCentral system.

MOE: Methods of efficiency. In traffic control, this is a common method to assess the performance of aconfigured intersection controller's operation.

MSCLR: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation standing for 'Main Street Clearance'.

Multisonics: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

NNEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The industry group that has designed one of a

couple of competing standards for intelligent traffic control systems.

NTCIP: A standard communications protocol used to connect traffic support hardware and computerstogether in a non-proprietary manner. It stands for 'National Transportation Communications for ITSProtocol'. IQCentral is designed as a central software system to communicate with any traffichardware that speaks the NTCIP protocol. A website at www.ntcip.org describes the protocol andits purpose. NTCIP is a specialized subset, or specialized version, of the more generic SNMPcommunications protocol. NTCIP uses the same data structures and methods as SNMP, includingMIBs, Object Identifiers, and Object Names.

OObject Identifier: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or

its object name. An object identifier uses a series of numbers (without any spaces or alphabeticcharacters) separated by periods, to indicate the heirarchical placement of a piece of information.For example, a bit of data may have the object identifier of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.3.3.1. Within a MIB file, theObject Identifier must be unique. An Object Identifier is functionally equivalent to the alphanumericObject Name which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Object Name: Within a MIB file, a bit of information can either be identified by its object identifier or its

object name. An object name is an alphanumeric name with no spaces that indicates heirarchy byseparating different domain levels by periods. For example, an object name might be:device.device-type.devicenumber.control.onoffswitch. An Object Name is functionally equivalent tothe numeric object identifier which is assigned to the same bit of information.

Offline: A device is considered offline if no logical communications are occurring between the deviceand IQCentral. This could be caused by a user command to go 'Offline', by the devicedisconnecting, or by a problem that shuts down the connection. A device can either be online,marginal, or offline.

OID: See 'Object Identifier'.

OLA: Overlap A (for example). A traffic controller screen abbreviation. Overlaps are typically identifiedwith a single letter identifier, hence Overlap A (OLA) through Overlap P (OLP) may appear in acontroller interface.

Online: A device is considered online if it has an open connection and if logical communications haveoccurred between the device and IQCentral. A device can either be online, marginal, or offline.

OSAM-32: The model number of a Multisonics brand master traffic controller made by Peek TrafficCorporation.

PPA: Phase allocation



Glossary

247

PE: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Preemption'.

Peek Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Signal Group Corporation.

Preemption: An alternative interval timing plan for a traffic controller, typically triggered by a 'preemptioninput' being signalled ON by emergency response or police personnel.

RRCU: Remote Communications Unit - Used in some cities to interface a controller or another device to a

coaxial cable communications facility.

RGB: A traffic controller screen display abbreviation for 'Reduced Green Band'.

ROM: Read Only Memory, hard written memory in a computer that is maintained even when power isremoved. Typically used to store basic OS code and firmware programs.

SSDLC: Synchronous Data Link Control

Semi-Actuated: Identifies a type of intersection control that has one or more phases that lack a vehicledetector input capability.

Serial Interface: A device, which processes information one (1) bit at a time from the computer to aprinter or another peripheral unit.

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol - A generic communications protocol used to allowintelligent network devices to communicate with one another, and with network device managementsoftware. SNMP is part of the well known TCP/IP protocol suite.

SP: Start Permissive Period

SPL: See 'Split'.

Split: In a coordinated traffic system, each intersection in an artery must have the same cycle time. Soinstead of set times for each phase, a coordinated intersection has a split assigned to each phase.A split is a percentage of the total time available in the cycle.

STMP: Simple Transportation Management Protocol - A subset of the NTCIP protocol for simplifiedmanagement and communications between traffic equipment and software.

TT/F: Terminal and Facilities

TBC: Time-based coordination. Indicates that coordination or plan selection is based upon the time ofday using an internal clock.

TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The most common pair of protocols used tosend data across an Ethernet or the Internet. Each component in such a system is assigned a

unique IP address.Time Reference Point: A point in time which serves as the time reference for an entire artery or region

of traffic flow. For example, in the timing diagram for a single street, each intersection has a timeoffset between the start of its cycle and one arterial signal which serves as the Time ReferenceSignal. The start of the Green time reference signal in this system is known as the Time ReferencePoint.

TMM-500: The model number of a Traconex brand master traffic controller made by Peek TrafficCorporation.

TOD: Time of Day




248

Traconex: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

Transyt: A traffic equipment brand owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

UUS Traffic: A traffic equipment and software company owned by Peek Traffic Corporation.

USB: Universal Serial Bus. A common computer peripheral interface.

WWatchdog: A monitoring circuit external to a traffic controller which senses a controller output via the

BIU. If no change in state of this output is detected for a CMU-programmed amount of time(typically 1 second), this denotes a controller unit error, at which point the CMU or MMU will put theintersection into FLASH mode.

WRM: Walk Rest Modifier

ZZoom Level Icons: There are two types of icons associated with devices within IQCentral:

MaintenanceIcons and Zoom Level Icons. Zoom Level Icons are used only in map views, toshowthe current state of a device. There can be up to five Zoom Level Icons associatedwith eachtype of device. The number assigned depends on the type of device. Signshave five zoom levelicons. Traffic controllers and cameras each have four zoom levelicons. Weather stations andsensors each have two zoom level icons. With the exceptionof traffic controllers, these zoom levelicons cannot be edited in IQCentral. Theicons assigned to traffic controllers can be edited using theGIS Zoom Levels commandunder the Maps menu.



249

Index1 1.2MB ................................................................. 5

100 WidthTo...................................................... 134

100.................................................................. 134

150.................................................................... 50

175kb .................................................................. 5

180kb .................................................................. 5

1880EL ..................................................... 80, 233

1880EL Controller............................................. 80

195kb .................................................................. 5

1st Interval ........................................................ 65

3 3000E ............................................................. 233

3000E Controller Parameter Fields.......................................... 65

3000E Controller............................................... 65

3000E TS2 working....................................................... 165

3000E TS2...................................................... 165

300kb .................................................................. 5

32pm............................................................... 184

32x32 .............................................................. 228

353kb .................................................................. 5

3800EL ................................................. 5, 80, 233

3800EL Master Parameter Fields.......................................... 80

3800EL Master ................................................. 80

3800EL Master ................................................. 80

390CJ ....................................................... 80, 233

390CJ Controller Parameter Fields.......................................... 80

390CJ Controller............................................... 80

3rd Sheet ........................................................ 124

5 5.1MB ................................................................. 5

50 56

5-Section Prot ................................................... 56

6 675kb .................................................................. 5

6am on Monday morning ........................ 118, 176

8 820A.......................................................... 56, 233

820A Controller Parameter Fields ..........................................56

820A Controller ................................................. 56

820A OSAM ...................................................... 56

A About....................................................... 131, 153

About IQCentral ..........................10, 34, 131, 153

About window Shows..................................................... 10, 34

About window.................................................... 10

Absence ............................................................ 65

AC loadswitch .........................................234, 237

Accant ............................................................... 33

Accept ...............................92, 101, 145, 178, 184

Access Device......................................................... 159

Access............................................................. 159

Access............................................................. 218

Access Level Module's MDI list.......................218

Access Levels Changing .................................................... 218 Opens ........................................................... 10

Access Levels ...................................................10

Access Levels Module ............................ 122, 218

Accessible.......................................138, 202, 218

Account 1, 4, 8, 10, 19, 22, 25, 34, 101, 134, 205,

211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 218 Acknowledge........................... 189, 195, 200, 202

Acknowledge Alarm ........................................200

Acknowledge incoming alarms........................202

Action Column................................................. 124

Activate button ........................................128, 129

Activate Message.................................... 114, 124

Activate Schedule ................................... 118, 176




250

Activating Amber Alert.........................................127, 128 Remove button ...........................................212 Scenario......................................................127

Activating......................................................... 127

Activation

Indicate ....................................................... 129 Activation.......................4, 83, 113, 118, 124, 127

Activation Priority ............................................129

Active ...10, 29, 36, 56, 65, 92, 95, 124, 139, 178,186, 195, 197, 200, 216, 223

Active Circuits ...................................................65

Active Memory ............................................92, 95

Active SF........................................................... 56

Active Sp Function Circuits ...............................56

ActiveX Type ................................................... 169

Activity..36, 56, 76, 128, 129, 157, 158, 205, 207,233

Activity Log...................................................... 128

Activity window................................................ 129

Actuated ................56, 76, 85, 165, 233, 235, 239

Actuation ........................................................... 65

Adaptive Split Control......................................233

Add Connection.................................................45

Add Connection Button .....................................45

Add Device........................................................ 39

Add Device button pressing ........................................................ 39

Add Device button.............................................39

Add New..........34, 38, 39, 45, 104, 184, 212, 228

Add New Device......................10, 34, 38, 39, 104

Add New Task choosing ..................................................... 184

Add New Task.................................................184

Add Object List button ................................................... 172

Add Object ...................................................... 172 Add Task dialog

Open ...........................................................184

Add Task dialog ..............................................184

Add/Delete ..........................10, 34, 212, 213, 214

Add/Delete Users ..............................................34

Add/Edit Opens ........................................................... 10

Add/Edit .............................................................10

Add/Edit Device Window...................................39

Add/Edit Layer Groups Opens ...........................................................10

Add/Edit Layer Groups ......................................10

Add/Remove....................................................178 Added Initial.................................................65, 76

Added Initial Calculation....................................76

Add-Edit.............................................................39

Adding Device ...........................................................39

Adding ...............................................................39

Adding Zoom Areas BMP Maps ..................................................138

Adding Zoom Areas.........................................138

Address number........................................................104

Address ...........................................38, 39, 56, 65

Adjust...........................65, 85, 105, 143, 165, 239

Adjust MX3 ........................................................65

Administration allows ..........................................................215 delete ..........................................................211remaining ....................................................212

Administration............................................21, 134

Administration Level ................211, 212, 213, 215

Administration toolbar......................................232 Administration User .................................211, 214

Administrative ....................................10, 212, 216

Administrator Community ................................122

Administrators IQCentral.....................................................232

Administrators.......8, 33, 101, 122, 129, 157, 158,212, 214, 216, 218

Administrators..................................................232

Adobe® Photoshop®.......................................139

Advance Call Detector.....................................233 Advance Warning ............................................233

Advance Warning Logic.....................................65

Advanced......5, 10, 34, 36, 55, 65, 104, 107, 110,111, 152, 232, 233, 236

Advanced button Clicking .......................................................110

Advanced button..............................................110



Index

251

Advanced Options .................... 10, 152, 232, 236

Advanced Options submenu open ........................................................... 104

Advanced Options submenu........................... 104

Advanced Screen ................................... 110, 111

Advanced Sign Message Edit......................... 110 Advanced Traffic............................................. 233

AdvancedOptions ........................................... 236

Alarm Handling ..................................................... 200 point ........................................................... 165

Alarm . 1, 5, 10, 26, 29, 34, 37, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52,76, 83, 86, 90, 159, 161

Alarm .............................................................. 216

Alarm Condition Deleting ...................................................... 197

Alarm Condition .............................. 161, 190, 195 Alarm Condition .............................................. 197

Alarm Configuration Interface ......................... 190

Alarm Configuration window Launching................................................... 190 Using .......................................................... 190

Alarm Configuration window........................... 190

Alarm Configure.............................................. 190

Alarm Details Viewing......................................................... 29

Alarm Details .................................................... 29 Alarm History Viewer ................................ 10, 195

Alarm icon inserts........................................................... 86

Alarm icon blinks............................................. 197

Alarm Parameters Opening...................................................... 202

Alarm Parameters........................................... 202

Alarm Parameters window open ........................................................... 202

Alarm Parameters window.............................. 202

Alarm Processing service ............................... 216

Alarm Statistics Icon .............................................................. 29

Alarm Statistics ................................................. 29

Alarm Status icon................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Alarm Status Interface .................................... 195

Alarm Status Module Launching................................................... 195

Alarm Status Module.......................................195

Alarm Status Window Using .......................................................... 195

Alarm Status Window........................................29

Alarm System Settings....................................202

Alarm Viewer........................................... 165, 200 AlarmGroupState.2 ...........................................86

Alarms Display ................................................ 190

Alarms System Configuring .................................................202

Alarms System........ 1, 5, 165, 189, 190, 197, 200

Alarms System................................................ 202

Alarms System Settings window leave ........................................................... 202

Alarms System Settings window..................... 202

Alarms window.................................................. 50 All

objects ........................................................ 168 release notes .................................................. 5

All Alarms........................................................ 190

All Alarms Display ........................................... 190

All Configured User Accounts ......................... 122

All Currently Logged-on Users ........................ 122

All Devices set............................................................... 169 Status ........................................................... 42

All Devices ........................................................42 All Flash .......................................................... 234

All Pages .....................................................97, 98

All polling......................................................... 175

Allocate Device Type................................................229

Allocate ........................... 118, 129, 152, 176, 218

AllowDuplicates...............................................134

Allows Administration............................................. 215 IQCentral ...................................................... 53 oeprator ...................................................... 110

Allows.............. 1, 5, 10, 34, 36, 37, 40, 43, 45, 46

Allows................................................................53

Allows copying ..................................................99

Allows SNMP ..................................................107

ALT key ........................................................... 232

Alt-D pressing ........................................................ 39




252

Alt-D ..................................................................39

Alt-D,c,b ............................................................ 34

Alt-D,c,c............................................................. 34

Alt-D,c,v............................................................. 34

Alt-D,i,u ............................................................. 34

Alt-D,m,a ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,b ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,c ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,e ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,f ............................................................ 34

Alt-D,m,m .......................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,o ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,m,s ........................................................... 34

Alt-D,n ...............................................................34

Alternate Flash .................................................. 65 Alternatively.............................................101, 109

Alt-F,L................................................................ 34

Alt-F,O...............................................................34

Alt-F,p................................................................ 34

Alt-F,x................................................................34

Alt-F4.............................................................9, 34

Alt-H,a ...............................................................34

Alt-H,i ................................................................34

Alt-m................................................................153

Alt-M,g...............................................................34 Alt-M,i ................................................................34

Alt-M,L...............................................................34

Alt-M,o,d............................................................34

Alt-M,o,m...........................................................34

Alt-M,o,r............................................................. 34

Alt-M,p...............................................................34

Alt-M,z ...............................................................34

Alt-T,a,b............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,f.............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,i ..............................................................34

Alt-T,a,L............................................................. 34

Alt-T,a,t.............................................................. 34

Alt-T,c................................................................34

Alt-T,d................................................................ 34

Alt-T,L,d............................................................. 34

Alt-T,L,e............................................................. 34

Alt-T,L,s .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,a .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,c .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,L .............................................................34

Alt-T,u,p .............................................................34

Alt-T,v ................................................................34

Alt-V,i .................................................................34

Alt-V,m...............................................................34

Alt-V,r.................................................................34

Alt-V,s ................................................................34

Alt-V,t.................................................................34

Alt-V,u................................................................34

Alt-w.............................................................15, 34

Alt-W key pressing ........................................................34

Alt-W key ...........................................................34

Alt-w,1................................................................33

AM .......................................................................1

AMBER..............................................................34

Amber Alert Administration..............................127

Amber Alert button Press...........................................................127

Amber Alert button...........................................127

Amber Alerts Activating ............................................127, 128

Creating ......................................................128 Verify...........................................................128

Amber Alerts............................................1, 10, 34

Amber Alerts....................................................127

Amber Alerts....................................................128

Amber Alerts....................................................129

Amber Alerts....................................................129

Amber Alerts Module .......................................127

An Activate Message.......................................114

An Overview ..................................1, 10, 128, 129

AND ...................................95, 165, 175, 190, 209 And Not Accessible .........................................218

Another Zoom level display ........................................81

Another ........................................9, 10, 15, 33, 43

Another during.................................................202

Another set data .............................................................165



Index

253

Another set ..................................................... 165

Anti-Backup Phases ......................................... 56

Any set fonts ........................................................... 117

Any set............................................................ 117

Appear ... 1, 10, 14, 15, 20, 28, 29, 33, 36, 39, 53,81, 83, 85, 86, 92, 95, 104, 107, 110, 122,129, 137, 139, 143, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,152, 153, 160, 163, 165, 182, 184, 185, 195,197, 202, 209, 212, 213, 216, 223, 228, 238

Appearance Changing...................................................... 85

Appearance .................................................. 1, 81

Application manages ..... 1, 10, 46, 101, 161, 175,229

Apply button.................................................... 218

Applying Report Filters.............................................. 205

Applying .......................................................... 205

April 2007............................................................ 5

Archive............................................................ 225

Archive’ tables.......................................................... 225

Archive’ ........................................................... 225

Arial................................................................. 134

AriAndrews ..................................................... 212

Around .............................................................. 56

As data .............................................................. 99 name .......................................................... 202

As 149

ASC .................................................................. 76

Assign Device .......................................................... 37

Assign ................................................... 10, 22, 34

Assign blocks data .............................................................. 10

Assign blocks.................................................... 10 Assign Peds 1-16.............................................. 65

Assignedto...................................................... 236

Assistant Polling ........................................................ 163

Assistant ......................................................... 163

Assistant ......................................................... 165

Associated 2nd Loop ........................................ 56

ASTC........................................................... 5, 233

ASTC Controller ..............................................233

ATC Controller ................................................233

Attempt....... 15, 36, 42, 43, 47, 88, 114, 152, 161,165, 175, 200, 212, 227, 234, 236, 238

Attempt succeed .............................................175 Audio Settings .................................................202

Auto................... 56, 65, 76, 81, 88, 165, 195, 200

Auto Perm ......................................................... 65

Auto Populate Polling IQCentral ...................................................... 81

Auto Populate Polling........................................81

Auto Populate Polling........................................88

Auto Populate Polling button............................. 88

Auto Populate Polling tool

choosing ...............................................88, 136 Device Specific .............................................81

Auto Populate Polling tool................................. 81

Auto Refresh ...........................................195, 200

Auto Refresh checkbox check .......................................................... 200

Auto Refresh checkbox................................... 200

Auto/Manual Switch ........................................233

Automatic .............. 1, 5, 36, 86, 88, 107, 114, 136

Automatic Incident use.................................................................. 1

Automatic Incident Management ................ 1, 107

Automatic Log Off ......................................... 9, 36

AutoNumber.................................................... 134

Available Icon.................................................... 83

Available Log Table Columns ......................... 124

Avg Vehicle Length ...........................................56

B Back Color.......................................................202

Backup ....................................1, 56, 76, 221, 225

Backup Clock Bad............................................. 56

Bad Coordination Plan ...................................... 56

Banded.................................................... 157, 158

Barrier ..................................................... 233, 234

Base................................................................ 172

Base OID.........................................................172

Basic ...... 5, 26, 33, 65, 81, 85, 92, 110, 131, 137,165, 172, 189, 190, 208, 209, 238, 239




254

Basic Export .................................................... 208

Basic Reports.................................................. 208

Basic Steps Set Up...........................................................81

Basic Steps ....................................................... 81

Batch Update Performing ..........................163, 165, 168, 169

Batch Update .................................................. 163

Batch Update button .......................................168

Batch Update dialog open............................................................168

Batch Update dialog........................................168

Baud Rate ................................................... 56, 65

Baud Rate Div ................................................... 56

Baud Rate Divisor .............................................56

Beacon Type ................................................... 113 Below, At ........................................................... 86

Between Controllers.......................................... 99

Between Loops ................................................. 56

Between Open Modules Switching ...................................................... 15

Between Open Modules....................................15

Bitmap file .......................................137, 138, 229

Bitmapped ....................................................... 138

Bitmapped file .................................................138

BIU ..............................................65, 76, 234, 240 Blank ...............................................................128

Blank Sign ....................................................... 128

Blankdefault.bmp ............................................137

Block 98 transmitting ................................................... 92

Block 98 ............................................................ 92

Block Builder ................................................... 232

BlockBuilder ................................10, 34, 227, 232

BlockBuilder Module

Launching ................................................... 232 Using........................................................... 232

BlockBuilder Module .......................................232

BlockBuilder Module .......................................232

Bmp file ........................................................... 138

BMP Map Data Loading....................................................... 137

BMP Map Data................................................ 137

BMP Map Management...................................137

BMP Map Viewer.............................................157

BMP Map Viewer Interface..............................157

BMP Map Views ..............................................131

BMP Maps

Adding Zoom Areas ....................................138 BMP Maps .....................................1, 20, 134, 137

Both Places .......................................................95

Bottom ..7, 15, 26, 39, 45, 47, 48, 86, 92, 98, 121,134, 145, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158,165, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 212, 216

Box .....10, 30, 36, 38, 48, 51, 55, 86, 88, 92, 109,111, 114, 116, 117, 120, 143, 144, 145, 146,148, 149, 150, 152, 165, 168, 184, 186, 197,202, 205, 209, 212, 213, 218, 224, 228, 229,231, 236

Box asking.........................................................36

Brightness........................................................117

Brightness Control10, 23, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117,118, 120, 121, 176

Brightness Control Module ........................34, 117

Browse...............85, 138, 178, 186, 202, 228, 229

Browse window..................................................85

Browser .............................................................34

Build 1843............................................................1

Build 2116............................................................1

Bulk Opens ...........................................................10

Bulk....................................................................10

Bulk..................................................................116

Bulk Operations Opens ...........................................................10 part..............................................................114

Bulk Operations .................................................10

Bus Interface Unit....................................234, 240

Button If ..................................................................113

Buttons Standard Toolbar ..........................................19

By Devices.................10, 37, 38, 48, 51, 163, 190

By Group ...................................................48, 190

By Type .......................................48, 51, 190, 197

C Cabinet ..............................................56, 234, 240



Index

255

Cabinet Door Opened....................................... 56

Calculation........................................ 76, 123, 124

Called IQCentral Scheduler................................... 161which responds .......................................... 233

Called47, 56, 65, 76, 88, 117, 124, 134, 137, 138,143, 146, 152

Camera 1, 5, 9, 10, 24, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46,81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 103,104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122,124, 127, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158,159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176,184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,239, 240

Camera Browser Module .................................. 34

Camera Control Module.................................. 105

Camera Management ................................. 1, 103

Camera NTCIP ............................................... 104 Camera Preset................................................ 124

Camera Toolbar................................................ 24

Camera Video Configuration Opens........................................................... 10

Camera Video Configuration ............................ 10

Camera Video Configuration ............................ 34

Camera-NTCIP ....................................... 103, 104

Camera-NTCIP Device Creating...................................................... 104

Camera-NTCIP Device................................... 104 Cameras > Browser................ 10, 24, 25, 34, 103

Cameras > Video Connections......................... 10

Cancel Pressing ....................................................... 92

Cancel button Choose....................................................... 165

Cancel button.................................................... 92

Cancel button.................................................. 165

Cars Before Red ............................................... 76

Cascade............................................................ 15 Cascaded Windows .................................... 15, 34

Causes..... 1, 26, 42, 46, 118, 122, 139, 149, 175,176, 189, 202, 216, 223, 224, 234, 235, 236,238

Caution - Before.............................................. 197

Caution - Before proceeding........................... 197

Caution - Using Polling Assistant......................................... 165

Caution - Using ............................................... 163

Caution - Using ............................................... 165

CDPD Mode...................................................... 45

Cells .................................................................. 98

Central Access Database ............................... 221

Central application-wide.................................... 10

Central Archive................................................225

Central Customization................................. 1, 227

Central database............................................... 98

Central focus ..................................................... 34

Central Help .................................................. 1, 19

Central Help System .........................................34

Central INSTALLATION INOPERABLE.......... 221

Central judges status .......................................................... 171

Central judges .................................................171

Central login/logout .........................................205

Central Override access ........................................................ 216 Performing.................................................... 53 Traffic Controllers .......................................101

Central Override........................................1, 5, 47

Central Override window.................................101

Central Port ....................................................... 65

Central Scheduler ...........................................178

Central synchronizes......................................... 32 Central v1.1..................................................... 216

Central v1.6....................................................... 53

Central Version 1.7 .............................................1

Central-software..............................................101

Change button Press .......................................................... 213

Change button................................. 184, 185, 186

Change button.................................................213

Change Password dialog ................................ 213

Change setting................................................ 178 Changeable

clicking........................................................ 109

Changeable.....................................................109

Changeable.....................................................114

Changeable.....................................................118

Changeable.....................................................176

Changing Device Types.................................... 46




256

Channel Assignments .......................................76

Channel Setup .................................................. 76

Chapter ....1, 7, 29, 30, 32, 37, 53, 103, 107, 123,127, 131, 161, 171, 189, 195, 205, 211, 221,227

Chapter 10 ............................................1, 32, 161

Chapter 10 - Polling ....................................1, 161

Chapter 11 ............................................1, 29, 189

Chapter 11 - Alarm Monitoring ............................1

Chapter 12 - Reports...................................1, 205

Chapter 13 - User Management.................. 1, 211

Chapter 14 - Database Maintenance .......... 1, 221

Chapter 15 - IQCentral Customization........ 1, 227

Character Height ............................................. 113

Character Width .............................................. 113

Check Auto Refresh checkbox...............................200

Check .1, 10, 48, 51, 65, 86, 90, 92, 99, 109, 113,116, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 165, 174,176, 184

Checkboxes ............................................124, 184

Choose 'MDI....................................................218

Choose No ........................................48, 163, 212

Chris Johnson ................................................. 233

Christmas .......................................................... 56

Christmas Day...................................................56

Christmas Eve...................................................56

Circuit Overrides ...............................................65

Circuit Plans ...................................................... 65

CJ 233

Ckts 1-255......................................................... 65

Clear.......48, 56, 65, 76, 107, 114, 120, 121, 165,195, 200

Clear Event Log use ..............................................................121

Clear Event Log ..............................................120

Clear Event Log ..............................................121

Clear Event Log Entries Selected Event Group Only........................120

Clear Event Log Entries ..................................120

Clear Events....................................107, 120, 121

Clear Failed Detector ........................................56

Client/Server ..................................................... 45

Close – This.....................................................163

Close button press ...........................................................153

Close button ................................................48, 99

Close button ....................................................153

Close button ....................................................172 Close button ....................................................214

Close Excel......................................................124

Close Microsoft Access ...................................134

Closed polling interval .....................................168

CMU point ....................................................234, 240

CMU ................................................................234

CMU ................................................................240

CMU/MMU.......................................234, 237, 240

CMU-programmed detected ..............................................234, 240

CMU-programmed...........................................234

CMU-programmed...........................................240

CNA ...................................................................65

Color pushing .......................................................149

Color ....................10, 83, 85, 90, 92, 95, 143, 148

Color ................................................................149

Color ................................................................195

Color ................................................................202 Color Codes.......................................................95

Color Coding Table Cells ....................................................95

Color Coding......................................................10

Color Coding......................................................95

ColorBlue.........................................................134

ColorGreen ......................................................134

ColorRed .........................................................134

Columbus Day ...................................................56

Columns ...38, 48, 56, 97, 98, 124, 134, 148, 195,208, 218, 221

COM shows............................................................38

COM ..................................................................38

Combination ......................................................34

Comm ..........................................................43, 65

Comm Copy.......................................................65



Index

257

Comm Stats ...................................................... 43

Comm Stats view.............................................. 43

Comm/System .................................................. 56

Comm/System Setup........................................ 65

Command Selection ......................................... 56

Commands full listing .................................................... 218

Commands .. 1, 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,37, 42, 56, 101, 107, 109, 114, 122, 152, 159,163, 169, 175, 182, 195, 212, 216

Comment Adding ........................................................ 224

Comment .................................................... 10, 34

Comment ........................................................ 224

Comments Module.......................................... 224

Comms switch ......................................................... 175

Comms ....................................................... 30, 43

Comms ........................................................... 175

Communications.... 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 34, 37, 38,39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 55, 81, 83, 86, 88, 101,103, 104, 109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 122, 128,129, 131, 136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 169,171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 234, 236, 237,238, 239, 240

Communications channel .. 9, 109, 113, 117, 118,122, 128, 131, 163, 176, 234

Communications Failure Testing .................... 175 Communications Unit...................................... 238

Community...................................................... 122

Community Name changes...................................................... 122

Community Name ........................................... 122

Complete ... 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 39, 46, 55, 81, 85, 88,90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 124,131, 133, 134, 138, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161,163, 165, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186,197, 205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 213, 221, 223,225, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 235, 239, 240

Complete set.... 1, 7, 8, 20, 39, 46, 81, 85, 90, 92,95, 98, 99, 109, 114, 118, 120, 131, 133, 138,150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 171, 172,176, 178, 182, 184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213,221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 232, 235, 239, 240

Computer’s ............................................. 184, 228

Concerning IQCentral........................................................ 4

Concerning ......................................................... 4

Cond.................................................................. 65

Cond Overlap.................................................... 65

Configs 1-10...................................................... 65

Configuration Polling........................................................... 19

Configuration............................................. 1, 5, 10 Configuration files .............................................10

Configure BMP Maps......................................131

Configure GIS Maps................................ 131, 148

Configure interface............................................ 83

Configure Intersection Interface........................ 83

Configure Intersections icon ............................. 81

Configure Intersections Module Launching.....................................................81

Configure Intersections Module ........................ 53

Configure Intersections Module ........................ 81Configure Intersections Module ........................ 81

Configure Intersections Module ........................ 83

Configure Intersections window portion........................................................... 85

Configure Intersections window ........................ 81




Configure Layers............................................. 133

Configure Logs................................................ 114

Configure Map Polling window........................ 163

Configure Spreadsheet ................................... 124

Configure Spreadsheet button ........................ 124

Configuring Intersection Open............................................................. 81Opens ........................................................... 10 Overview....................................................... 83

Configuring Intersection .................................... 10

Conflict Monitor Unit................................ 234, 237

Connect/Disconnect........................................ 109 Connected setting ...........................................163

Connection channel ..........................................30

Connection Manager......................................... 37

Connection Name ....................................... 38, 45

Connection Timeout ..........................................45

Connection Type Parameters Required ................................... 45




258

Connection Type ...........................................1, 43

Connection Type ...............................................45

Connection’ ..................................................... 184

Connections Adding...........................................................45 choosing ....................................................... 45 Deleting.........................................................45 Editing...........................................................45 Managing...................................................... 37 open..............................................................45 Opens ........................................................... 34 Overview.....................................................104 Select....................................................39, 104 type............................................................. 103 Wait...............................................................45

Connections ............................1, 9, 10, 26, 28, 30

Connections list...................................37, 38, 104

Connections Module Overview.......................................................45

Connections Module .........................................10

Connections Module .........................................45

Contact Information............................................. 4

Contact Name ...........................................65, 130

Contact Peek Traffic .......................1, 178, 232

Contacting Peek Technical Support .........................213 Peek Traffic ................................................1

Contacting ........................................................... 1

Contacting ....................................................... 213 Context Sensitive Help......................................34

Context-specific menu opens............................................................ 14

Context-specific menu.......................................14

Control clocking...............................................236

Control Flags..................................................... 56

Control Mode...................................................114

Control Name .................................................. 218

Controller.....................................................97, 98

Controller assigned work ................................................ 53, 88, 136

Controller assigned ...........................................53

Controller assigned ...........................................88

Controller assigned .........................................136

Controller crosses ...........................................234

Controller Firmware Required .........................178

Controller Log Retrieval ..................................207

Controller Upload...............................................90

Convert ....................118, 176, 208, 234, 237, 240

Converts NEMA TS2-Type ......................234, 240

Converts TS2-Type .........................................234

COORD .............................................92, 101, 239

Coord Constants................................................56

Coord Enhanced................................................65

Coord Phases....................................................65

Coord Plans.......................................................56

Coord Setup ......................................................76

Coordinated1, 5, 10, 20, 34, 53, 81, 85, 131, 133,134, 137, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,153, 158, 159, 160, 165, 172, 212, 233, 235,236, 239, 240

Coordination discusses ........................................................1

Coordination ........................................................1

Coordination Plans ............................................56

Cophase ............................................................65

Copy Data..........................................................99

Copy During.......................................................65

Copy From.................................................99, 163

Copying Settings Between Controllers........................99

Copying .............................................................99

Corel® Paint Shop Pro® .................................139

Cory Dibert ..........................................................4

COS Lead/Lag .......................................................65

COS...................................................................65

COS/F TOD ..............................................................65

COS/F................................................................65

Counts ...........................43, 65, 76, 175, 207, 236

Counts/Minute ...................................................76

Couple bitmap .........................................................137 types .............................................................85 ways......................................................81, 157

Create................................50, 104, 129, 146, 209

Create report ...................................................209

Create Report button select...........................................................205

Create Report button.......................................205



Index

259

Crisis Management..................... 1, 127, 128, 129

Critical......................... 26, 29, 200, 202, 209, 216

Critical Change ................................................. 26

Critical Settings............................................... 202

Cross . 10, 22, 34, 53, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 101,

136, 152, 157, 158, 159, 165, 227, 233, 234,235, 236, 237, 239, 240

CS Time Plan ..................................................... 65

CS..................................................................... 65

CSV .................................................................. 65

Ctrl-click .......................................................... 101

Ctrl-F4............................................................... 34

Ctrl-select........................................................ 186

Ctrl-z ............................................................... 208

CTS................................................................... 65 Current. 10, 15, 26, 28, 32, 33, 36, 37, 46, 48, 50,

51, 81, 85, 88, 90, 95, 109, 113, 114, 118,136, 139, 145, 146, 148, 161, 163, 165, 172,174, 176, 182, 190, 195, 200, 213, 223, 225,229, 236, 240

Current Alarms........................................ 195, 200

Current Date ............... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 174

Current displaying sign............................................................. 109

Current displaying........................................... 109

Current Groups list................................ 48, 50, 51Current Logged................... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Current Polling ................................................ 165

Current setting ................................................ 223

Current Time............................. 26, 28, 29, 30, 33

Current User Accounts ..................................... 10

Current User icon.............................................. 33

Current Users ....................................... 10, 33, 36

Currently 9, 10, 15, 19, 29, 33, 34, 36, 42, 47, 48,50, 56, 80, 81, 88, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 113,114, 122, 139, 146, 153, 157, 158, 159, 163,165, 172, 178, 182, 186, 195, 200, 213, 216,223, 235

Currently exhibiting ......................................... 235

Currently exist................................................. 114

Currently Logged In Users.............................. 216

Currently Logged-in .......................................... 34

Currently transmitting........................................ 92

Currently working............................................ 165

Currently-logged................................................ 34

Custom Report ................................................ 209

Customizability................................................ 227

Cycle Num .............................................................. 56

Cycle Lengths .............................................56, 65 Cycle Timer

value ............................................................. 85

Cycle Timer ....................................................... 85

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free TOD Circuits .................................................65

Cycle/Offset/Split/Free...................................... 65

D Darken............................................................... 56

Data

Sending ........................................................ 98 Data................................................................... 98

Data Bits............................................................56

Data covers ..................................................... 134

Data files ......................................................... 137

Data From Getting .......................................................... 97

Data From ................................................... 10, 95

Data handling needs .........................................90

Data list ............................................................. 86

Data Manager Quick History ................................................26 referencing.................................................... 26 state.............................................................. 26

Data Manager ................................................... 26

Data Manager ................................................... 26

Data Manager icon............................................26

Data Manager icon tool .....................................26

Data Manager Quick History Viewing ......................................................... 26

Data Manager Quick History............................. 26

Data Manager Status ........................................26

Data Manager Status Icon ........ 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Data Manager toolbar Double-clicking .............................................26

Data Manager toolbar .......................................26

Data object polling...........................................161

Data Objects . 83, 85, 86, 161, 163, 169, 172, 197




260

Data set ........................................................... 145

Data Type................................................ 163, 172

Database.........................................................134

Database listing.................................................99

Database Maintenance ...................................221

DataPath ......................................................... 134

Date Range For All Dates...............................................205

Date Range ............................................... 42, 121

Date Range ..................................................... 205

Date/Time..........................................................32

Dates.5, 32, 42, 76, 120, 121, 184, 195, 205, 224

Day Time............................................................107

Day........................................................ 56, 65, 76

Day Plans 1-16..................................................56 Day Plans 1-300................................................65

Day Plans tab..........................................118, 176

Daylight Savings .........................................65, 76

Deact-Delay ...................................................... 65

Default ............................................. 114, 134, 160

Default Layer Values.......................................134

Default Map Setting......................................................... 160

Default Map..................................................... 160

Default Time ............................................ 111, 112

Define Layer Groups .......................................133

Delay .................................................................65

Delay Inhibits.....................................................65

Delete Administration............................................. 211Alarm Condition ..........................................197 Connection....................................................45 Device.....................................................38, 40 Device Group..............................47, 48, 50, 51Device Type..................................................46 GIS Layer....................................................150 GIS Map View.............................................144 Group............................................................52 Icon............................................................. 228 Layer...........................................................148 Map.............................................................139 Map View............................................143, 144 Schedule Task............................................186 User Account ......................212, 213, 214, 215

Delete................................................ 1, 10, 34, 37

Delete Group Button Press.............................................................52

Delete Group Button..........................................48

Delete Group Button..........................................52

Delete Selected Task press ...........................................................186

Delete Selected Task ......................................186

Describe ...1, 5, 10, 29, 30, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,46, 48, 55, 81, 85, 103, 104, 117, 118, 120,122, 138, 143, 145, 149, 150, 157, 158, 159,163, 165, 169, 172, 176, 184, 189, 190, 197,205, 209, 216, 221, 224, 233, 234, 236, 237,238, 239, 240

Describes IQCentral Version 1.5.........................1

Description -- Entered........................................38

Description – This....................................163, 172

Det 1-12 Plans 1-3 Inhibits ..........................................65

Det 1-12.............................................................65

Detail display sign .............................................................153

Detail display ...................................................153

Details.1, 7, 10, 14, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 39, 40, 42,43, 45, 46, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 90, 104, 105,110, 111, 113, 114, 116, 118, 121, 128, 130,131, 138, 139, 143, 146, 148, 153, 157, 158,159, 161, 171, 176, 182, 189, 190, 197, 208,211, 215, 218, 223, 229, 232

Details About Configuring Layers....................148 Detected

CMU-programmed ..............................234, 240

Detected ...10, 28, 29, 56, 83, 114, 161, 172, 189,197, 200, 233, 234

Detected ..........................................................234

Detected ..........................................................234

Detected ..........................................................240

Detection Zone ..........................83, 172, 233, 234

Detector Accum .................................................56

Detector Accumulation ......................................56 Detector Constant Call ......................................56

Detector Copy Group.........................................65

Detector Data ..................................................165

Detector Diag.....................................................56

Detector Erratic Output......................................56

Detector Failure ...............................................234

Detector Non-Lock.............................................65



Index

261

Detector Plan No .............................................. 56

Detector Plans .................................................. 56

Detector Repair................................................. 56

Detector Switching Enable................................ 65

Detectors

result .............................................................. 4 Trailing ......................................................... 65

Detectors 1-12 .................................................. 65

Detectors 1-64 ............................................ 65, 76

DetectorVolume.............................................. 172

Device Accessing................................................... 159 Adding .......................................................... 39 Managing ..................................................... 37

Device............................................................... 37

Device Add/Edit window ................................... 38

Device Address Set .............................................................. 104

Device Address................................................. 39

Device Address............................................... 104

Device Configuration list ................................. 104

Device Configurations................. 10, 47, 104, 207

Device Configurations window Opens........................................................... 10

Device Configurations window.......................... 10

Device Configurations window........................ 104

Device Connection Details Viewing......................................................... 30

Device Connection Details................................ 30

Device Connection/Responding ....................... 30

Device fails ....................................................... 30

Device Groups button clicking ....................................... 47, 50, 51, 52

Device Groups Module Launching..................................................... 47

Device Groups Module ..................................... 47

Device Groups Module ..................................... 47

Device Groups window open ............................................................. 48 Parts ............................................................. 48 Using ............................................................ 48

Device Groups window..................................... 48

Device Heirarchy ............................................ 190

Device History................................................. 189

Device Icon ............................................... 10, 153

Device Icons Displayed window...................... 152

Device Icons Temporarily Displayed............... 152

Device Icons Temporarily Displayed window.. 152

Device List window............................................48

Device Log Polling

Opens ........................................................... 10 Device Log Polling ............................................10

Device Log Polling window Open........................................................... 175

Device Log Polling window ............................. 175

Device Logs ................................ 42, 43, 175, 207

Device Management Introduction................................................... 38 Open............................................................. 39

Device Manager ................................................ 37

Device Messages list .............................. 109, 129

Device Security .......................................122, 216

Device Security Module Opening ...................................................... 122

Device Security Module .................................. 122

Device Specific Auto Populate Polling tool ............................ 81set................................................................. 81

Device Specific.................................................. 81

Device Status Opens ........................................................... 10

Device Status tool .............................................30 Device Type Data............................................172

Device Type Log .............................................174

Device Type Log polling window..................... 174

Device Type Management ................................ 38

Device Type Manager....................................... 37

Device Type Module Link Icon ..................................................... 231open.............................................................. 46

Device Type Module ......................................... 46

Device Type Module ....................................... 231

Device Type Polling ........................................174

Device Types list......................................... 37, 38

Device View ..............................................33, 163

Device which.. 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90,92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129,152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184,207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,240




262

Device which manages sequence ...1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90,92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129,152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184,207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,240

Device window ................................................104

Device Zoom Levels Opens ........................................................... 10

Device Zoom Levels..........................................10

Device Zoom Levels..........................................81

Device-by-device.........................10, 37, 174, 190

DeviceDisplayName................................ 182, 184

Device-Level Security .................................1, 122

DeviceNode....................................................... 76

Devices Activity ...............................................205 Devices Connected .....................................26, 30

Devices Displayed list .....................................153

Devices Module Overview.......................................................38

Devices Module.................................................38

Device's NTCIP Status Viewing ......................................................... 37

Device's NTCIP Status......................................37

Devices on Maps.............................................131

Devices Responding Status............................................................30

Devices Responding .........................................30

Devices Temporarily Displayed list ................. 153

Devices –This list ............................................172

Devices Toolbar ................................................25

Devices Window.......................................... 39, 40

Device-specific ............................................25, 92

DeviceStatus41Device...................................... 42

DeviceStatus41Device-CommStatus ................ 43

DeviceStatus41Device-History.......................... 43 DeviceStatus41DeviceType ..............................42

Device-type-based standard ...............................1

Diag Green Ext..................................................56

Diagnostic Recalls.............................................56

Diagnostic Tests use ..............................................................113

Diagnostic Tests..............................................113

Diagnostic Tests ..............................................114

Diagnostic Tests ..............................................116

Diagnostic Topics ....................................114, 116

Diagnostics ......1, 10, 56, 107, 113, 114, 116, 223

Dial Retries ........................................................56

Difference ..........................................95, 152, 159

Different in Active Memory' - The ......................95

Different in Both Places' - The...........................95

Different in the Device' - The.............................95

Dim Alt Half........................................................76

Dim Don't Walik .................................................56

Dim Dont Walk...................................................65

Dim Red.................................................56, 65, 76

Direction ..........................................................153

Disable AOR......................................................56 Disappear ........................................................153

Discarded ........................................................122

Discrete input discrete output ......................................37, 103

Discrete output discrete input.........................................37, 103

Discribes..............................................................1

Discusses Coordination....................................................1

Discusses ............................................................1

Display Alarm History ......................................195

Display button..................................................109

Display Device History.....................................195

Display Message on Sign................................109

Display Object .................................................159

Display Object Polling Rate.............................159

Display Only ............................................109, 144

Display Only button .........................................109

Displays command ..........................................152

Dist ....................................................................56 Dock button

choose ........................................................200

Dock button .....................................................200

Dock/Restore button........................................195

DON'T DO IT .....................................................46

Door Open.......................................................113

Door Status......................................................116



Index

263

Double-clicking Data Manager toolbar .................................. 26 NTCIP Server............................................... 28

Double-clicking ................................................. 26

Double-clicking ................................................. 28

Double-clicking ............................................... 104

Download.......................................................... 90

Drag Icon ............................................................ 153

Drag ................................ 38, 83, 97, 98, 144, 152

Drag ................................................................ 153

Drag ................................................................ 157

Drag ................................................................ 158

Drop... 38, 86, 109, 120, 139, 144, 145, 152, 153,205, 212, 218, 223, 224, 228, 231

Drop Address.............................................. 38, 39

DST................................................................... 56

DST Adjustment................................................ 56

Dual Entry ..................................... 56, 65, 76, 234

Duration traffic signals .............................. 152, 165, 178

Duration ... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 65, 76, 81, 86,90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118,124, 129

Duty .................................................................. 88

Dyn Max Step ................................................... 76

Dynamic Press .......................................................... 169

Dynamic.......................................................... 169

Dynamic Max .................................................... 76

Dynamic Object Configuration Opening...................................................... 169 tells ............................................................. 169

Dynamic Object Configuration . 10, 161, 163, 165,168

Dynamic Object Configuration........................ 169



Dynamic Objects............................... 20, 163, 169

Dynamic Objects button Press .......................................................... 169

Dynamic Objects button.................................. 169

Dynamic Objects Configuration window ......... 169

Dynamic Omit/Recall ........................................ 65

Dynamic Omits ................................................. 65

Dynamic Recall .................................................65

E Eastbound Thru.................................................56

Easter Monday.................................................. 56

Edge IQCentral window .......................................195

Edge................................................ 7, 10, 38, 134

Edge................................................................ 195

Edge................................................................ 197

Edge................................................................ 200

Edge................................................................ 208

Edit Connection ...................................................45 Device.....................................................38, 40 Device Types................................................ 46 Existing Alarm Condition ............................ 197 Existing Map ...............................................139 Existing Message ....................................... 109 Font ............................................................ 117 Icon..................................................... 228, 229 LayerName................................................. 134 SNMP Device Security ............................... 122 Values........................................................... 92 Zoom Areas ................................................ 139

Edit ..........................................1, 7, 10, 14, 34, 37

Edit > Undo ..................................................... 208

Edit Connection Button ..................................... 45

Edit Device Button.............................................40 Edit existing icons ...........................................228

Edit existing messages ................................... 110

Edit Master Fonts10, 34, 107, 109, 113, 117, 118,120, 121, 176

Edit menu................................................184, 186

Edit Message button clicking........................................................ 109 press........................................................... 110

Edit Message button .......................................109

Edit Message button .......................................110

Edit Message window ..................................... 109

EEPROM............................................. 56, 65, 235

EEPROM Loaded w/Keyboard ......................... 65

EEPROM Write .................................................56

EGB........................................................... 65, 234

EGB Percentage ............................................... 65

EIA/TIA-485 Serial Data.......................... 234, 240




264

Either pedestrian....................................................... 4

Either...................................................................4

Electronically erasable/programmable............ 235

Email ...................................................................4

Emergency ..........................1, 101, 127, 235, 238 Emergency Response.............101, 127, 235, 238

Empty .............................................................. 109

Enable set ...............................................................163

Enable .................9, 42, 56, 65, 76, 137, 139, 153

Enable ............................................................. 163

Enable ............................................................. 168

Enable Coord During Cyclic Int .........................65

Enable Leading Overlaps..................................65

Enable Signal Head Program............................ 65 End

Pedestrian Permissive................................ 235 Permissive .................................................. 235 Ref ................................................................65

End Absence Mon Hour ....................................65

End Date ......................................................... 205

End Duration ................................................... 129

End Duration Message....................................129

End Duration message specified ....................129

End-of-Line Delay .............................................56

Enhanced .......................................................... 65

Enhanced Perm ................................................65

Enhancements ............................................ 5, 218

Ennumerated Example........................................................92

Ennumerated..................................................... 92

Enter Description..................................................138 Name ..........................................138, 144, 212

Enter 8, 10, 36, 38, 39, 76, 92, 111, 117, 129, 134

Enter/Edit ......................................39, 40, 45, 104

Enter/Edit Connections window ........................45

Enter/Edit Device ................................10, 39, 104

Enter/Edit Device Type Opens ........................................................... 10

Enter/Edit Device Type .....................................10

Enter/Edit Device Type ...................................104

Enter/Edit Device Type window

Close...........................................................104 opens ..........................................................104

Enter/Edit Device Type window.......................104

Entire 820A/OSAM ............................................56

Entire Database.......................90, 92, 97, 98, 225

Enumerated Values ...........................................92 EP....................................................................235

EPP .................................................................235

Equal ...............................................................208

Erratic ................................................................65

Erratic Output ....................................................56

Error......1, 10, 34, 43, 56, 92, 107, 114, 116, 120,137, 149, 152, 207, 234, 240

Error Logging on Message Signs ....................120

Error Logs

Opens ...........................................................10 portion .........................................................120

Error Message .................................................152

ESRI ....................................................................1

ESRI GIS.....................................................1, 137

Ethernet .....1, 10, 38, 39, 104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Event Groups...........................................120, 121

Event Log .....10, 34, 65, 120, 121, 205, 221, 223,224

Event log records system.........................................................223

Event log records.............................................223

Event Log Size open ............................................................223

Event Log Size ..................................................10

Event Log Size ................................................223

Event Log Size icon select...........................................................223

Event Log Size icon.........................................223

Event Log Size Module Opening ......................................................223

Event Log Size Module....................................223 Events..............................................................120

Example Ennumerated ................................................92

Example...................29, 33, 42, 53, 54, 85, 86, 88

Example IQCentral ............................................54

Example Network ..............................................53

Example Screen ..............................................122



Index

265

Example Topography........................................ 54

Excel file ......................................................... 124

Exceptionof ............................................. 236, 240

Existing GIS ............................................................. 149

Existing ........................................................... 149 Existing Alarm Condition

Editing ........................................................ 197

Existing Alarm Condition................................. 197

Existing Device Group Modifying.............................. 47, 48, 50, 51, 52

Existing Device Type ........................................ 46

Existing device type except changes........................................................ 46

Existing device type except .............................. 46

Existing Group Modifying...................................................... 51

Existing Group ............................................ 48, 50

Existing Group .................................................. 51

Existing Map Editing ........................................................ 139

Existing Map ................................................... 139

Existing Message Edit ............................................................. 109

Existing Message............................................ 109

Expand

Scenario ..................................................... 129 Scenarios ........................................... 128, 129

Expand............................................................ 128

Expand............................................................ 129

Expand............................................................ 129

Expand............................................................ 197

Expect Status ......................................................... 161

Expect............................................................... 39

Expect............................................................. 161

Exporting Report Data ................................................ 208

Exporting......................................................... 208

Ext Coor Type................................................... 56

Ext Start Override Preemeption........................ 65

Extended................................................... 34, 223

Extended Green Band .................................... 234

Extended Logging......................... 10, 21, 34, 223

F F1 34

F2 34

F3 pressing ..............................................157, 158

F3 34

F3 157

F3 158

F4 34

F6 34, 127

F6 key Press .......................................................... 127

F6 key ............................................................. 127

F7 Press .......................................................... 195

F7 34 F7 195

F7 200

Facilities ..................................................238, 239

Fail Max Recall Phase ...................................... 65

Fail Max Recall Times....................................... 65

Fail Max Time....................................................65

Fault Frame....................................................... 76

Feature emphasizes........................................ 216

Features ... 1, 5, 56, 101, 105, 107, 122, 123, 134,138, 148, 178, 195, 197, 216, 234, 236

February 20......................................................... 1

February 2007..................................................... 5

February 2008..................................................... 5

Feed NTCIP........................................................... 10

Feed .................................................................. 10

Feed .................................................................. 56

Fiber Optic Modem..........................................235

Field . 1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 28, 32, 33, 37, 38, 39, 43,45, 46, 48, 51, 53, 54, 56, 64, 65, 76, 80, 81,83, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 104, 107, 109,111, 114, 118, 120, 124, 131, 133, 134, 138,143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 159,160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 176, 178, 182,184, 185, 186, 197, 205, 207, 209, 212, 213,214, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229,231, 232, 235, 240

Field Name.............................................. 148, 149




266

Field set...........................................................169

Field stores......................................................114

FieldName.......................................................134

Fields appropriate .............................................90

Figure1, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29,

30, 32, 33, 37, 39, 42, 43, 48, 50, 51, 52, 54,83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 101,110, 111, 117, 131, 143, 146, 148, 150, 153,157, 158, 159, 163, 165, 168, 169, 174, 182,184, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202, 215, 216,218, 225

File fields ......................................................... 134

File menu Open ...........................................................208

File menu ...................................................... 9, 36

File menu ........................................................ 208

File menu ........................................................ 213

File Name................138, 148, 208, 209, 228, 229

Filename ......................................................... 229

Filter - Device .................................................. 163

Filter - Device Type.........................................163

Filtered Group ................................................. 163

Filters ....................10, 29, 42, 163, 195, 205, 209

Find Information ..................................................1

Finished adding............................................... 138

Finished creating............................................. 109

Finished modifying ..........................................197 Firmware ..1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55, 81, 86, 90, 92,

97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116, 118, 129, 152,157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178, 182, 184, 207,227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 240

Firmware programming ....1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,237, 238, 240

Fixed Time ...................................................... 112

Flash ....56, 65, 76, 101, 110, 114, 202, 216, 234,235, 237, 240

Flash Alt Half Hertz ...........................................76

Flash Code........................................................ 65

Flash Dont ......................................................... 65

Flash Dont Walk................................................65

Flash Don't Walk ............................................... 56

Flash Dwell........................................................76

Flash Entry Phase .............................................76

Flash Feedback Detected..................................56

Flash Memory..................................................235

FLASH mode...........................................234, 240

Flash OL Green .................................................56

Flash OL Red ....................................................56

Flash OL Yellow ................................................56

Flash On/Off ....................................................110

Flash Plans 1-16................................................65

Flash Red ..........................................................76

Flash Red Overlaps...........................................56

Flash Red Phases .............................................56

Flash Repeat Interval ......................................202

Flashes/minute ..................................................65

Floating Windows .......................................................15

Floating..............................................................15

Fltxoy ...............................................................110

FO..............................................................65, 235

FOM.................................................................235

Font any set ........................................................117 Editing .........................................................117

Font ...................................1, 10, 34, 37, 107, 114

Font Color........................................................143

Font Editor access.........................................................117

Font Editor.......................................................117

Font Editor.......................................................117

Font Editor Interface Using...........................................................117

Font Editor Interface........................................117

Font Editor window parts ............................................................117

Font Editor window..........................................117

Font files............................................................10 Font Size .........................................................143

Font View Opens ...........................................................10

Font View...........................................................10

Font View.........................................................117

FontBold ..........................................................134

FontColorBlue..................................................134



Index

267

FontColorGreen.............................................. 134

FontColorRed ................................................. 134

FontItalic ......................................................... 134

FontName ....................................................... 134

Fonts Module .................................................. 117

FontSize.......................................................... 134

For All Dates ................................................... 205

For All Device Types....................................... 205

For All Devices................................................ 205

For All Users ................................................... 205

For Date Range .............................................. 205

For Device Type ..................................... 169, 172

For Selected Device Type .............................. 205

For Selected Devices...................................... 205

For Selected Users ......................................... 205 Force....... 30, 56, 65, 76, 122, 160, 234, 235, 237

Force Off................................................... 65, 235

Force Output..................................................... 56

ForceOff.......................................................... 235

Fore Color....................................................... 202

Forever ........................................................... 129

FormBuilder Launching................................................... 232

FormBuilder ................................ 10, 34, 227, 232

FormBuilder .................................................... 232 FormBuilder Interface ..................................... 232

FormBuilder Module ....................................... 232

Free .................................. 4, 56, 65, 92, 101, 239

Free Plan .......................................................... 56

Free, Flash...................................................... 101

Friday checked ....................................... 118, 176

From activating ............................................... 146

From Database ................................................. 98

From eating up................................................ 175

FSK................................................................. 235

FTP Data .......................................................... 21

Full . 10, 15, 29, 33, 128, 134, 138, 144, 178, 211,213, 218, 223, 228, 229

Full Extent....................................................... 144

Full listing command ................................................... 218

Full listing........................................................ 218

Fully Actuated .................................................235

Fully-actuated.................................................. 233

Further Details........................................... 38, 116

G

G1C...................................................................65 G2C...................................................................65

GBP Omits ........................................................ 56

Generalized Real-time ...................... 88, 136, 165

Generate ......................................................... 207

Generating Data Reporting .................................................... 207

Generating Data.............................................. 207

Geographical...... 20, 81, 133, 134, 137, 144, 145,146, 148, 149, 150, 153, 158, 159, 160

Geo-located..................................................... 153

Get From Sign......................................... 118, 176

Gif...................................................................... 85

GIS Device Zoom Levels Setting ........................................................ 152

GIS Device Zoom Levels ................................ 152

GIS Layer Groups Creating ...................................................... 148 Opens ........................................................... 34

GIS Layers ..............................................148, 150

GIS Layers Module

Opening ...................................................... 148 GIS Layers Module ......................................... 148

GIS Map. 5, 10, 20, 131, 134, 137, 144, 145, 146,148, 153, 158, 159

GIS Map Data Loading....................................................... 137

GIS Map Data ................................................. 137

GIS Map Data ................................................. 159

GIS Map Layer Groups ...................................146

GIS Map Layers Defining ...................................................... 134

GIS Map Layers ..............................................134

GIS Map Viewer ......................................153, 158

GIS Map Viewer Interface ............................... 158

GIS Map Viewer switches ............................... 153

GIS Zoom Level Setting ........................................................ 153

GIS Zoom Level ..............................................153




268

GIS Zoom Level .............................................. 240

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder Maps menu .........................................236, 240

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder ..................236

GIS Zoom Levels commandunder ..................240

GIS Zoom Levels window open............................................................153

GIS Zoom Levels window ...............................153

GIS Zoom Settings Opening ...................................................... 153 Opens ........................................................... 34

GIS Zoom Settings...................................... 10, 20

GIS Zoom Settings............................................ 34

GIS Zoom Settings.......................................... 153

GIS-based ....................................................... 134

GISData .......................................................... 137

GIS-enabled ....................................131, 137, 143

GIS-enabled IQCentral............................ 131, 143

GIS-mapping ................................................... 137

GIS-mapping enabled .....................................137

Give.........104, 110, 134, 163, 168, 200, 209, 233

Global IQCentral Modules...................................7

Glossary .............................................................. 1

Glossary-Connected .......................................234

Glossary-Device..............................................234

Glossary-Disconnected................................... 234 Glossary-GIS................................................... 235

Glossary-HDLC Address.................................236

Glossary-Maintenance Icon ............................236

Glossary-Marginal ...........................................236

Glossary-MIB .................................................. 237

Glossary-Military Time ....................................237

Glossary-NTCIP .............................................. 237

Glossary-Object Identifier................................237

Glossary-Object Name....................................238

Glossary-Offline ..............................................238

Glossary-Online ..............................................238

Glossary-SNMP ..............................................239

Glossary-STMP...............................................239

Glossary-Zoom................................................ 240

Go Maps........................................................... 139

Go.......9, 15, 28, 36, 42, 50, 55, 65, 81, 103, 104,122, 127, 131, 134, 137, 138

Go OFF............................................................202

Good Friday.......................................................56

Graphic File Changing.......................................................85

Graphic File .......................................................85

Green start .............................................................239

Green....56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 95, 109, 113, 116,120, 233, 234, 235, 237

Green...............................................................239

Green Extension Time.......................................56

Green Overlap...................................................83

Green Phase selected.........................................................86

Green Phase .....................................................83 Green Phase .....................................................86

Greenband.......................................................235

Greenband Analysis ........................................235

Grid Display Type ............................................................159

Grid Display .....................................................159

Group...........................................................50, 52

Group button clicking ..........................................................47

Group Description........................................48, 51Group Name..........................................10, 48, 51

Groups List ........................................................48

Groups Module..................................................47

Guaranteed Passage.........................................76

H Handling

Alarms.........................................................200

Handling ..........................................................200

Hardware piece .................................1, 10, 161, 175, 229

HDLC.........................................................65, 236

HDLC Address.................................................236

HDLC stands ...................................................236

Heirarchical indicate................................................237, 238

Heirarchical......................................................237



Index

269

Heirarchical..................................................... 237

Heirarchical..................................................... 238

Heirarchical..................................................... 238

Heirarchy ................................................ 237, 238

Help File Version 1.29 ........................................ 1

Help File Version 1.32 ........................................ 1

Help menu .............................................. 131, 153

HelpTopic-Time .............................................. 113

Higher PE ......................................................... 65

High-level Data Link Control ........................... 236

Historical Alarm............................................... 197

History....................................... 5, 26, 28, 43, 189

Horizontal........................................................ 153

Horizontal Border............................................ 113

Horizontally Tiling............................................................. 15

Horizontally ....................................................... 10

Horizontally ....................................................... 15

Hovering Over ........................................... 26, 28, 29, 30

How GIS Map Layers Work ............................ 134

However, IQCentral .......................................... 26

HTM ................................................................ 208

I I/O Mode ........................................................... 65 I/O Steering....................................................... 65

Ico ........................................................... 228, 229

Ico file ..................................................... 228, 229

Icon Adding ........................................................ 231Drag ........................................................... 153 Placing ....................................................... 153

Icon button Link............................................................. 231

Icon button ........................................................ 83

Icon button ...................................................... 231

Icon Detail button............................................ 229

Icon File contains...................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 228

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File .......................................................... 229

Icon File Name................................................228

Icon From.................................... 29, 85, 228, 229

Icon Management ....................... 10, 34, 152, 227

Icon Names............................................. 228, 229

Icon Names list................................................ 228

Icon opens window.......................................................... 28

Icon opens.........................................................28

Icon representing ............................................153

Icons Adding ..........................................83, 228, 229 Alarm Statistics............................................. 29 Creating ...................................................... 229 Deleting ...................................................... 228 Editing.................................................228, 229 Linking ........................................................ 131locate .......................................................... 229

name........................................................... 229 Placing........................................................ 152 see Adding..................................................231Sign .................................................... 157, 158 Tooltip............................................... 26, 28, 30

Icons............................................................ 10, 26

Icons associatedwith............................... 236, 240

Icons Displayed window..................................152

Icons operate slightly differently........................ 85

Icons Temporarily Displayed...........................152

Icons Temporarily Displayed window.............. 152

Icons/Intersection.............................................. 85

ID 65, 83, 163, 172, 233, 234

IDs NTCIP........................................................... 10

IDs.....................................................................10

If button.......................................................... 113

If Extended Logging ........................................223

If O/L ................................................................. 65

If You............................................................... 214

Image File .....................................5, 85, 139, 229 IMPORTANT..................................................... 46

Important - Remember ....................................175

In Device Type................................................104 popup menu................................................200




270

In 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26,28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42,43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56,64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,97, 98, 99, 101, 103

In Both Places ................................................... 95

In communicating ............................................175 In configuring map....................................... 5, 165

In contrast ....................................................... 152

In installing ...................................................... 104

In interfering .................................................... 233

In tripping ........................................................ 195

Incident Configuring ................................................. 123

Incident........................................................10, 34

Incident............................................................123

Incident............................................................124 Incident Management Module.....10, 34, 123, 124

Incident Management Template.xls ................124

Incident Spreadsheets Configuring ................................................. 124

Incident Spreadsheets ....................................124

Include Alarm Configurations ..................................189

Include1, 5, 10, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48,55, 76, 81, 83, 85, 103, 104, 107, 118, 120,122, 124, 127, 129, 134, 143, 145, 157, 158,159, 163, 165, 169, 172, 174, 176, 184

Increment ........................................................ 175

Index use ..................................................................1

Index ...................................................................1

Indicate Activation .................................................... 129 heirarchical .........................................237, 238 which fails ................................................... 234

Indicate.4, 26, 28, 30, 33, 48, 83, 90, 92, 95, 114,118, 124, 127, 129

Info ............................................................ 34, 202 Information path ...10, 37, 38, 45, 83, 86, 88, 101,

103, 104, 120, 122, 136, 163, 184, 234

Informational setting ......................................................... 202

Informational ..................................................... 29

Informational ...................................................202

Informational Alarm

Typical Settings...........................................202

Informational Alarm .........................................202

Informative.......................................................189

Inhibit Delay.......................................................56

Inhibit Max .........................................................65

Input Lock..........................................................65

Input Objects ...................................................124

Inserts Alarm icon .....................................................86

Instance .................1, 81, 146, 152, 163, 172, 207

Instance – In ....................................................172

Integer .............................................................169

Intelligent transportation systems............211, 227

Interacting With...............................................................98

Interacting..........................................................98 Interaction With

Central Database ..........................................98

Interaction With..................................................98

Interactive Upload/Download Module................53

Interconnection..................................................37

Interface...............................................................7

Interface Controls ............................................172

Internet ............................104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Intersection..........................................81, 83, 236

Intersection Configuration..................................85

Intersection Failed .............................................83

Intersection Flash ..............................................83

Intersection Icon Image Library .........................85

Intersection Icons Linking...........................................................86 Setting Up Map Polling .........................88, 136

Intersection Icons ........................................81, 85

Intersection ONLINE..........................................83

Intersection Polling Assistant dialog................165

Intersection Status...................................157, 158 Intersection Status window

open ....................................................157, 158

Intersection Status window..............................157

Intersection Status window..............................158

Intersection Toolbar...........................................22

Intersection/Sensor..........................................159

Intersections > Copy Database .........................10



Index

271

Intersections > Upload/Download... 10, 34, 97, 98

Intersections Module......................................... 81

Interval56, 65, 101, 123, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171,172, 174, 175, 178, 235, 236, 238

Intro Polling ........................................................ 171

Intro................................................................. 171

Introduction Device Management .................................... 38

Introduction ....................................................... 38

IP shows ........................................................... 38

IP 239

IP 239

IQ 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24,25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39,

40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,55, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92,95, 97, 98, 99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109,110, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123,124, 127, 128, 129, 131, 133, 134, 136, 137,138, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150,152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 165,169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 181, 182,184, 185, 186, 189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202,205, 207, 208, 209, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215,216, 218, 221, 223, 224, 225, 227, 228, 229,231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

IQ ATC Controller

Parameter Fields.......................................... 76 IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 55

IQ ATC Controller ............................................. 76

IQ ATC Fields ................................................... 76

IQ CentralServer’ ............................................ 178

IQCentral 1.5 .................................................... 47

IQCentral Access.................... 205, 207, 221, 223

IQCentral Access Database ........................... 221

IQCentral application Closes .......................................................... 34

IQCentral application ........................................ 10 IQCentral application ........................................ 34

IQCentral BMP................................................ 131

IQCentral computer’s...................................... 184

IQCentral Database ............................ 95, 98, 134

IQCentral Help ........................................ 1, 10, 19

IQCentral Help System..................................... 34

IQCentral Installation Manual ............................. 5

IQCentral Layer............................................... 148

IQCentral login ................................................101

IQCentral login/logout .....................................205

IQCentral Maps .................................53, 157, 158

IQCentral Menus...........................................7, 10

IQCentral Network.............................................55

IQCentral Operating Manual Welcome......................................................... 1

IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 1

IQCentral Operating Manual ............................... 5

IQCentral Report Selection Module ................ 205

IQCentral Reports Reports. Opens ............................................10

IQCentral Reports .............................................10

IQCentral Reports ...........................................178

IQCentral System...................................... 53, 224 IQCentral toolbars .............................................10

IQCentral Update Release History...................... 5

IQCentral Version 1.2 Release Notes................. 5




IQCentral/Device Icons/Intersection ................. 85

IQCentral's Map Management ........................ 137

IQCentral's Map View .....................................139

IQCentral's MapFiles....................................... 137

IQCentral's Status bar..... 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 30, 34

IQCentrol......................................................... 153

IQConnect Hardware ........................................ 55

Isonly............................................................... 236

IT 131, 143, 221

ITS...... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81,104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172,184, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240

J January 2006 ...................................................... 5

Jlx 110

Jpg .................................................................... 85

Jpx................................................................... 110

July 2005............................................................. 5

June 2008 ........................................................... 5




272

K Keyboard...1, 7, 14, 15, 34, 56, 92, 157, 158, 232

Keyboard Beep ................................................. 56

Keyboard Shortcuts...........................................34

King Day............................................................56

L LabelPosition................................................... 134

Large Size ....................................................... 153

Large Tool Icons ...............................................10

Last Car Passage..............................................65

Last Car Passage Phases................................. 56

Last Edited .......................................................... 1

Layer ...............................................................149

Layer Editor Open ...........................................................134

Layer Editor.....................................................134

LayerDetailID .................................................. 134

LayerFileName................................................134

LayerGroupID.................................................. 134

LayerLoadOrder ..............................................134

LayerName Edit.............................................................. 134

LayerName...................................................... 134

LayerOrder ...................................................... 134

Layers button ..........................................148, 149

Layers displays list ............................................................... 148

Layers displays ...............................................148

Layers Module.................................................148

Layers window exit .............................................................. 148 Use .............................................................134

Layers window ................................................ 134

Layers window ................................................ 148

LCD Backlight ...................................................56 LCD Contrast .................................................... 56

LCD Setup.........................................................56

Lead Detector....................................................65

Lead/Lag COS..............................................................65

Lead/Lag ........................................................... 65

Lead/Lag ......................................................... 236

Lead/Lag Operation.........................................236

Learning Log On ............................................................7

Learning...............................................................7

Leave Alarm System Settings window...................202

Leave.................................88, 134, 163, 168, 169

Leave...............................................................202

Leave Connected ............................................163

Left....7, 10, 15, 26, 28, 30, 42, 43, 48, 51, 52, 85,86, 97, 98, 99, 117, 120, 144, 145, 148, 163,182, 184, 185, 186, 190, 195, 197, 200, 208,209, 212

Left-side...................................................212, 213

Less Than........................................................153

Letting

IQCentral.....................................................134 Letting..............................................................134

Level .......1, 10, 29, 33, 34, 36, 53, 81, 85, 97, 98,117, 122, 131, 143, 153, 190, 197, 200, 202,211, 212, 213, 216, 218, 236, 237, 238, 240

Level1 ..............................................................211

Level2 ..............................................................211

Level3 ..............................................................211

Levelicons................................................236, 240

Levels commandunder ............................236, 240

Levels Module .................................................218 Limit ...................................................................65

Line Justification ..............................................110

Line Volts.................................................113, 116

Link Icon button ..................................................231Icons ...........................................................131Intersection Icons..........................................86

Link .10, 19, 23, 24, 25, 34, 37, 46, 55, 76, 81, 83,85

Link Icon

Device Type......................10, 21, 34, 152, 231Device Type Module ...................................231

Link Icon ............................................................10

Link Icon ............................................................21

Link Icon ............................................................34

Link Icon ..........................................................152

Link Icon ..........................................................231

Linux operating system..........................5, 55, 233



Index

273

List .................................................................. 216

List button Add Object ................................................. 172

List button ....................................................... 172

Listing Layers displays .......................................... 148 Viewing....................................................... 122

Listing ............................................................. 122

Listing ............................................................. 148

Listing ............................................................. 172

Loading BMP Map Data ........................................... 137 GIS Map Data ............................................ 137 Preset Configuration .................................. 105

Loading ........................................................... 105

Loading ........................................................... 137

Local ......... 26, 55, 56, 76, 80, 131, 143, 178, 216 Local Time Differential ...................................... 76

Location Changing.................................................... 186 such................................................ 53, 88, 136

Location ................................................ 10, 22, 34

Location during Custom....................................................... 178

Location during ............................................... 178

Lock .................................................................. 65

Log Configuration ........................................... 124

Log Configured ............................................... 124

Log File ................................................... 121, 223

Log Object List Device Type ............................................... 172

Log Object List................................................ 172

Log Off Use................................................................. 9

Log Off ................................................................ 7

Log Off warning window ................................... 36

Log On ................................................................ 8

Log Polling attempts ....................................... 175

Log Polling data .............................................. 171

Log polling list ................................................. 172

Log Polling section.......................................... 161

Log Polling tools ............................................. 171

Log Polling windows ............................... 171, 175

Log Sample Period ........................................... 65

Log Table ........................................................ 124

Logged In User.............................. 10, 26, 33, 216

Logging ........................................................... 171

Logging Options.......................... 10, 34, 175, 223

Logging Options menu.................................... 223

Look Device List ....................................................51

Looks like .......................................................... 90

Loop .................................................................. 56

Loop Length ................................................ 56, 65

M M3000 ............................................................. 236

M3000 Master Parameter Fields ..........................................76

M3000 Master ................................................... 76

MAC Address .................................................. 236

Main St .............................................................. 65

Main Street Clearance .................................... 237

Maintenance choose ........................................................ 213 Tim42.......................................................... 213

Maintenance............................112, 152, 211, 212

Maintenance.................................................... 240

Maintenance Icons.......................... 152, 236, 240

Maintenance Level ..........................................212

Maintenance list ..............................................213

MaintenanceIcons................................... 236, 240

Malfunction Management Unit ........ 234, 237, 240

Manage Traffic Signs Controls ...................................................... 107

Manage Traffic Signs ......................................107

Management 1, 5, 10, 21, 28, 37, 38, 39, 46, 103,122, 137, 178, 227, 237, 238

Management Module ........................................10

Manager ..........................................26, 28, 33, 37

Manages using NTCIP communciations protocol ..... 1, 10, 161,175, 229

Managing Devices......................................................... 37 Open............................................................. 33 User ............................................................ 212

Managing Device Groups............................ 47, 48

Managing Devices............................. 1, 37, 47, 48




274

Managing IQCentral Security ..........................212

Managing User Accounts ................................216

Manual ....................1, 56, 65, 114, 171, 233, 236

Manual Control Enable....................................236

Manual Coord Plan ...........................................56

Manual Poll .............................................113, 114

Manufacturer Specific .....................................232

Manufacturer Specific Object Groups ............. 232

Map Setting......................................................... 134

Map Area.........................................................138

Map Configuration toolbar...........20, 81, 163, 169

Map Data Storing ........................................................ 137

Map Data...........................1, 19, 20, 34, 131, 134

Map Data.........................................................137 Map Data.........................................................143

Map Data.........................................................145

Map Data.........................................................163

Map Data button clicking........................................................ 163

Map Data button..............................................163

Map Data Storage ...........................................137

Map Display Area....................................157, 158

Map displays ....................................................... 1

Map Dynamic Objects .......................................34

Map File ..................................134, 138, 139, 159

Map icon.................................................. 157, 158

Map Layer Detail .............................................134

Map loading activity.................................157, 158

Map Management Overview.....................................................137

Map Management ...........................................137

Map Management icon clicking........................................................139

Press...........................................................137 Map Management icon....................................137

Map Management icon....................................139

Map Management Module With ......................143

Map Management Module With GIS Maps ..... 143

Map Manager Use .............................................................134

Map Manager .................................................. 134

Map Module.................................................10, 34

Map Name...............................................139, 160

Map Open uses ............................................................165

Map Open........................................................165

Map Open polling interval................................165 Map Paths

Setting.........................................................134

Map Paths .......................................................134

Map Polling Configuring..................................165, 168, 169 utilizing ........................................................161

Map Polling......................................5, 86, 88, 136

Map Polling AND .............................................175

Map Polling Configuration Open ...........................................................168

Opening ......................................................163 Opens ...........................................................10

Map Polling Configuration .................................10

Map Polling Configuration ...............................161





Map Polling Configuration button ....................168

Map Polling Configuration window ..165, 168, 169

Map polling data ........................................88, 161Map Polling in..................................................161

Map polling list...........................................88, 163

Map polling objects............................................86

Map Polling section .........................................161

Map View Creation ..........................................145

Map Viewer Module.............5, 157, 158, 159, 165

MapFiles ..................................................134, 137

Maps > GIS Zoom Levels................................153

Maps > Map Management...............................134

Maps List .........................................................160

Maps opens.............................................159, 165

Marginal.........42, 43, 83, 122, 175, 234, 236, 238

Marginal Count Set...............................................................175

Marginal Count ................................................175

Marginal Poll Skip Set...............................................................175



Index

275

Marginal Poll Skip ........................................... 175

MaskLabels..................................................... 134

Master 1, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,46, 53, 55, 65, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,98, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114,117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 133, 136,

138, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161,163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 182,184, 186, 205, 207, 209, 213, 221, 223, 225,227, 229, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237,238, 239, 240

Master Address........................................... 38, 39

Master Fonts............................................. 23, 117

Master Fonts Module ...................................... 117

Master Identification.......................................... 65

Master Port ....................................................... 65

Master Table....................................... 46, 86, 169

Match .................................. 92, 95, 134, 213, 214

Max Hold Time.................................................. 56

Max II ................................................................ 56

Max Initial.................................................... 65, 76

Max Presence................................................... 76

Max Queue Time .............................................. 56

Max Recall .................................................. 56, 65

Max Time .......................................................... 56

Max Vehicle Recall ........................................... 76

Maximum Ambient Temperature .................... 113 Maximum Cabinet Temperature ..................... 113

Maximum Init Time ........................................... 56

Maximum Limit.................................................. 56

Maximum Step.................................................. 56

MCE.................................................... 56, 65, 236

Mdb file ........................................................... 225

MDI item ......................................................... 218

Media Access Control..................................... 236

Medium Small Size ......................................... 153

Member........................... 37, 48, 51, 52, 213, 218

Memory......... 76, 90, 92, 114, 184, 186, 235, 238

Memory Management..................................... 114

Menu item ....................................... 157, 158, 218

Menus ............................................................... 10

Message Commands...................................... 109

Message Defaults ........................... 112, 113, 114

Message Defaults Tab .................................... 114

Message Editor ............................................... 110

Message List ................................... 109, 110, 129

Message Number.................... 109, 114, 118, 176

Message Page

Displaying...........................................111, 112 Message Page ................................................111

Message Page ................................................112

Message Requestor ........................................114

Message Sign Bulk Operations....................... 207

Message Sign Control 23, 25, 113, 117, 118, 120,121, 176

Message Sign Log Retrieval ................... 161, 207

Message Sign Management .. 109, 113, 117, 118,120, 121, 176

Message Sign Schedules window Opening ..............................................118, 176

Message Sign Schedules window .................. 118

Message Sign Schedules window .................. 176

Message Sign Scheduling utilizing........................................................ 161

Message Sign Scheduling .............................. 161

Message Sign Summary 109, 117, 118, 120, 121,176

Message Sign toolbar ............... 23, 107, 122, 127

Message Type.................................................109

Messages SME-Displaying.......................................... 111

Messages........................................................ 111

Methods/tools.................................................. 207

Microsoft Office application................................. 1

Microsoft Windows™ Services..........................28

Microsoft® Paint.............................................. 139

Middle................................33, 81, 83, 85, 92, 190

MIlitary Time....................................................237

Military’ ............................................................ 184

Min .............................................................. 56, 65

Min Cycle Length ..............................................56

Min Duration...................................................... 76

Min Ext Time ..................................................... 56

Min Gap....................................................... 65, 76

Min Green ................................................... 65, 76

Min Length ........................................................ 65




276

Min Presence .................................................... 65

Min Recall ................................................... 56, 65

Min Red Revert ................................................. 65

Min Time ........................................................... 56

Min Vehicle Recall.............................................76

Min Walk ........................................................... 76

Minimized Windows ..........................................15

Minimum............................................................ 56

Minimum Ambient Temperature......................113

Minimum Cabinet Temperature.......................113

Misc................................................................... 56

Missing and/or..........................................................127

Missing ............................................................ 127

MMU................................................234, 237, 240

MMU/Secondary Enables .................................65

MOD PHS ......................................................... 65

Mode ....56, 65, 76, 101, 113, 114, 216, 234, 237,240

Mode during .................................................... 216

Mode/Value/Exceeded....................................120

Model .5, 55, 76, 92, 99, 114, 165, 178, 207, 233,236, 238, 240

Modem Init ........................................................ 65

Modem Init String ..............................................56

Modifying Existing Device Group ..........47, 48, 50, 51, 52 Existing Group ..............................................51IQCentral .................................................... 221Layer's ........................................................ 148 Scheduled Task..........................................185

Module Managing...................................................... 15

Module Control................................................ 218

Module Navigation ............................................33

Module Windows Managing.................................................. 7, 15

Module Windows.................................................7

Module Windows...............................................15

Module Windows...............................................92

Module Windows...............................................99

MOE .......................................................... 65, 237

Monitor ...1, 29, 39, 47, 56, 65, 85, 103, 107, 120,161, 165, 168, 171, 189, 195, 200, 216, 233,234, 237, 239, 240

Monitor Polarity..................................................56

Monitor Port .......................................................65

Monitoring Alarms....189, 190, 195, 197, 200, 202

Monthly ............................................................184

Months...........................56, 65, 76, 118, 176, 184

More roadways....................................53, 88, 136

Mouse Uses..............................................................15 Using.............................................................14

Moving Text .....................................................111

Moving Text Editing .........................................111

Mr 4

MSCLR ............................................................237

MULTI Msg ......................................................111

MULTI Msg window.................................109, 112

MULTI string ....................................................110 Multifunction Management Unit ...............234, 237

Multisonics number....................................5, 178, 233, 238

Multisonics...........................................................5

Multisonics.........................................................55

Multisonics.........................................................56

Multisonics.......................................................178

Multisonics.......................................................233

Multisonics.......................................................237

Multisonics.......................................................238

Multisonics 820Asupport ............................................................5

Multisonics 820A .................................................5

Multisonics 820A Controllers .............................55

Multisonics OSAM ...........................................178

Multisonics OSAM-32 Master Controllers..55, 178

My Computer...........................................178, 186

N

Name -- Entered................................................38 Name suggests................................................161

Naming Convention .........................................178

National Electrical Manufacturers Association234,237

National Transportation ....1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40,42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158,159, 163, 169, 172, 184, 234, 236, 237, 238,239, 240



Index

277

Navigating IQCentral...................................................... 34 Message Signs................................... 118, 176

Navigation......................................................... 33

NEMA ....................................................... 65, 237

New.... 5, 7, 10, 19, 25, 34, 39, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51,55, 56, 83, 85, 88, 92, 99, 101, 104, 109, 110,111, 112, 114, 120, 122, 129, 130, 131, 133,138, 139, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 153, 157,158, 160, 163, 172, 178, 184, 186, 189, 197,202, 207, 209, 212, 213, 214, 229, 233

New Alarm Setting Up .................................................. 190

New Alarm ...................................................... 189

New Alarm ...................................................... 190

New Alarm ...................................................... 197

New Alarm Condition

Creating...................................................... 197 New Alarm Condition ...................................... 197

New BMP Map Adding ........................................................ 138

New BMP Map................................................ 138

New Connection ............................................... 45

New Device....................... 5, 34, 39, 46, 104, 131

New Device Group Creating............................................ 47, 48, 52

New Device Group............................................ 47

New Device Group............................................ 47 New Device Group............................................ 48

New Device Group............................................ 52

New Device Type.............................................. 46

New GIS Map Adding ........................................................ 144

New GIS Map ................................................. 144

New Group button press ...................................................... 48, 50

New Group button............................................. 48

New Group button............................................. 50 New Icon

Select Add.................................................. 229

New Icon................................................. 228, 229

New Icon......................................................... 229

New Layer button Press .......................................................... 149

New Layer button............................................ 149

New Line ......................................................... 110

New listing....................................................... 209

New Map......................................... 138, 139, 145

New Map button ..............................................138

New Message

Add ............................................................. 109 New Message ................................................. 109

New Message ................................................. 114

New Message button ......................................109

New Page........................................ 110, 111, 112

New Page button.............................................112

New Row......................................................... 163

New Row button.............................................. 163

New Shape File Adding ........................................................ 149

New Shape File............................................... 149 New Task button .............................................184

New User Adding ........................................................ 212

New User ................................................7, 19, 25

New User ........................................................ 212

New User ........................................................ 212

New User Account Adding ........................................................ 212

New User Account ..........................................212

New Year's Day ................................................ 56 New Year's Eve................................................. 56

Next.. 5, 10, 15, 33, 39, 48, 51, 65, 76, 81, 86, 88,116, 118, 120, 124, 136, 139, 145, 152, 153,175, 176, 184, 186, 189, 197, 205, 209, 216,223, 231

Next On Outputs ...............................................65

Next Preempt .................................................... 76

Nl 110

No selecting .....................................................148

No..... 1, 10, 26, 28, 29, 36, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 48,50, 56, 65, 76, 80, 92, 99, 105, 114, 118, 120,122, 124, 128, 144

No.................................................................... 148

No Early ............................................................ 65

No Early Coord Ped ..........................................65

No Early Release ..............................................65

No Error...........................................................122




278

No PCL Offset Adj.............................................65

No Skip........................................................ 56, 65

Node Icon........................................................ 190

Non Lock Detector Memory ..............................76

Non-Actuated .................................................... 56

Non-Actuated II Phase ......................................56

None................................................134, 172, 186

Non-Locking Memory ........................................76

Non-NEMA88, 101, 165, 172, 174, 175, 184, 236,238

Non-NTCIP........................................................ 55

Normal return ............................................................26

Normal operating....................................... 32, 114

Normal operating mode................................... 101

Normal Operation....................................101, 236 Normal/Dynamic.............................................. 163

Normally, syncing.............................................. 26

Northbound Thru ............................................... 56

NOT.....................................................48, 50, 212

Not Accessible ................................................218

NOT create........................................................48

Notes About Configuring Map Polling Alarm Monitoring.........................................165

Notes About Configuring Map Polling ............. 165

Np....................................................................110

NTCIP Camera Connecting..................................................103

NTCIP Camera..................................................10

NTCIP Camera................................................103

NTCIP Camera Browser Opens ........................................................... 10

NTCIP Camera Browser ...................................10

NTCIP communciations protocol manages using .................1, 10, 161, 175, 229

NTCIP communciations protocol......................... 1NTCIP Data

Tells ............................................................ 172

NTCIP Data ..................................................... 172

NTCIP Data ..................................................... 190

NTCIP Device .................................................122

NTCIP Device Status ............................30, 42, 43

NTCIP Device Status window

switch ............................................................33

NTCIP Device Status window............................33

NTCIP MIB ........................................................46

NTCIP Server Double-clicking..............................................28 Quick History.................................................28 Tooltip ...........................................................28

NTCIP Server ....................................................26

NTCIP Server ....................................................28

NTCIP Server ....................................................30

NTCIP Server icon.............................................28

NTCIP Server Quick History Viewing .........................................................28

NTCIP Server Quick History..............................28

NTCIP Server Status .........................................28

NTCIP Server Status Icon .........26, 29, 30, 32, 33

NTCIP Service...................................................28

NTCIP-capable ..................................................10

NTCIP-compatible .............................................24

Num Cycles ...........................................................56 Minutes .........................................................56

Num ...................................................................56

O O/L Card Enable................................................65

O/L Sig Heads ...................................................65 Object

ALL..............................................................168

Object .1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55, 81,83, 86, 88, 97, 98, 104, 107, 120, 122, 124,136, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165

Object – Shows ...............................................163

Objects list populate ......................................................169

Objects list...............................................163, 165

Objects list .......................................................169

Objects list .......................................................172 Occupancy.................................................76, 165

October 2006.......................................................5

Oeprator allows ..........................................................110

Oeprator ..........................................................110

Off Logging .................................................8, 9, 36



Index

279

Offline Count Set .............................................................. 175

Offline Count................................................... 175

Offset ............................ 56, 65, 76, 101, 114, 239

Offset Entry....................................................... 65

Offset Reference............................................... 56 Offset Seek ....................................................... 65

Offset Seeking Mode ........................................ 65

OID ................................................. 163, 169, 238

OID Length ..................................................... 169

OL A-P .............................................................. 65

OLA................................................................. 238

OLP................................................................. 238

Omit Strategy Max ............................................ 56

ON .................................... 85, 101, 202, 235, 238

On/off ............................................ 56, 76, 85, 163

On/off switch ................................................... 163

On/Off/TOD....................................................... 65

Onboard.......................................................... 114

Once source .......................................................... 99

ONE ................................................................ 175

Only marks device........................................................... 30

Only marks........................................................ 30

Only polling ..................................................... 163

Only want.......................................................... 81

Onto Logging ................................................ 8, 9, 36

Onto .................................................................... 8

Onto .................................................................... 9

Onto .................................................................. 36

Onto ................................................................ 137

Open button press .......................................................... 149

Open button .................................................... 138 Open dialog .................................................... 149

Open file dialog open ........................................................... 202

Open file dialog............................................... 202

Open IQCentral....................................... 134, 181

Open Microsoft Excel...................................... 208

Open Modules

Managing........................ 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Opening Managing...................................................... 33

Opening............................................................. 33

Opens BlockBuilder........................................... 34

Opens FormBuilder...........................................34 Operating Manual

IQCentral ........................................................ 1

Operating Manual................................................ 1

Operations....1, 10, 26, 30, 34, 37, 51, 53, 81, 85,92, 101, 107, 113, 114, 116, 122, 127, 182,207, 211, 212, 213, 218, 223, 227, 233, 234,235, 237, 239

Operations, Maintenance................ 212, 213, 218

Operations/Maintenance/Administration ......... 214

Operator, Manager............................................ 33

Operators1, 10, 29, 33, 36, 47, 53, 101, 103, 105,107, 110, 114, 118, 130, 131, 145, 148, 152,176, 182, 190, 205, 218, 221, 224, 232

Option opens window.......................................................... 40

Option opens..................................................... 40

Option opens................................................... 195

Options dialog .................................................186

Options submenu....................................104, 171

Options window open............................................................ 186

Options window............................................... 178

Options window............................................... 186

Order .... 10, 48, 92, 101, 131, 143, 152, 159, 169,178, 212, 218, 221, 239

OS............................................................. 10, 238

OSAM................................................................ 56

OSAM 32............................................................. 5

OSAM masters................................................ 178

OSAM-32 ............................................ 56, 64, 238

OSAM-32 Master Parameter Fields ..........................................64

OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 56

OSAM-32 Master .............................................. 64

Other Error Description ...................................114

Other polling.............................................. 10, 174

Other Traffic Sign Management ...................... 122

Other, Local.....................................................114




280

Other, None.....................................................114

Out ...9, 10, 29, 34, 53, 65, 92, 98, 104, 121, 122,149, 152, 153, 161, 163, 165, 178, 207, 213

Outline....................................................... 33, 143

OutlineColorBlue.............................................134

OutlineColorGreen ..........................................134 OutlineColorRed.............................................. 134

Output ....................................................... 65, 124

Output Actions row..............................................................124

Output Actions.................................................124

Over Hovering .....................................26, 28, 29, 30

Overhead Sign .................................................. 42

Overlap..................................56, 65, 76, 165, 238

Overlap Dont Walk ............................................65 Overlap Min....................................................... 65

Overlap Min Walk..............................................65

Overlap Red ................................................ 56, 65

Overlap Setup ................................................... 76

Overlaps A-P..................................................... 65

Override FDW ................................................... 56

Override Max Recall..........................................56

Override Min Greens.........................................56

Override Min Recall...........................................56

Override Pattern.............................................. 101

Overview Devices Module ............................................38 Map Management.......................................137

Overview - GIS Map Layers ............................134

P PA ...................................................................238

Page...5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 110, 111,112, 114, 153, 171, 205

Page Justification ............................................110

Page Off .................................................. 111, 112

Page On .................................................. 111, 112

Page On/Off .................................................... 110

Parameters Setting......................................................... 202

Parameters ...1, 5, 7, 8, 10, 20, 37, 39, 43, 46, 56,64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98, 99, 109,114, 118, 120, 130, 131, 133, 134, 138, 143,145, 150, 153, 159, 160, 161, 163, 171, 172,174, 175, 176, 178, 182, 184, 186

Parameters Required

Connection Type...........................................45 Parameters Required ........................................45

Parity .................................................................65

Passage Sequence/ Red Revert .......................65

Password Change .......................................................214 Changing.....................................................212 Setting.........................................212, 213, 215

Password...........................8, 10, 34, 56, 122, 211

Paths ...............................................................134

Pattern Selection .............................................101

Patterns .............................1, 47, 65, 76, 101, 165

PC's .................................................................174

PDF file..............................................................10

PE..............................................................65, 238

Ped ................................................56, 65, 76, 165

Ped Assignments...............................................65

Ped Clearance...................................................56

Ped Detector Diag .............................................65

Ped Detectors..............................................65, 76

Ped Don't Walks ................................................56 Ped O/L Sig Heads............................................65

Ped Omit............................................................65

Ped Perm...........................................................65

Ped Recall ...................................................56, 65

Ped Recycle ................................................56, 65

Ped Signal Heads..............................................65

Pedestrian either ...............................................................4

Pedestrian ...........................................................4

Pedestrian Call ..................................................83 Pedestrian Clearance ........................................83

Pedestrian Detectors 1-8...................................76

Pedestrian Permissive End..............................................................235

Pedestrian Permissive.....................................235

Pedestrian Recall ..............................................76

Peek 3000



Index

281

support ........................................................... 5

Peek 3000........................................................... 5

Peek 3000E Controllers...................... 55, 65, 178

Peek Hardware ................................................. 65

Peek M3000 Master Controllers ....................... 55

Peek M3000E ................................................. 178

Peek M3000E Master Controller..................... 178

Peek Traffic.... 1, 4, 55, 64, 76, 80, 233, 236, 238,240

Peek Traffic Corporation......... 233, 236, 238, 240

Performing Batch Update ..................... 163, 165, 168, 169 Central Override........................................... 53

Period ............................................................... 65

Period/State ...................................................... 76

Perm Strategy................................................... 56 Permissive

End............................................................. 235

Permissive .................................................. 65, 92

Permissive ...................................................... 235

Phase... 56, 65, 76, 83, 85, 86, 92, 165, 172, 202,212, 233, 234, 235, 236, 238, 239

Phase Allocation............................................... 65

Phase Association ............................................ 56

Phase Input....................................................... 92

Phase NEXT..................................................... 83

Phase ON ................................................... 65, 83

Phase Signal Heads ......................................... 65

PHases ............................................................. 76

PhaseStatusGroup ................................... 86, 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens.............................. 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens object ................... 172

PhaseStatusGroupGreens.1............................. 86

Phone ............................................................... 65

Physical Address .............................................. 65

Pick ......................... 50, 81, 97, 98, 160, 165, 178 Piece

hardware .......................... 1, 10, 161, 175, 229

Piezo......................................... 83, 172, 233, 234

Pixel Fail Type ................................................ 114

Pixels Tab ....................................................... 114

Place............................................................... 153

Place Icon

Opens ..................................................... 10, 34

Place Icon ......................................................... 10

Place Icon ......................................................... 34

Place Icon ......................................................... 95

Place Icon ....................................................... 152

Place Icon on Map ........................ 10, 20, 34, 152

Place On ...................................83, 107, 153, 231

PlaceAbove..................................................... 134

PlaceBelow .....................................................134

PlaceOn .......................................................... 134

Plan................................................... 65, 118, 176

Plan Phase........................................................ 65

Plans 1-3 Inhibits Det 1-12........................................................ 65

Plans 1-3 Inhibits...............................................65

Play Wave File ................................................202

Point Alarm .......................................................... 165 CMU ................................................... 234, 240

Point1, 5, 10, 20, 28, 34, 81, 92, 97, 98, 131, 133,134, 137, 139, 143, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149,150, 152, 153, 158, 159, 160, 163

Point ................................................................ 165

POL A-H............................................................ 65

Poll Data Configuration Message Signs ................................... 118, 176

Poll Data Configuration ..................................... 20

Poll Data Configuration ................................... 118

Poll Data Configuration ................................... 176

Poll Frequency ..........................................10, 163

Poll Persistence Set .............................................................. 175

Poll Persistence ..............................................175

Poll When........................................................ 165

Poll When Map Closed.................................... 165

Polling Assistant .....................................................163 choosing ..................................................... 163 Configuration ................................................ 19 Devices....................................................... 123 Intro ............................................................ 171IQCentral Alarms ........................................165 open............................................................ 169 Opens ..................................................... 10, 34 Options ......................................................... 10 Rate ............................................................ 159




282

row..............................................................163

Polling Assistant Caution - Using...........................................165 Using........................................................... 195

Polling Assistant..........................................5, 163

Polling Assistant tool .......................................165

Polling Assistant window corner..........................................................165

Polling Assistant window.................................165

Polling Configuration .........................10, 163, 168

Polling Objects list populates .................................................... 165

Polling Objects list...........................................163

Polling Objects list...........................................165

Polling Options choosing ..................................................... 163

Polling Options ..................................................34 Polling Options ................................................163

Polling Options ................................................168

Polling Options submenu ................................169

Populate Objects list ..................................................169 Polling Objects list ......................................165

Populate ................................81, 88, 99, 104, 143

Populate Polling ..........................................81, 88

Populate Polling Tool ........................................88

Populate Pooling tool ........................................88 Popup

show ........................................................... 202

Popup..............................................................200

Popup..............................................................202

Popup menu In.................................................................200

Popup menu.................................................... 200

Port.................................................................... 76

Portable, Overhead .........................................159

Portion Configure Intersection window .....................85 Error Logs ................................................... 120 Map Viewer window............................ 157, 158

Position ..109, 129, 131, 144, 152, 153, 157, 158,195

Post-Flash ......................................................... 56

Post-Flash Phases ............................................56

Post-Flash Red Time ........................................56

Power Supplies................................................116

Pre-Configured ................................................211

Pre-configured User Accounts.........................211

Preempt Output .................................................56

Preemption ..........................65, 76, 101, 235, 238

Preemption Override .........................................65

Preemption Override Stop Time........................65

Pre-Flash Phases ..............................................56

Preload need ............................................................137

Preload ............................................................137

Prepare stop .............................................................233

Prepare............................................................129

Prepare............................................................233

Preprogrammed...............................................109 Pre-programmed .............................................109

Present tooltip ............................................................30

Preset ..............................105, 111, 123, 124, 211

Preset Configuration Loading .......................................................105 Saving .........................................................105

Preset Configuration........................................105

Preset Times ...................................................111

Press Alt-F.........................................................36

Press Alt-F4...................................................9, 36

Press Alt-m......................................137, 148, 153

Press Remove .................................................214

Preview..........................81, 83, 85, 109, 118, 176

Preview button.................................................109

Preview window.................................................85

Previous...............39, 50, 118, 129, 176, 178, 195

Print Coord Plans ..............................................56

Print Det Plans...................................................56

Print Form Controls ...........................................56 Print TIC Day Plans ...........................................56

Print TIC Events ................................................56

Printer Setup......................................................56

Priority ...........................29, 56, 65, 109, 124, 129

Priority Preempt.................................................56

Procedures ..............124, 128, 129, 130, 150, 200



Index

283

Profiles Opens..................................................... 10, 34

Profiles Module ..................................... 10, 34, 36

Protocol 1, 5, 9, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55,56, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101,104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118, 120, 122,

124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157, 158, 159,161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 184,205, 229, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238,239, 240

Provides1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 26, 32,37, 38, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 83, 85, 90, 92,99, 105, 107, 113, 114, 120, 122, 123, 130,131, 134, 143, 146, 157, 158, 163, 169, 178,195, 197, 200, 202, 208, 218, 234

Ptxoy............................................................... 110

Public .............................................................. 122

Purple ............................................................... 95

Pushing Color........................................................... 149

Pushing........................................................... 149

Q Queue Detector Presence ................................ 56

Queue Limit ...................................................... 76

Quick History Data Manager .............................................. 26 NTCIP Server............................................... 28

Quick History .................................................... 26

Quick History .................................................... 28

Quick History display .................................. 26, 28

R Radio button ................................................... 109

RAM................................................................ 114

Range ............... 92, 109, 124, 149, 186, 195, 224

Rate Polling ........................................................ 159

RCU ................................................................ 238

Read..........................................34, 104, 218, 238

Read Only ...............................................218, 238

Read Only Memory .........................................238

Read-Only allows............................................218

Read-Write..............................................211, 218 Realtime Map Polling

open.............................................................. 88

Realtime Map Polling .................................. 86, 88

Realtime Map Polling ........................................ 88

Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 136

Realtime Map Polling ...................................... 163

Realtime Map Polling window ......................... 163

Realtime Polling Opens ........................................................... 34

Realtime Polling ................................................34 Receive ... 4, 90, 92, 107, 123, 169, 172, 175, 195

Record This Event...........................................120

Red.................................................................... 65

Red Overlap...................................................... 83

Red Revert ........................................................ 76

Red Revert Override .........................................65

Red Revert Time......................................... 56, 65

Red Time...........................................................56

Red/green ....................................................... 109

Reduce.................................................. 56, 65, 76 Reduce By.........................................................76

Reduced Green Band .....................................238

Ref end................................................................ 65

Ref..................................................................... 65

Reference Lost............................................ 26, 28

Referencing Data Manager............................................... 26

Referencing.......................................................26

Refresh button clicking........................................................ 113

Refresh button........................................... 98, 113

Refresh button.................................................113

Refresh button.................................................114

Refresh From Controller....................................97

Refresh Server Polling button ......................... 172




284

Refresh View button........................................195

Release IQCentral ................................................ 5, 101

Release notes all ....................................................................5 update.........................................................225

Release notes ..................................................... 5

Release notes ................................................. 225

Remaining Administration............................................. 212

Remaining ....................................................... 212

Remember Save............................................................ 148

Remop............................................................... 56

Remop Options ................................................. 56

Remop Protocol ................................................ 56

Remop Tel.........................................................56 Remote Communications Unit ........................238

Remove Row...................................................163

Remove View button .......................................144

Repeat 86, 88, 118, 129, 134, 136, 138, 152, 153,172, 175, 176, 178, 184, 186, 202

Repeat Interval................................................ 202

Report Data Exporting.....................................................208

Report Data ..................................................... 208

Report Filters Applying...................................................... 205

Report Filters...................................................205

Report Selection........................10, 205, 208, 209

Report Selection Module.................................205

Reports Generating Data .........................................207

Reports............................................................ 205

Reports............................................................ 207

Reports Interface.............................................205

Reports takes .................................................. 209 Reports. Opens

IQCentral Reports.........................................10

Reports. Opens ................................................. 10

Representations ........................99, 131, 163, 202

Request login ................................................................ 4

Require consulting ..........................................114

Reset ...........................................65, 76, 114, 128

Responding .................................................26, 30

Responding Devices..................26, 28, 29, 32, 33

Response Time Default .....................................45

Rest

IQCentral.....................................................178 Rest ...............................56, 65, 76, 148, 169, 172

Rest .................................................................178

Rest .................................................................178

Rest .................................................................221

Rest .................................................................227

Rest-in-Walk......................................................56

Restore Module ...............................5, 10, 34, 225

Restore’ ...........................................................225

Restoring .......................................10, 21, 34, 221

Result detector ...........................................................4

Result ..................................................................4

Retrieve Selected Msg button .........................109

Retrieved during ........................................10, 195

Retry Count Default...........................................45

Return Veh Calls ...............................................56

Returned advising............................................122

Revert-if-Green Phases.....................................56

Revert-in-Queue Phases ...................................56

RGB...........................................................65, 238

RGB Percentage ...............................................65

Right-click.....10, 14, 90, 129, 178, 186, 190, 195,197, 202, 209

Rings 1-4 ...........................................................76

ROM ................................................................238

Routing SNMP..........................................................104

Routing ............................................................104

Row Output Action ..............................................124 Polling .........................................................163

Row ...................................42, 45, 88, 97, 98, 104

Rows Allocated................................................120

Rows Used ......................................................120

RS-232 ............................................................236

RTF..................................................................208

RTS ...................................................................65






286

Secondary 1-16................................................. 65

Second-by-Second.......................................... 165

Second-by-Second Status ..............................165

Section1, 5, 10, 32, 43, 53, 85, 86, 161, 163, 171,178, 189, 209, 221

Security Managing....................................122, 211, 216

Security ...1, 8, 9, 10, 33, 34, 36, 56, 65, 101, 107

Security Code....................................................65

Security issues ................................................202

Security Level Changing ............................212, 213, 214, 215 Select..........................................................214 Setting......................................................... 213

Security Level.............................................. 10, 33

Security Management .....................................101

Security Module ..............................................122 See Adding

Icon............................................................. 231

See Adding......................................................231

See 'Force Off ................................................. 235

See 'Split ......................................................... 239

Select Add New Icon.....................................................229

Select Add....................................................... 229

Select All .......................................48, 97, 98, 165

Select Create New Map View .........................144 Select Day Plan....................................... 118, 176

Select Form.....................................................218

Select New........................46, 104, 129, 130, 146

Select None.......................................................48

Select Objects .........................................124, 172

Select OK ................................................ 178, 186

Select Open .................................................... 186

Selected Cell ..................................................... 97

Selected Device ...43, 81, 92, 104, 120, 163, 195,205

Selected Device Type ...............................81, 163

Selected Event Group Only.............................120

Selected Group ................................................. 48

Selected Msg button .......................................109

Selecting Copy Devices ....................................99

Self-explanatory ..............................................182

Semi-Actuated.........................................233, 239

Send And Display button .................................109

Send button Press...........................................................101

Send button .......................................................98

Send button .....................................................101Send Only........................................................109

Sending Data ..............................................................98

Sending .............................................................98

Separate states ..9, 109, 113, 117, 118, 122, 128,131, 163, 176, 234

September 15 ......................................................1

September 2007 ..................................................5

September 2008 ..................................................5

Seq ....................................................................56 Sequence

device which manages.1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,237, 238, 240 manages .....................................152, 165, 178

Sequence/Startup..............................................65

Serial Interface ................................................239

Serv ...................................................................65

Set 1-4...............................................................65

Set Up Basic Steps ...................................................81New Alarm ..................................................190

Set Up................................................1, 10, 54, 81

Set Up..............................................................227

Setting Map .............................................................134

Setting .............................................................134

Setting Device Addresses ...............................104

Setting Device Zoom Levels............................153

Setting Up Map Polling Intersection Icons..................................88, 136

Setting Up Map Polling ......................................88

Setting Up Map Polling ....................................136

Setting up polling.....................................165, 195

Settings Between Controllers Copying.........................................................99

Settings Between Controllers ............................99



Index

287

Settings button................................................ 202

Settings window...................................... 197, 202

Setup ................................................................ 65

Several... 15, 26, 47, 90, 113, 114, 120, 159, 161,171, 172, 174, 209, 216, 227

Severity Choose....................................................... 197

Severity............................................. 29, 190, 195

SF1-6 Feedback Detected................................ 56

Shape ............... 56, 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150

Shape file................ 134, 143, 146, 148, 149, 150

ShapeDot.......................................................... 85

Short ............................................................... 165

Short Alarms ................................................... 165

Short Error Status - This................................. 114

Show Popup ................................................... 202 Shows

About window......................................... 10, 34 COM............................................................. 38 IP .................................................................. 38 popup ......................................................... 202 Standard View.............................................. 33

Shows ............................................................. 159

Showthe.................................................. 236, 240

Shp ................................................................. 134

Sign

current displaying ....................................... 109 detail display .............................................. 153 Icon .................................................... 157, 158 Send........................................................... 117

Sign.. 1, 5, 8, 9, 10, 23, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101,104, 105, 107

Sign Access .................................................... 113

Sign Brightness Control Opens........................................................... 10

Sign Brightness Control .................................... 10

Sign Configuration .......................................... 113

Sign Control Form........................................... 109

Sign Control Module open ........................................................... 110

Sign Control Module ................................. 10, 109

Sign Control Module ....................................... 110

Sign Group.............................................. 129, 130

Sign Housing Maximum Temperature ............ 113

Sign Housing Minimum Temperature ............. 113

Sign Information...................................... 113, 114

Sign Message Edit .................................. 110, 129

Sign Message Edit Screen.............................. 110

Sign Message Edit window

open............................................................ 109 Sign Message Edit window............................. 109

Sign Message Edit window............................. 110

Sign Message Editor............................... 110, 111

Sign Scheduler................................................ 107

Sign Status......................................113, 157, 158

Sign Status window move................................................... 157, 158

Sign Status window......................................... 157

Sign Status window......................................... 158

Sign Summary/Diagnostics............................. 116 Sign Summary/Sign Status ............................. 116

Sign Type................................................110, 113

Sign View ........................................................ 159

Sign Volts ........................................................ 113

Sign Zoom....................................................... 159

Signal activation..................................................4

Signal Group Corporation ............................... 238

Signshave ............................................... 236, 240

Simple .... 10, 34, 43, 48, 50, 83, 85, 92, 103, 104,120, 122, 137, 153, 157, 158, 169, 172, 184,190, 202, 209, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239

Simple binary ON/OFF......................................85

Simple binary ON/OFF operation described..... 85

Simple listing only ............................................................... 48

Simple listing..................................................... 48

Simple Numeric Data ........................................92

Simple ON/OFF................................................. 85

Simulation ....................................................... 114

Simult ................................................................ 65 Simultaneous Gap Disable ............................... 76

Simultaneous Gap Out...................................... 65

Simultaneous Gap Phases ............................... 56

Simultaneous Max Phases ............................... 56




288

SINCE MODIFICATION TO ANY OTHER TABLE IN THE DATABASE WHILE YOU ARE WORKING IN THE FILE COULD RENDER YOUR ......................................................... 221

Single Device ..............................42, 43, 163, 165

Single Device Status...................................42, 43

Size Changing ............................................157, 158

Size .....................................34, 99, 134, 149, 153

Size Event Log ....................................10, 21, 223

Size Event Log Module ...................................223

SME-Advanced ...............................................110

SME-Displaying Message ..................................................... 111

SME-Displaying............................................... 111

SME-Displaying............................................... 112

SME-Moving Text............................................111SNMP Device Security

editing ......................................................... 122 Use .............................................................122

SNMP Device Security.10, 21, 23, 107, 109, 113,117, 118, 120, 121

SNMP Device Security....................................122



SNMP Device Security Module launch ......................................................... 122

SNMP Device Security Module .......................122

SNMP Device Security Module .......................122

Soft Recall ...................................................56, 65

Soft Return ........................................................ 65

Soft Vehicle Recall ............................................76

Software company owned.................55, 233, 238

Software Versions Device.........................................................114

Software Versions ...........................................114

Solid ................................................................233

Some IQCentral ................................................ 15

SOP define.......................................................... 130

SOP.................................................................124

SOP.................................................................130

Sound..............................................................202

Source Once ............................................................. 99

Source .............................................10, 65, 76, 95

Source Data Generating ..................................................207

Source Data.....................................................207

Source Data.....................................................209

Southbound Thru...............................................56 SP....................................................................239

Special Function 1-4 Polarity.............................56

Speed ....................5, 14, 53, 56, 65, 99, 234, 235

Speed Trap........................................................65

Speed Trap Type...............................................56

SPL..................................................................239

Split..........56, 65, 76, 92, 101, 172, 212, 233, 239

Split Coord Phase..............................................76

Split Inhibits .......................................................65

Split Matrix.........................................................65

Splits/Cycle........................................................65

Spreadsheet ............................................123, 124

Spreadsheet Column Selection.......................124

Spreadsheet Column Selection window Devices .......................................................124

Spreadsheet Column Selection window..........124

Spring Weed.............................................................56

Spring ................................................................56

Standard ...1, 5, 10, 19, 25, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42,43, 46, 55, 56, 81, 104, 120, 122, 123, 124,130, 145, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169, 172, 184,186, 202, 205, 211, 223, 228, 233, 234, 236,237, 238, 239, 240

Standard Operating .................................124, 130

Standard Operating Procedure Creating ......................................................129

Standard Operating Procedure........................124



Standard Preempt .............................................56

Standard toolbar Buttons..........................................................19

Standard toolbar ................................................19




Standard View



Index

289

showing ........................................................ 33

Standard View .................................................. 33

Standard, Hide................................................ 159

Start Absence Mon Hour .................................. 65

Start building

report .......................................................... 209 Start building................................................... 209

Start Date........................................................ 205

Start Perm......................................................... 56

Start Permissive.............................................. 239

Start Veh Calls.................................................. 56

Started Green ......................................................... 239

Started ... 1, 7, 26, 28, 32, 56, 65, 76, 81, 92, 118,133, 134, 149, 153, 163, 175, 176, 178, 181,189, 205, 207, 209, 213, 237, 239

Started ............................................................ 239

Started With Maps Getting........................................................ 133

Started With Maps .......................................... 133

Startup Red Time.............................................. 65

Startup, Card .................................................... 65

State Traffic .................................................... 233

Status All Devices ................................................... 42 Central judges ............................................ 171

Devices Responding .................................... 30 expect......................................................... 161select.......................................................... 195 Viewing............................................... 157, 158

Status...................... 1, 5, 7, 10, 14, 15, 26, 28, 29

Status Bar ................................................... 26, 33

Status Bar Overview........... 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33

Status Module. 30, 34, 42, 43, 189, 195, 200, 202

Status window open ................................................... 157, 158

Status window............................................. 29, 33

Status window................................................. 157 Status window................................................. 158

Status window................................................. 195

Status window................................................. 200

Stay Logged On’ button .................................... 36

STMP Polling Opens..................................................... 10, 34

STMP Polling .................................................... 10

STMP Polling .................................................... 20

STMP Polling .................................................... 34

STMP Polling ..................................................169

Stop................................................................. 233

Stop Bits............................................................ 56

Stop Test......................................................... 202

Storing bitmap......................................................... 137 Map Data .................................................... 137

Storing............................................................. 137

Storing............................................................. 163

Str/Stp ............................................................... 65

Straight-forward............................................... 185

Structure... 1, 5, 10, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 55,81, 104, 120, 122, 157, 158, 159, 163, 169,172, 184, 208, 232, 234, 236, 237, 238, 239,240

Structured Export ............................................208

Style ............................................10, 85, 134, 148

Submenu.........................................................169

Subsystem ................................................26, 116

Subsystem Status Bar.......................................26

Such location ...........................................53, 88, 136

Such.................. 1, 7, 8, 10, 20, 22, 34, 37, 39, 46

Such.................................................................. 53

Summary............................. 10, 34, 113, 114, 200

Super Password.............................................. 122

Super Password.............................................. 122

Support Multisonics 820A ............................................ 5 Peek 3000 ...................................................... 5 Traconex 390CJ .............................................5 Transyt 1880EL ..............................................5

Supported Traffic Controllers ............................ 55

SW Reset........................................................ 114

Switching Between Open Modules ............................... 15 comms........................................................ 175 IQCentral ...................................................... 34 NTCIP Device Status window....................... 33 Thumbnail..................................................... 85

Switching...........................................................15

Symbol Characteristics set............................................................... 149

Symbol Characteristics ................................... 149




290

Symbols ............................................95, 148, 149

SymbolSize ..................................................... 134

SymbolType .................................................... 134

Sync Pulses ......................................................65

Sync Reference.................................................65

Synced ........................26, 37, 47, 56, 65, 76, 171

Synchronization.......................................174, 236

Synchronous Data Link Control ......................239

Syntax Error .................................................... 114

System choose ........................................................ 197 event log records ........................................223

System .1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 21, 30, 32, 33, 34,36, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 48, 53, 55, 56,64, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83, 85, 88, 90, 92, 95, 98,99, 101, 103, 104, 105, 107, 109, 110, 113,

114, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 127, 129,131, 133, 134, 136, 137, 138, 139, 143, 144,145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 152, 153, 157, 158,159, 160, 161, 163, 165, 169, 171, 172, 174,175, 176, 178, 181, 182, 184, 186, 189, 190,195

System Date......................................................32

System Maintenance toolbar..................... 21, 223

System Scheduler ...........................................178

System Sensor Assignments ............................65

System Sound................................................. 202

T T/F...................................................................239

Tab select .......................................................... 113

Tab ..........................1, 48, 90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 112

Tab Icons .......................................................... 95

Table Cells Color Coding.................................................95

Table Cells ........................................................ 95

Table menu ..................................................... 208

Task ........................178, 181, 182, 184, 185, 186 Task Database ................................................ 186

Task list ................................................... 182, 184

Task’s.............................................................. 182

TBC ................................................................. 239

TblLayers Open ...........................................................134

TblLayers ........................................................ 134

TblMapLayerDetail Open ...........................................................134

TblMapLayerDetail ..........................................134

TCP/IP .............................................................239

Tech.support@ peektraffic .com .........................4

Tenth .........................................................65, 111Test..........................................................138, 228

Pixel ............................................................114

Test........................................................10, 53, 65

Test – This button............................................202

Test Condition .................................................197

Test Icon button clicking ........................................................229

Test Icon button...............................................228

Test Icon button...............................................229

Test Icon button...............................................229 Test Map Button ..............................................138

Text Table ...........................................................208

Text.....83, 85, 109, 111, 112, 114, 143, 146, 149,157, 158, 163, 172, 182, 184, 189, 195, 197,202

Text..................................................................208

Text..................................................................209

Text Editing Screen Moving ........................................................111

Text Editing Screen .........................................111Thanksgiving .....................................................56

The ..................................................................182

The Administration...................................211, 232

The Alarm Status.............................................200

The Chapters.......................................................1

The communications .........................................38

The Delete Group button...................................52

The Device Add/Edit window.............................38

The Device Connection/Responding.................30

The Device Groups window...............................48

The Device List right .........................................................50, 51

The Device List..................................................50

The Device List..................................................51

The Device List window.....................................48

The Device Specific...........................................81



Index

291

The Device's 9, 10, 26, 30, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40,42, 43, 46, 47, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, 81, 83, 86,90, 92, 95, 97, 98, 99, 103, 104, 109, 113,117, 118, 120, 122, 124, 128, 129, 131, 152,153, 157, 158, 159, 161, 163, 165, 168, 171,172, 174, 175, 176, 184, 190, 197, 200, 205,207, 231, 234, 236, 238

The Error Logs................................................ 120

The left .............................................................. 99

The MDI .......................................................... 218

The Message Sign10, 23, 34, 113, 114, 118, 120,122, 161, 176

The message sign Bulk Operations.................. 34

The NTCIP. 1, 5, 9, 10, 28, 30, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40,42, 43, 46, 55, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95,99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113, 114, 118,120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152, 153, 157,158, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175,176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237,238, 239, 240

The NTCIP communciations protocol .. 1, 5, 9, 10,34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88,90, 92, 95, 99, 101, 104, 105, 109, 110, 113,114, 118, 120, 122, 124, 129, 131, 136, 152,153, 159, 161, 163, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175,176, 184, 205, 229, 231, 234, 235, 236, 237,238, 239, 240

The NTCIP Server ...................................... 28, 30

The NTCIP Server functions............................. 28

The NTCIP Server up ....................................... 28

The only ............................................................ 48

The other ........................................................ 189

The parameters .............................................. 175

The Polling Assistant ...................................... 165

The second ..................................................... 161

The Test Map button....................................... 138

The Upload/Download1, 5, 56, 65, 76, 90, 92, 95,97, 98

The Upload/Download Interface ....................... 92

The Upload/Download module ......................... 90

Theicons ................................................. 236, 240

These represent.............................................. 131

This button ........................................ 48, 139, 172

This button serves .......................................... 172

This checkbox................................................. 202

This Connections list....................................... 104

This control ............................................. 114, 163

This defines..................................................... 163

This error......................................................... 114

This field.......................................................... 114

This icon.................................................... 85, 190

This list38, 48, 149, 157, 158, 159, 160, 163, 195,

197, 212 This shows ...................................................... 163

Thismanual structure.......................................................... 1

Thismanual.......................................................... 1

Thresholds ...................................................... 153

Thumbnail switching....................................................... 85

Thumbnail ......................................................... 85

TIC .................................................................... 56

Tile Horizontal .............................................10, 34 Tile Vertical ................................................. 10, 34

Tiled Windows................................................... 15

Tiling Horizontally................................................... 15 Vertically .......................................................15

Tiling.................................................................. 15

Tim42 Maintenance...............................................213

Tim42 .............................................................. 212

Tim42 .............................................................. 213

Time .................................................................. 32

Time Base Schedules 1-32............................... 76

Time Before Red ...............................................76

Time Before Reduction ............................... 56, 65

Time Clock ........................................................ 65

Time Dep Ref HH.............................................. 65

Time Dep Ref MM............................................. 65

Time Per Actuation............................................56

Time Plans CS................................................................. 65

Time Plans ........................................................ 65

Time Reference Point .....................................239

Time Reference Signal....................................239

Time Synchronization............................ 1, 10, 174

Timebase .......................................................... 76

Timebase Action ...............................................76

Timebase Setup................................................76




292

Time-of-Day operations.....................................37

Timeout ...........................................10, 34, 36, 56

Timer intersection ...................................................85

Timer .................................................................85

Timer button .................................................... 111Title .............................................15, 39, 131, 153

Title Bar.............................................15, 131, 153

TMM500 .............................................................. 5

TMM-500...........................................................80

TMM-500...........................................................80

TMM-500.........................................................240

TMM-500 Master Parameter Fields ..........................................80

TMM-500 Master............................................... 80

TMM-500 Master............................................... 80 TO Location.......................................................56

TO Reference....................................................56

To/From........................................................... 149

TOD COS/F...........................................................65

TOD................................................................... 65

TOD.................................................................239

TOD Circuits Cycle/Offset/Split/Free..................................65

TOD Circuits......................................................65 TOD Revert ....................................................... 65

Toggle Size .............................................157, 158

Tool sets number........................................................223

Tool sets..........................................................223

Toolbar Save button.................................................153

Toolbar ...5, 10, 19, 22, 23, 25, 26, 107, 122, 139,145

Toolbar button ................................................. 214

Tooltip generates....................................................197 Icon................................................... 26, 28, 30 NTCIP Server ...............................................28 present..........................................................30 remove........................................................200

Tooltip popup display.........................................................200

Tooltip popup .................................................. 200

Tooltip window.................................................202

Tooltips ........................................................14, 28

Top .....10, 45, 46, 48, 50, 81, 92, 95, 97, 98, 104,114, 120, 134, 145, 146, 148, 153, 160, 163,169, 175, 178, 182, 184, 197, 209, 212, 213,214

Traconex..........................................................240

Traconex 390CJ support ............................................................5

Traconex 390CJ ..................................................5

Traconex 390CJ Controllers..............................55

Traconex Corporation days .............................233

Traconex Hardware ...........................................80

Traconex TMM-500 Master Controllers.............55

Traffic Control .......1, 5, 53, 54, 55, 161, 233, 234,235, 236, 237

Traffic Control Management ................................1Traffic Controller Log Retrieval

Scheduling ..................................................178

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................161

Traffic Controller Log Retrieval........................178

Traffic Controller Management ..................53, 101

Traffic Controller Scheduler.....................118, 176

Traffic Controllers/Masters ..............................152

Traffic equipment...............................55, 233, 238

Traffic equipment brand owned...............233, 240

Traffic log.........................................................161

Traffic Network ......................................1, 54, 101

Traffic Scheduler .....................................118, 176

Traffic Sign Management ............................1, 107

Traffic signals duration .......................................152, 165, 178

Traffic signals ..................................90, 97, 98, 99

Trail Red ............................................................76

Trailing Detector ........................................................65

Trailing...............................................................65

Translator Firmware ........................................178

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol ....................................104, 122, 236, 237, 239

Transmitting Block 98 ........................................................92

Transmitting.......................................................92

Transport Type ..................................................45



Index

293

Transyt number ................................................... 5, 233

Transyt................................................................ 5

Transyt.............................................................. 55

Transyt.............................................................. 80

Transyt............................................................ 233 Transyt............................................................ 233

Transyt............................................................ 240

Transyt 1880ELsupport ........................................................... 5

Transyt 1880EL .................................................. 5

Transyt EL Controllers ...................................... 55

Transyt EL Master Controllers .......................... 55

Tree ................................................................ 128

Trigger

Scenario ..................................................... 124 Trigger .......................................... 1, 10, 101, 123

Trigger Camera Preset ................................... 124

Trigger Scenario ............................................. 124

Trigger Scenario SOP..................................... 124

TS ..................................................................... 76

TS2 working....................................................... 165

TS2 ................................................................. 165

TS-2 ................................................................ 234

TS-2 ................................................................ 240 Turns................... 56, 92, 159, 163, 195, 202, 223

TXT file ........................................................... 208

Type Connection ................................................. 103 couple........................................................... 85 Device ........................................................ 159 Display ....................................................... 159 Grid Display................................................ 159 Message..................................................... 197 Scenario ..................................................... 127 Traffic Controller......................................... 178

use files ........................................................ 85 Type1, 5, 9, 10, 29, 34, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46,

48, 50, 51, 56, 65, 76, 80, 81, 83

Type ALLviewing files.................................................. 85

Type ALL .......................................................... 85

Type Polling ............................................ 172, 174

Type polling interval ........................................175

Type Polling window ....................................... 171

Types Module....................................................46

Typical Settings Critical Alarm ..............................................202 Informational Alarm .................................... 202 Warning Alarm............................................ 202

Typical Settings............................................... 202

U U.S. ..................................................................... 4

UCF................................................................... 65

UCF Exit............................................................ 65

UCF Last ........................................................... 65

UCF Override Hold............................................65

UCF Soft Flash..................................................65

UCF/Soft Flash.................................................. 65

Uncheck ...................................................... 51, 92

Undelete............................................................48

Under Device Action .......................................120

Unit - Also........................................................ 234

Unit Config ........................................................ 65

Universal Serial Bus........................................240

Unsupported.................................................... 114

Up Setting ................................................103, 197

Up... 1, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 26, 28, 33, 34, 38, 39, 42,43, 45, 46, 50, 53, 56, 65, 76, 81, 83, 85, 86,88, 90, 92, 95, 99, 101

Up Map Polling Setting .................................................. 88, 136

Up Map Polling.................................................. 88

Up Map Polling................................................ 136

Update Controller ...................................................... 98 release notes ..............................................225

Update................. 5, 10, 26, 51, 64, 76, 80, 81, 86

Update button..................................................139

Update Database Table .................................. 172

Update Device................................................... 26

Update Excel Spreadsheet button .................. 124

Update History IQCentral ........................................................ 5

Update History .................................................... 5




294

Update Sign and/or Save choose ........................................................ 120

Update Sign and/or Save ................................120

Updated polling .................................................10

Upload Download Module .................................95

Upload/download window .................................10 Uploading/Downloading ....................................53

USB................................................................. 240

Use files type............................................................... 85

Use files ............................................................ 85

Use Fixed .......................................................... 65

UseDefault ...................................................... 134

User Managing.................................................... 212

User................................................................. 212 User................................................................. 213

User................................................................. 224

User Access Levels...............................10, 34, 36

User Accounts Adding.................................212, 213, 214, 215 Deleting...............................212, 213, 214, 215 Managing......................8, 9, 36, 122, 211, 212 remove........................................................212 Select..........................................................214

User Administration choosing ..................................................... 212 open....................................................212, 214 Opens ........................................................... 10 selecting......................................................212

User Administration menu displays................. 216

User Administration Module .....10, 212, 213, 214,215

User Administration submenu .........................212

User Comments open............................................................224 Opens ..................................................... 10, 34 selecting......................................................224

User Comments ................................................ 10 User Comments ................................................ 34

User Comments .............................................. 221

User Comments .............................................. 224

User Comments Module .................................224

User Icon........................................................... 33

User losing ...................................................... 216

User Maintenance

open ............................................................213

User Maintenance ...........................................213

User Management choosing......................................................213

User Management...............................8, 211, 212

User Name ..........................................10, 33, 211User Password

Setting.........................................................214

User Password ................................................214

User-customizable...........................................227

User-customizable application.........................227

Users list..........................................................205

Users watch.....................................................165

Using Alarm Configuration Window ......................190 Alarm Status Window..................................195 BlockBuilder Module ...................................232 Device Groups window .................................48 Font Editor Interface ...................................117 Interface ..........................................................7 IQCentral.......................................................53 Layers .........................................................148 Mouse ...........................................................14 Polling Assistant..........................................195 Scheduler Interface.....................................182

Using Groups.............................47, 48, 50, 51, 52

Using IQCentral ...............................................109

Using Maps..................................................1, 131

Using Multisonics Hardware ..............................56

Using Peek Hardware........................................65

Using Traconex Hardware.................................80

Using Transyt Hardware....................................80

USTraffic..........................................................240

Utilizing Log Polling ..................................................161Map Polling .................................................161Message Sign Scheduling ..........................161

Utilizing ............................................................161

V V1.4 .................................................................216

V2.22 ...............................................................178

V2.8.2 ..............................................................178

V3.6.2 ..............................................................178

Value Cycle Timer...................................................85 Editing ...........................................................92



Index

295

WidthFrom.................................................. 134

Value................................... 10, 32, 34, 45, 51, 83

Values set ....................................................... 134

Variable Message Sign.... 1, 5, 10, 39, 53, 54, 55,81, 86, 90, 92, 97, 98, 99, 101, 109, 114, 116,118, 129, 152, 157, 158, 161, 165, 176, 178,182, 184, 207, 227, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,237, 238, 240

Veh Assignments.............................................. 65

Vehicle ................................................................ 4

Vehicle Detectors.............................................. 76

Vehicle Omit ..................................................... 65

Verification.......... 10, 34, 118, 129, 139, 150, 176

Verify Amber Alert ................................................ 128

Verify... 36, 39, 40, 45, 48, 52, 101, 104, 118, 120

Verify button.................................................... 129 Verify OID

Device Type ............................................... 169

Verify OID ....................................................... 169

Version 1.5............................................ 5, 47, 189

Vertical.............................................................. 38

Vertical Border ................................................ 113

Vertical Pitch................................................... 113

Vertically Tiling............................................................. 15

Vertically ........................................................... 10 Vertically ........................................................... 15

Video Configuration .......................................... 34

Video Connections.................................... 24, 103

View Alarm Details ................................................ 29 Data Manager Quick History ........................ 26 Device Connection Details ........................... 30 Device's NTCIP Status................................. 37 List.............................................................. 122 Map View ................................................... 133 NTCIP Server Quick History ........................ 28 Status ................................................. 157, 158 View Recorded Events............................... 120

View ........................................................ 5, 10, 19

View By Type Display ..................................... 190

View Maps Opens........................................................... 10

View Maps ........................................................ 10

View Maps ...................................................... 159

View menu ..............................157, 158, 159, 224

View Name.............................................. 144, 145

View Recorded................................................ 120

View Recorded Events viewing........................................................ 120

View Recorded Events....................................120 View Recorded Events....................................120

View Recorded Events....................................120

View Recorded Events....................................121

View, Management .............................................5

Viewing files type ALL ....................................................... 85

Viewing files ......................................................85

Visual Settings ................................................202

Vol Log Sample Period ..................................... 65

Vol/Occ.............................................................. 76 Vol/Occ Report.................................................. 76

Vol/Occ Setup ...................................................76

Volume...................................................... 76, 165

VSL ................................................................. 159

W Wag................................................................... 65

Wait Connection ...................................................45

Walk ........ 56, 65, 76, 83, 104, 118, 128, 176, 240 Walk Rest Modifier.................................... 65, 240

Warning..................................................... 29, 202

Warning Alarm Typical Settings ..........................................202

Warning Alarm .................................................. 29

Warning Alarm ................................................202

Warning settings .............................................202

Watchdog................................................237, 240

Wav file ........................................................... 202

Ways couple ...................................................81, 157

Ways .....................................1, 15, 33, 47, 48, 81

Ways ................................................................. 81

Weather Station ......................................152, 159

Weather Status ...............................................159

Weather View.................................................. 159

Weed




296

Spring ........................................................... 56

Weed.................................................................56

Week ................................................... 56, 65, 184

Week Plans .................................................56, 65

Weekly .................................................... 107, 184

Welcome IQCentral ........................................................ 1IQCentral Operating Manual........................... 1

Welcome ............................................................. 1

Westbound Thru................................................56

Which fails indicate ....................................................... 234

Which fails....................................................... 234

Which generates ............................................. 235

Which manipulates data.....................................................123, 124

Which manipulates.......................................... 123

Which manipulates.......................................... 124

Which responds calling.......................................................... 233

Which responds .............................................. 233

Which senses controller.............................................234, 240

Which senses.................................................. 234

Which senses.................................................. 240

Why ......................................................... 169, 207

WidthFrom values ......................................................... 134

WidthFrom....................................................... 134

WidthNamesFrom ...........................................134

WidthNamesTo ............................................... 134

WidthShapeFrom ............................................ 134

WidthShapeTo ................................................ 134

WidthTo 100..............................................................134 set ...............................................................134

WidthTo........................................................... 134 Wig ....................................................................65

Window hosting............................................... 216

Window menu .............................................10, 15

Windows............................................................ 15

Windows Paint ................................................229

Windows Scheduler ................................184, 186

Windows Service.........................26, 28, 178, 189

Windows Services tool ......................................28

With Interacting .....................................................98

With Maps........................................................133

Wmf ...................................................................85

Word ................................................109, 205, 208 Word file

save ............................................................208

Word file ..........................................................205

Word file ..........................................................208

Word window...........................................205, 208

Working 3000E TS2 ..................................................165 Controller assigned.........................53, 88, 136 TS2 .............................................................165

WRM................................................................240

Www.peektraffic.com.........................................55 Www.quixtraffic.com......................................4, 55

X XML .........................................................186, 208

XON Char..........................................................56

XPed..................................................................65

Y Y/N.....................................................................65

Year ...................................................................65

Year Plans ...................................................56, 65

Yellow 56, 65, 76, 83, 95, 197, 202, 233, 234, 237

Yellow Arrow Omit .............................................56

Yellow Limit .......................................................56

Yellow Overlap ..................................................83

Yes ....................................39, 120, 150, 163, 212

Yes/No...................................................56, 65, 76

Yield Percentage ...............................................65

Yield, Single.......................................................92

Your Own Password Changing.....................................................215

Your Own Password........................................215

Your Password Changing.................................................8, 213

Your Password ....................................................8

Your Password ................................................213

Your Password ................................................214






298



